Table of Contents

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D. C. 20549

 


FORM 10-K

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

For the fiscal year ended   Commission file number 0-24630
December 31, 2006  

or

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

     For the transition period from                                  to                                 .

MIDWEST ONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.

 

(State of Incorporation)   (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)
Iowa   42-1003699

222 First Avenue East, Oskaloosa, Iowa 52577

Registrant’s telephone number: 641-673-8448

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each class

 

Name of each exchange on which registered

None   None

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

Common Stock, $5 par value

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.    Yes   ¨     No   x

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act.     Yes   ¨     No   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports) and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes   x .    No   ¨ .

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of the registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.     ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act).

 

Large Accelerated Filer     ¨   Accelerated Filer     ¨   Non-accelerated Filer     x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act).    Yes   ¨     No   x

The aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of the last business day of the registrant’s most recently completed second fiscal quarter, June 30, 2006, was $63,700,759.

Indicate the number of shares outstanding of each of the issuer’s classes of common stock, as of the most recent practicable date, March 23, 2007.

3,705,411 shares Common Stock, $5 par value

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

The definitive proxy statement of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. for the 2007 annual meeting of shareholders is incorporated by reference into Part II and Part III hereof to the extent indicated in such Parts.

 



Table of Contents

Table of Contents

 

PART I
Item 1.  

Business

   1
 

A.     General Description

   1
 

B.     Subsidiaries

   1
 

C.     Loan Pool Participations

   2
 

D.     Competition

   6
 

E.     Supervision and Regulation

   6
 

F.     Employees

   8
Item 1A.  

Risk Factors

   9
Item 1B.  

Unresolved Staff Comments

   11
Item 2.  

Properties

   12
Item 3.  

Legal Proceedings

   13
Item 4.  

Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders

   13
PART II
Item 5.  

Market for the Registrant’s Common Equity and Related Stockholder Matters

   14
Item 6.  

Selected Financial Data

   16
Item 7.  

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

   16
Item 7A.  

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

   40
Item 8.  

Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

   41
Item 9.  

Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure

   41
Item 9A.  

Controls and Procedures

   41
PART III
Item 10.  

Directors and Executive Officers of the Registrant

   42
Item 11.  

Executive Compensation

   42
Item 12.  

Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management

   42
Item 13.  

Certain Relationships and Related Transactions

   42
Item 14.  

Principal Accounting Fees and Services

   42
PART IV
Item 15.  

Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules

   43


Table of Contents

PART I

Item 1.   Business

A.  General Description

MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. (the “Company”) is a community-based financial holding company headquartered in Oskaloosa, Mahaska County, Iowa. The Company, through its wholly owned subsidiaries, provides a wide range of services, including traditional banking services, trust services, residential mortgage services, insurance brokerage and retail securities brokerage services. The Company provides a full range of services to individual and corporate customers. The Company’s principal operating subsidiary is MidWest One Bank (referred to as the “Bank”) with headquarters in Oskaloosa.

The Bank subsidiary engages in retail and commercial banking and related financial services, providing the usual products and services such as deposits, commercial, agricultural, real estate, and consumer loans, and trust services. The Bank is a community-oriented, full-service commercial bank, providing traditional banking services to individuals, small to medium sized businesses, farmers, government and public entities and not-for-profit organizations. The Bank operates out of 19 locations in south central and eastern Iowa.

MidWest One Investment Services, Inc. (“MWI”) provides retail brokerage and financial planning services throughout the banking offices of the Company. MWI is a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company that was established in 2004.

Cook & Son Agency, Inc. (“Cook”) provides insurance agency services for individuals and corporations in the markets served by the Company. Cook was acquired by the Company on September 1, 2005, and currently serves customers in the Pella, Iowa area.

The Company also owns 100% of the stock of a commercial finance company MIC Financial, Inc. (“MIC Financial”). MIC Financial provided factoring, equipment leasing and accounts receivable financing to small business clients. MIC Financial is no longer offering these services and is now inactive.

Since 1988, the Company, either directly or through the Bank, has invested in loan pool participations that have been purchased by certain non-affiliated independent service corporations (collectively, the “Servicer”) from various sources including large financial institutions and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”). These loan pool investments generally consist of nonperforming and distressed loans that have been sold at prices reflecting varying discounts from the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the underlying loans. The amount of the discount depends on the credit quality of the portfolio. The Servicer collects these loans from the borrowers.

The Company was incorporated in Iowa in 1973 and was a bank holding company registered under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956. Effective January 9, 2005, the Company became a financial holding company pursuant to the provisions of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999. The Company provides support services to the Bank including management assistance, auditing services and loan review.

B.  Subsidiaries

MidWestOne Bank —The Company currently has one bank subsidiary operating under the name of MidWestOne Bank. Prior to January 1, 2006, the Company had four bank subsidiaries. On January 1, 2006, the four banks were merged into one Iowa-chartered subsidiary bank with headquarters located in Oskaloosa, Iowa. All previously existing banking locations were retained as branches of the newly consolidated bank and all banking services provided by the individual banks are offered by the new consolidated bank.

 

1


Table of Contents

The Bank is a full-service, commercial bank chartered as an Iowa state bank in 1931. The Bank was known as Mahaska State Bank until 2003, when the name was changed to MidWestOne Bank & Trust. On January 1, 2006, the Bank adopted the name MidWestOne Bank. The Bank operates in 12 counties with 19 offices in 13 communities in south central and eastern Iowa. The Bank serves Mahaska County from its main bank and two branch offices in Oskaloosa. It also serves Benton County from its two offices in Belle Plaine, Black Hawk County from its offices in Hudson and Waterloo, Des Moines County from its two offices in Burlington, Iowa County from its office in North English, Jefferson County from its two offices in Fairfield, Keokuk County from its office in Sigourney, Lee County from its office in Fort Madison, Louisa County from its office in Wapello, Marion County from its two offices in Pella, Scott County from its office in Davenport and Wapello County from its office in Ottumwa. The Bank provides a wide array of retail and commercial banking services, including demand, savings and time deposits; real estate, commercial, agricultural and consumer loans; and trust services.

MIC Financial, Inc. —MIC Financial is an Iowa corporation that was formed by the Company in 1974 under the name of MIC Leasing Co. The company operated under the name of On-Site Commercial Services until June 1997 when the name was officially changed to On-Site Credit Services, Inc. Effective March 21, 2000, the name was changed to MIC Financial, Inc. As of December 31, 2006, the company had no remaining assets.

MidWestOne Investment Services, Inc. —MWI is an Iowa corporation that was formed in 2004. The entity provides retail brokerage and financial planning services in conjunction with the Company’s bank subsidiary locations in Pella, Oskaloosa, Sigourney and Burlington, Iowa.

Cook & Son Agency, Inc. —Cook is an Iowa corporation that was acquired by the Company in 2005. Cook acts as an insurance agency for individuals and businesses in the Pella, Iowa area.

C.  Loan Pool Participations

The Company through the Bank, has participation interests in pools of loans purchased at varying discounts from the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the underlying loans. The Company has been purchasing participation interests in discounted loans since 1988. These pools of loans are currently held and serviced by a separate independent servicing corporation (referred to as the “Servicer”) known as States Resources Corporation. The Company does not have any ownership interest in or control over States Resources Corporation. States Resources Corporation was founded in 1998 and is owned by Randal Vardaman. Prior to the formation of States Resources Corporation, Mr. Vardaman owned various other independent loan servicing corporations. The Company has maintained a business relationship with Mr. Vardaman and the various predecessor corporations owned by him since 1988. Mr. Vardaman has been engaged in credit analysis and loan portfolio management in various positions since 1970.

The Company has invested in loan pools purchased by the Servicer from large nonaffiliated banking organizations and from the FDIC acting as receiver of failed banks and savings institutions. The loans comprising the pools were originated throughout the United States. As part of the agreement to purchase participation interests in the loan pools, the Company and the Bank have contracted with the Servicer to service the underlying loans within the respective loan pools that are owned of record by the Servicer. The Servicer also evaluates various loan pools prior to purchase and makes recommendations to the Company concerning the creditworthiness of proposed loan pool purchases and proposes appropriate bids to the Company and any other potential loan pool participants.

The Servicer and its predecessor organizations have bid on loan pools from various regional offices of the FDIC and from other sources since 1988. The Company and the Bank have purchased participation interests in such pools of loans. The purchase prices paid by the Company for loan pool participations have ranged from 5.5% to 97.7% of the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the loans comprising such pools at the time of purchase. The Servicer acquires the loan pools without recourse against the sellers and, accordingly, the risk of noncollectibility is, for the most part, assumed by the Company and any other investors in a particular pool.

 

2


Table of Contents

Each pool has a different composition and different characteristics. The composition of a loan pool is generally determined by the seller based on its desire to maximize the price it receives for all loans among the various pools. Many of the pools consist of loans primarily secured by single-family, multi-family, and small commercial real estate. Some pools may consist of a large number of small consumer loans that are secured by other assets such as automobiles or mobile homes, while other pools may consist of small to medium balance commercial loans. Some may contain a mixture of such loans and other types of loans. The pools the Company is currently investing in are comprised primarily of past-due nonperforming loans secured by commercial real estate and other commercial assets. The price bid and paid for such a loan pool is determined based on the composition of the particular pool, the amounts the Servicer believes can be collected on such a pool, and the risks associated with the collection of such amounts.

In considering an investment in a loan pool, the Servicer will evaluate loans owned and being offered and make recommendations to the Company and other prospective investors concerning the creditworthiness of the proposed loan pool purchase. The Servicer performs a comprehensive analysis of the loan pool in an attempt to ensure proper valuation and adequate safeguards in the event of default. The bid price on the loan pools will be reflective of the results of the Servicer’s pre-acquisition review of the loan files. In many cases the loan files may not be current and substantial uncertainties may exist regarding the collectibility of the various loans in the pool. Management believes that in many instances the non-current loans can be brought current once the Servicer has an opportunity to contact the debtor. The Company makes its own decisions as to whether or not to participate in a particular loan pool that has been recommended by the Servicer, based on the Company’s experience with the various categories and qualities of loans.

The sales of loan pools by the sellers is generally conducted by sealed bid auction. A sealed bid auction requires each bidder to submit a confidential bid on the subject loan pool and the loan pool is awarded to the highest bidder. In recent years, the Servicer and the Company have faced increasing competition in bidding for loan pools.

Since 1988, the Servicer and its predecessor organizations, on behalf of the Company and other investors, have bid on a large number of loan pools and have been successful in purchasing 129 loan pools including 6 in 2007. The Company and other investors in the loan pools fund the purchase by the Servicer and each investor receives a percentage interest in the loan pool based on its proportional investment relative to the total purchase price of the pool. Each investor receives a loan pool participation certificate reflecting this interest.

The purchased loan pools consist of loans evidenced by promissory notes. Loans purchased are generally secured by either real property or personal property. Some loan pools may contain unsecured loans. The value of the collateral may range from nominal to substantial and often may be difficult to establish prior to acquisition of the pools with the level of certainty that is typically required in a financial institution. The nature and structure of the due diligence process generally precludes inspection or appraisal of collateral prior to placing a bid on a loan pool.

Upon the acquisition of a participation interest in a loan pool, the Company assumes the risk that the Servicer will be unable to recover an amount equal to the purchase price plus the carrying costs, if any, and collection costs on such accounts. The extent of such risk is dependent on a number of factors, including the Servicer’s ability to locate the debtors, the debtors’ financial condition, the possibility that a debtor may file for protection under applicable bankruptcy laws, the Servicer’s ability to locate the collateral, if any, for the loan and to obtain possession of such collateral, the value of such collateral, and the length of time it takes to realize the ultimate recovery either through collection procedures or through a resale of the loans following a restructure.

A cost “basis” is assigned to each individual loan acquired on a cents per dollar (discounted price) based on the Servicer’s assessment of the recovery potential of each such loan in relation to the total discounted price paid to acquire the pool. This methodology assigns a higher basis to performing loans with greater potential collectibility and a lower basis to those loans identified as having little or no potential for collection.

 

3


Table of Contents

Loan pool participations are shown on the Company’s balance sheet as a separate asset category. The original carrying value of loan pool participations represents the discounted price paid by the Company to acquire its participation interests in various loan pools purchased by the Servicer. The Company’s investment balance is reduced as the Servicer collects principal payments on the loans and remits the proportionate share of such payments to the Company.

Loan pools acquired subsequent to January 1, 2005, are accounted for in accordance with the provisions of Statement of Position 03-3, “Accounting for Certain Loans or Debt Securities Acquired in a Transfer” (“SOP 03-3”) issued by the Accounting Standards Executive Committee of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.

SOP 03-3 provides updated guidance on the accounting for purchased loans that show evidence of deterioration of credit quality since origination and for which it is probable, at acquisition, that the purchaser will be unable to collect all contractually required payments receivable. SOP 03-3 generally requires that the excess of the estimated cash flows expected to be collected on the loan over the initial investment be accreted over the estimated remaining life of the loan. According to SOP 03-3, in order to apply the interest method of recognition to these types of loans, there must be sufficient information to reasonably estimate the amount and timing of the cash flows expected to be collected. When that is not the case, the loan should be accounted for on nonaccrual status applying cash basis income recognition to the loan.

The Company has developed and implemented procedures to determine if accretion of the discount (“accretable yield”) on the purchased loans in a pool is required under SOP 03-3. These procedures were applied to all loans acquired subsequent to January 1, 2005 (the adoption date of SOP 03-3). Given the impaired nature of the loan pools typically purchased, the individual loans are evaluated individually with a determination made utilizing various criteria including: past-due status, late payments, legal status of the loan (not in foreclosure, judgment against the borrower, or referred to legal counsel), frequency of payments made, collateral adequacy and the borrower’s financial condition. If all the criteria are met, the individual loan will utilize the accounting treatment required by SOP 03-3 with the accretable yield difference between the expected cash flows and the purchased basis accreted into income on the level yield basis over the anticipated life of the loan. If any of the six criteria are not met, the loan is accounted for on the cash-basis of accounting.

In the event that a prepayment is received on a loan accounted for under SOP 03-3, the accretable yield is recomputed and the revised amount accreted over the estimated remaining life of the loan on the level yield basis. If a loan subject to accretable yield under SOP 03-3 fails to make timely payments, it is subject to classification and an allowance for loss would be established.

For those pools acquired prior to December 31, 2004, the accounting treatment utilized is the nonaccrual (or cash) basis in one of three methods, depending on the circumstances. First, if a borrower makes regular payments on a loan, the payment received is first applied to interest income in the amount of interest due at the contract rate. Further payments are applied to principal in a ratio reflecting the proportion of cost basis to loan principal amount. Payments in excess of interest and this ratio are recorded as discount income. Discount income earned over the life of a loan represents loan principal collected in excess of the price originally paid to acquire the loan from the FDIC or any other sellers, which price constitutes the cost “basis” of the loan.

Secondly, if the borrower fails to make regular payments, the Servicer and the Company evaluate the collateral supporting the loan. If it is determined that the loan is well secured, then payments are applied as previously described. If it is determined that the collateral is deficient, payments are applied to the principal balance of the loan with no recognition of interest due. The cost recovery method governs the application of payments received to the outstanding principal balance. Under this method, any amount received is initially applied to the cost “basis” of the loan and any additional amounts received are recognized as discount income.

 

4


Table of Contents

Third, where the Servicer negotiates a settlement of a loan for a lump sum, the payment is first applied to principal to the extent of the assigned cost “basis” with the excess treated as discount income up to the original principal value of the loan, and any remainder is treated as interest income on loan pool participations.

In each case, where changed circumstances or new information lead the Servicer to believe that collection of the note or recovery of the basis through collateral would be less than originally determined, the cost basis assigned to the loan is written down or written off through a charge against discount income. The Servicer and representatives of the Company continually evaluate the collectability of the loans and the recovery of the underlying basis. On a quarterly basis, those loans that are determined to have a possible recovery of less than the assigned basis amount are placed on a “watch list.” The amount of basis exceeding the estimated recovery amount on the “watch list” loans is written off by a charge against discount income.

The Company does not recognize as income any accrued interest receivable on the loan pools accounted for on a cash basis. Interest income is only recognized when collected and actually remitted to the Company by the Servicer for those loans acquired prior to December 31, 2004, and for those loans subject to nonaccrual status in accordance with SOP 03-3. Many of the pools that have been purchased by the Servicer do not include purchased interest in the cost basis. Interest income collected by the Servicer is included in the Company’s consolidated financial statements as interest income and discount on loan pool participations.

Interest income and discount on loan pool participations recorded by the Company is net of collection expenses incurred by the Servicer and net of the servicing fee and share of recovery profit paid to the Servicer. Collection costs include salary and benefits paid by the Servicer to its employees, legal fees, costs to maintain and insure real estate owned, and other operating expenses. Under the terms of the States Resources agreement, the Servicer receives a servicing fee based on one percent of the gross monthly collections of principal and interest, net of collection costs. Additionally, the Servicer receives a tiered percentage share of the recovery profit in excess of the investors’ required return on investment on each individual loan pool. The Servicer’s percentage share of recovery profit is linked to a ten-tier index and ranges from zero to twenty-seven percent depending upon the return on investment achieved. The investor’s minimum required return on investment is based on the two-year treasury rate at the time a loan pool is purchased plus 4.0 percent. For every one percent increase obtained over the investor’s minimum required return, the Servicer percentage moves up one tier level. In the event that the return on a particular pool does not exceed the required return on investment, the Servicer does not receive a percentage share of the recovery profit. Discount income is added to interest income and reflected as one amount on the Company’s consolidated statement of income. Profit (or loss) from collection activities is determined on a monthly basis. The Servicer provides the Company with monthly reports detailing collections of principal and interest, face value of loans collected and those written off, actual operating expenses incurred, remaining asset balances (both in terms of cost basis and principal amount of loans), a comparison of actual collections and expenses with target collections and budgeted expenses, and summaries of remaining collection targets. The Servicer also provides aging reports and “watch lists” for the loan pools. Monthly meetings are held between the Company and representatives of the Servicer to review collection efforts and results, to discuss future plans of action, and to discuss potential opportunities. Additionally, the Company’s and the Servicer’s personnel communicate on almost a daily basis to discuss various issues regarding the loan pools. Company management personnel visit the Servicer’s operation in Omaha, Nebraska on a regular basis; and the Company’s loan review officer and its internal auditor perform asset reviews and audit procedures on a regular basis.

The Company’s overall cost basis in its loan pool participations represents a discount from the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the loans underlying the pools. For example, as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, such cost basis was $98,885,000 and $103,570,000, respectively, while the contractual outstanding principal amounts of the underlying loans as of such dates were approximately $147,995,000 and $150,556,000, respectively. The discounted cost basis inherently reflects the assessed collectibility of the underlying loans. The Company does not include any amounts related to the loan pool participations in its totals of nonperforming loans. As part of the ongoing collection process, the Servicer may, from time to time, foreclose on real estate

 

5


Table of Contents

mortgages and acquire title to property in satisfaction of such debts. This real estate may be held by the Servicer as “real estate owned” for a period of time until it can be sold. Since the Company’s investment in loan pools is classified as participations in pools of loans, the Company does not include the real estate owned that is held by the Servicer with the amount of any other real estate it may hold directly as a result of its own foreclosure activities.

The underlying loans in the loan pool participations include both fixed rate and variable rate instruments. No amounts for interest due are reflected in the carrying value of the loan pool participations. Based on historical experience, the average period of collectibility for loans underlying the Company’s loan pool participations, many of which have exceeded contractual maturity dates, is approximately three to five years. Management has reviewed the recoverability of the underlying loans and believes that the carrying value does not exceed the net realizable value of its investment in loan pool participations.

D.  Competition

The Company competes in the commercial banking industry through the Bank. This industry is highly competitive, and the Bank faces strong direct competition for deposits, loans, and other financial-related services. The offices in Benton, Black Hawk, Des Moines, Iowa, Jefferson, Keokuk, Lee, Louisa, Mahaska, Marion, Scott and Wapello counties in south central and eastern Iowa compete with other commercial banks, thrifts, credit unions, stockbrokers, finance divisions of auto and farm equipment companies, agricultural suppliers, and other agricultural-related lenders. Some of these competitors are local, while others are statewide or nationwide. The Bank competes for deposits principally by offering depositors a wide variety of deposit programs, convenient office locations, hours and other services, and for loan originations primarily through interest rates and loan fees they charge, the efficiency and quality of services they provide to borrowers and the variety of their loan products. Some of the financial institutions and financial service organizations with which the Bank competes are not subject to the same degree of regulation as that imposed on federally insured Iowa-chartered banks. As a result, such competitors have advantages over the Bank in providing certain services. As of December 31, 2006, there were approximately 74 other banks having 225 offices or branches operating within the 12 counties in which the Company has locations. Based on deposit information collected by the FDIC as of June 30, 2006, the Company maintained approximately 6.5 percent of the bank deposits within the 12 counties. New competitors may develop that are substantially larger and have significantly greater resources than the Bank. Currently, major competitors in some of the Company’s markets include Wells Fargo Bank, U. S. Bank, Regions Bank and Bank of the West.

The Company also faces competition with respect to its investments in loan pool participations. The Company’s financial success regarding loan pools to date is largely attributable to the Servicer’s ability to determine which loan pools to bid on and ultimately purchase, the availability of assets to fund the purchases and the Servicer’s ability to collect on the underlying assets. Investments in loan pools have become increasingly popular in recent years, leading financial institutions and other competitors to become active at loan pool auctions conducted by the FDIC and other sellers. There is no assurance that the Company, through the Servicer, will be able to bid successfully in the future. Certain existing competitors of the Company are substantially larger and have significantly greater financial resources than the Company. Increased participation by new institutions or other investors may also create increased buying interest which could also result in higher bid prices for the type of loan pools considered for investment by the Company. In addition, new and existing competitors may develop due diligence procedures comparable to the Servicer’s procedures. The emergence of such competition could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business and financial results. The Company expects that its success in the future will depend more on the performance of the Bank subsidiary and less on the investment in loan pool participations.

E.  Supervision and Regulation

Financial holding companies and banks are extensively regulated under federal and state law. References under this heading to applicable statutes or regulations are brief summaries of the portions thereof and do not

 

6


Table of Contents

purport to be complete and are qualified in their entirety by reference to those statutes and regulations. Any change in applicable laws or regulations may have a material adverse effect on the business of the Company and the Bank.

The Company, as a financial holding company, is subject to regulation under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (the “Act”) and is registered with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System. Under the Act, the Company is prohibited, with certain exceptions, from acquiring direct or indirect ownership or control of more than 5% of the voting shares of any company which is not a bank and from engaging in any business other than that of banking, managing and controlling banks or furnishing services to affiliated banks, except that the Company may engage in and own shares of companies engaged in certain businesses found by the Board of Governors to be so closely related to banking “as to be proper incident thereto,” such as owning a savings association. The Act does not place territorial restrictions on the activities of bank-related subsidiaries of bank holding companies. The Company is required by the Act to file periodic reports of its operations with the Board of Governors and is subject to examination by the Board of Governors. Under the Act and Federal Reserve Board regulations, the Company and the Bank are prohibited from engaging in certain tie-in arrangements in connection with an extension of credit, lease, sale of property, or furnishing of services.

Iowa law permits bank holding companies domiciled in Iowa to make acquisitions throughout the state. Iowa law also permits bank holding companies located in the Midwestern Region (defined to include Illinois, Iowa, Minnesota, Missouri, Nebraska, South Dakota, and Wisconsin) to acquire banks or bank holding companies located in Iowa subject to approval by the Iowa Division of Banking and subject to certain statutory limitations. In addition, the Company may acquire banks or bank holding companies located in the Midwestern Region or outside the Midwestern Region, provided the Company’s principal place of business remains in the Midwestern Region and the acquisition is authorized by the laws of the state in which the acquisition is to be made.

The Company and its subsidiaries are affiliates within the meaning of the Federal Reserve Act. As affiliates, they are subject to certain restrictions on loans by an affiliated bank or thrift (collectively “affiliated banks”) to the Company, other affiliated banks or such other subsidiaries, on investments by an affiliated bank in their stock or securities and on an affiliated bank taking such stock and securities as collateral for loans to any borrower. The Company is also subject to certain restrictions with respect to direct issuance, flotation, underwriting, public sale or distribution of certain securities.

Under Iowa law, the Bank is subject to supervision and examination by the Iowa Division of Banking. The Bank is required to pay supervisory assessments to the Iowa Division of Banking to fund the operations of that agency. The amount of the assessment is calculated on the basis of the institution’s total assets. As an affiliate of the Bank, the Company is also subject to examination by the Iowa Division of Banking.

The customer deposits in the Bank are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (the “FDIC”), thus the Bank is subject to the supervision and examination by the FDIC. The Bank is required to maintain certain minimum capital ratios established by these regulators. The Bank is assessed fees by the FDIC to insure the funds of customers on deposit.

In addition, Iowa state law imposes restrictions on the operations of state-chartered banks including limitations on the amount a bank can lend to a single borrower and limitations on the nature and amount of securities in which it may invest. Iowa state-chartered banks are limited to loaning money to a single borrower in an amount not to exceed 15% of the individual bank’s aggregate capital, plus additional amounts under certain circumstances.

Iowa law currently permits the establishment of branches anywhere within the state, subject to the receipt of all required regulatory approvals. The number of offices a state bank may establish is not limited.

The Company operates within a regulatory structure that continuously evolves. In the last several years, significant changes have occurred that affect the Company. There can be no assurance that the Iowa or federal

 

7


Table of Contents

regulators will not in the future impose further restrictions or limits on the Company’s business operations including loan pool activities.

The FDIC Improvement Act of 1991 (the “FDICIA”) was primarily designed to recapitalize the FDIC’s Bank Insurance Fund (the “BIF”) and the Savings Association Insurance Fund (the “SAIF”). To accomplish this purpose the FDIC was granted additional borrowing authority, granted the power to levy emergency special assessments on all insured depository institutions, granted the power to change the BIF and SAIF rates on deposits on a semi-annual basis, and directed to draft regulations that provided for a “Risk-Based Assessment System” that was implemented on January 1, 1994. The FDICIA also imposed additional regulatory safety and soundness standards upon depository institutions and granted additional authority to the FDIC. The FDICIA generally requires that all institutions be examined by the FDIC annually. Under the provisions of the FDICIA, all regulatory authorities are required to examine their regulatory accounting standards and, to the extent possible, are required to conform to generally accepted accounting principles. Finally, the FDICIA requires the federal banking regulators to take prompt corrective action with respect to depository institutions that fall below certain capital standards and prohibits any depository institution from making any capital distribution that would cause it to be undercapitalized.

Legislation became effective on September 30, 1995, which served to lessen or remove certain legal barriers to interstate banking and branching by financial institutions. The legislation has resulted in an increase in the nationwide consolidation activity occurring among financial institutions by facilitating interstate bank operations and acquisitions.

On November 2, 1999, the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act was enacted into law. This legislation provides for significant financial services reform by repealing key provisions of the Glass Steagall Act thereby permitting commercial banks to affiliate with investment banks, it substantially modifies the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 to permit companies that own banks to engage in any type of financial activity, and it allows subsidiaries of banks to engage in a broad range of financial activities that are not permitted for banks themselves. The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act significantly changed the competitive environment in which the Company and its subsidiaries conduct business, including the opportunity for brokerage and financial services such as those offered through MWI and insurance agency services offered by Cook.

In early 2006, the Federal Deposit Insurance Reform Act of 2005 (the Reform Act) was signed into law. The Reform Act implements deposit insurance reform through the merger of the Bank Insurance Fund and the Savings Association Insurance Fund, increases the coverage limit and indexes the limit for retirement accounts, establishes the methodology for deposit premium assessment based on risk criteria and grants a one-time initial assessment credit based on an institution’s past contributions to the deposit insurance fund. The new assessment rates are effective January 1, 2007. The Company’s one-time assessment credit of $494,000 will offset the premium assessment for all of 2007 and is expected to offset a portion of the 2008 premium assessment. Once the one-time assessment credit is fully utilized, the Company will incur deposit premium assessment costs that will reduce future profitability.

The earnings of the Company are affected by the policies of regulatory authorities, including the Federal Reserve System. Federal Reserve System monetary policies have had a significant effect on the operating results of banks and thrifts in the past and are expected to do so in the future. Because of changing conditions in the economy and in the money markets as a result of actions by monetary and fiscal authorities, interest rates, credit availability and deposit levels may change due to circumstances beyond the control of the Company. Future policies of the Federal Reserve System and other authorities cannot be predicted, nor can their effect on future earnings be predicted.

F.  Employees

On December 31, 2006, the Company had 225 full-time equivalent employees. The Company provides its employees with a comprehensive program of benefits, some of which are on a contributory basis, including comprehensive medical and dental plans, life insurance, long-term and short-term disability coverage, a 401(k)

 

8


Table of Contents

plan, and an employee stock ownership plan. None of the Company’s employees are represented by unions. Management considers its relationship with its employees to be excellent.

Item 1A.   Risk Factors

The performance of the Company is subject to various risks. We consider the risks described below to be the most significant risks we face, but such risks are not the only risk factors that could affect us. Additional risks and uncertainties not currently known to us or that we currently deem to be immaterial also may materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition or results of operations.

We may be adversely affected by economic conditions in the local economies in which we conduct our operations, and in the United States in general.

Unfavorable or uncertain economic and market conditions may adversely affect our business and profitability. Our business faces various material risks, including credit risk and the risk that the demand for our products and services will decrease. Foreign or domestic terrorism or geopolitical events could shock commodity and financial markets and cause an economic downturn. In an economic downturn, our credit risk and litigation expense would increase. Also, decreases in consumer confidence, real estate values, interest rates and investment returns, usually associated with a downturn, could make the types of loans we originate less profitable.

We invest in pools of performing and nonperforming loans that comprise a significant component of our assets and generate substantial interest income with yields that may fluctuate considerably resulting in inconsistent profitability from period to period.

As of December 31, 2006, approximately fourteen percent of the Company’s earning assets were invested in loan pools. For the year ended December 31, 2006, approximately seventeen percent of the Company’s gross total revenue was derived from the loan pools. The loan pool investment is a “non-traditional” activity that the Company has been involved with since 1988 that has historically provided a higher return than typical loans and investment securities. The return on the Company’s investment in loan pools and the effect on the Company’s profitability is somewhat unpredictable due to fluctuations in the balance of loan pools and collections from borrowers by the loan pool Servicer. Balances of the loan pools are affected by the ability to purchase additional loan pools to maintain the level of investment and by the payment and refinancing activities of the borrowers resulting in pay-offs of the underlying loans and reduction in the balances. Purchase of the new loan pools are subject to many factors that are outside the Company’s control including: availability, competition, credit and performance quality of assets offered for sale, asset size and type, and the economic and interest rate environment. Collections from the individual borrowers are managed by the Servicer and are affected by the borrower’s financial ability and willingness to pay, foreclosure and legal action, collateral value, and the economy in general. Any of these identified factors, and others not identified, can affect the Company’s return on the loan pool investment. We believe that the higher return historically realized on the loan pool investment compensates for the unpredictability of purchases and collections on the pools.

Our growth strategy involves risks that may negatively impact our net income and we may experience difficulties in managing our growth.

We may acquire banks and related businesses as part of our growth strategy that we believe provide a strategic and/or a geographic fit with our business. To the extent that we grow through acquisitions, we cannot assure you that we will be able to adequately and profitably manage this growth. There are risks typically associated with acquiring other banks and businesses, including the difficulty and expense of integrating operations and personnel, the possible loss of key customers and/or employees of the acquired business, potential asset quality issues, the potential disruption to our business, diversion of management’s time and attention, and the possibility of unknown or contingent liabilities. In addition to acquisitions, we may expand into new communities by opening “de novo” banks and/or branches. As we expand via the opening of de novo banks or branches, we are likely to incur higher operating expenses relative to operating income from the new operations, which may have an adverse effect on our net income, return on average equity and return on average assets.

 

9


Table of Contents

Our ability to retain and attract qualified employees is critical to the success of our business and the failure to do so may materially adversely affect our performance.

Our people are our most important resource and competition for qualified employees is intense. In order to retain and attract qualified employees, we must compensate such employees at market levels. Typically, those levels have caused employee compensation to be our greatest noninterest expense. If we are unable to continue to retain and attract qualified employees, or if compensation costs required to retain and attract qualified employees becomes more expensive, our performance, including our competitive position, could be affected.

Our allowance for loan losses may be insufficient to absorb possible losses in our loan portfolio.

Like all financial institutions, we maintain an allowance for loan losses to provide for loans in our portfolio that may not be repaid in their entirety. We believe that our allowance for loan losses is maintained at a level adequate to absorb probable losses inherent in our loan portfolio as of the corresponding balance sheet date. However, our allowance for loan losses may not be sufficient to cover actual losses, and future provisions for loan losses could materially adversely affect our operating results.

We are subject to substantial regulation which could adversely affect our business and operations.

As a financial institution, we are subject to extensive regulation, which materially affects our business. Statutes, regulations and policies that we are subject to may be changed at any time, and the interpretation and the application of those laws and regulations by our regulators is also subject to change. There can be no assurance that future changes in regulations or in their interpretation or application will not adversely affect us. We have established policies, procedures and systems designed to comply with these regulatory and operational risk requirements. We do, however, face complexity and costs associated with our compliance efforts. Adverse publicity and damage to our reputation arising from the failure or perceived failure to comply with legal, regulatory or contractual requirements could affect our ability to attract and retain customers or could result in enforcement actions, fines, penalties and lawsuits.

If we are not able to anticipate and keep pace with rapid changes in technology, or do not respond to rapid technological changes in our industry, our business can be adversely affected.

The financial services industry continues to experience rapid technological changes with frequent introductions of new technology-driven products and services. The effective use of technology increases efficiency and enables financial institutions to better serve customers and reduce costs. Our future success will depend, in part, upon our ability to address the needs of our customers by using technology to provide products and services that will satisfy customer demands for convenience, as well as to create additional efficiencies in our operations. Many of our competitors have substantially greater resources to invest in technological improvements. As a result, we may not be able to effectively implement new technology-driven products and services or be successful in marketing these products and services to our customers.

We are subject to security and operational risks relating to our use of technology that could damage our reputation and our business.

Security breaches in our internet banking activities could expose us to possible liability and damage our reputation. Any compromise of our security could also prevent customers from using our internet banking services that involve the transmission of confidential information. We rely on standard internet security systems to provide the security and authentication necessary to effect secure transmission of data. These precautions may not protect our systems from compromises or breaches of our security measures that could result in damage to our reputation and our business.

 

10


Table of Contents

We are subject to operational risk and an operational failure that could materially adversely affect our business.

Operational risk refers to the risk of loss arising from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, and/or systems. Operational risk also refers to the risk that external events, such as external changes (e.g., natural disasters, terrorist attacks and/or health epidemics), failures or frauds, will result in losses to our business. We seek to monitor and control our risk exposure through a variety of financial, credit, operational, compliance and legal reporting systems. We employ risk monitoring and risk mitigation techniques, but those techniques and the judgments that accompany their application may not be adequate to deal with unexpected economic and financial events or the specifics and timing of such events. Employee errors and employee or customer misconduct could subject us to financial losses or regulatory sanctions and seriously harm our reputation. We maintain a system of internal control and insurance coverage to mitigate against operational risks, including data processing system failures and errors and customer or employee fraud.

We experience intense competition for loans and deposits.

The banking business is highly competitive and we experience competition in all of our markets from many other financial institutions. We compete with large regional banks, local community banks, credit unions, thrifts, securities and brokerage companies, mortgage companies, insurance companies, finance companies, money market mutual funds, and other non-bank financial service providers. We compete with these institutions both in attracting deposits and making loans as well as in providing other financial services. Increased competition in our market may result in a decrease in amounts of our loans and deposits, reduced spreads between loan rates and deposit rates, or loan terms that are more favorable to the borrowers. Any of these could have a material adverse effect on our ability to grow and remain profitable.

Changing interest rates may adversely affect our profits.

The spread between the interest rates earned on investments, loans and loan pools and the interest rates paid on deposits and other interest-bearing liabilities affects, in part, our profitability. Like other financial institutions, our net interest spread and margin will be affected by general economic conditions and other factors that influence market interest rates and our ability to respond to changes in such rates. Our assets and liabilities at any given time will be such that they are affected differently by a given change in interest rates. As a result, an increase or decrease in rates, the length of loan and certificate of deposit terms or the mix of adjustable and fixed rate loans in our portfolio could have a positive or negative effect on our profitability. We measure interest rate risk under various rate scenarios and using specific criteria and assumptions. This process is summarized under Item 7A of Part II of this Form 10-K. Although we believe our current level of interest rate sensitivity is reasonable and effectively managed, significant fluctuations in interest rates may have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

If we do not continue to meet or exceed regulatory capital requirements and maintain our “well-capitalized” status, there could be an adverse effect on the manner in which we do business and on the confidence our customers have in us.

Under regulatory capital guidelines, we must meet guidelines that involve quantitative measures of assets, liabilities and certain off-balance sheet items. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements could have a material effect on our financial conditions and could subject us to a variety of enforcement actions, as well as certain restrictions on our business. Failure to maintain the status of “well-capitalized” under the regulatory framework could adversely affect the confidence that our customers have in us, which could lead to a decline in the demand for our products and affect the prices that we are able to charge for our products and services.

Item 1B.   Unresolved Staff Comments

NONE

 

11


Table of Contents

Item 2.   Properties

The Company owns its headquarters building located at 222 First Avenue East, Oskaloosa, Iowa. This building is a two-story combination office, data processing facility, and motor bank that was constructed in 1975. The Company’s offices are located on the second floor and the data processing area is located on the first floor. The Bank rents the first floor motor bank area, which includes four drive-up lanes and two walk-up windows and the basement from the Company. The basement contains a meeting room, kitchen, and storage. The Bank leases the facility on a month-to-month basis from the Company.

The principal offices of the Bank are located at 124 South First Street, Oskaloosa, Iowa, in a two-story building owned by the Bank that contains a full banking facility. The Bank also owns a second building in Oskaloosa located at 301 A Avenue West. This one-story banking facility includes two drive-up lanes and is located five blocks northwest of the bank’s principal offices. In addition, the Bank owns a 24-hour automatic teller machine located at 211 South First Street, Oskaloosa, Iowa. The Bank also has four branch locations located outside of Oskaloosa in the communities of North English, Belle Plaine, Hudson and Waterloo, Iowa. All of these branches are full-banking facilities. North English is located 40 miles northeast of Oskaloosa and the branch has two drive-up lanes and a 24-hour automatic teller machine. Belle Plaine is located 60 miles northeast of Oskaloosa and the branch occupies a 6,500 square foot building. This branch also has a motor bank located one block away with one drive-up lane and a 24-hour automatic teller machine. Hudson is located 80 miles north of Oskaloosa and the 2,592 square foot branch has two drive-up lanes and a 24-hour automatic teller machine. Waterloo is located 90 miles north of Oskaloosa and the 3,837 square foot branch has one drive-up lane.

The Bank owns four facilities in the communities of Ottumwa, Fairfield, and Sigourney, Iowa. The Ottumwa building is a two-story brick structure constructed in 1981 and completely remodeled and expanded in 2005. The approximately 10,910 square foot building has several offices, two drive-up lanes, and a drive-up 24 hour automatic teller machine. The building is located at 116 West Main in Ottumwa’s downtown business district. The Fairfield facility is a two-story building located at 58 East Burlington on the southeast corner of the downtown square. The building’s 8,932 square feet is all utilized by the Bank. The Bank also owns and occupies a 3,500 square foot branch facility at 2408 West Burlington Street in Fairfield. The Sigourney facility located at 112 North Main Street is one-half block northwest of the community’s courthouse square in the downtown business district. The 4,596 square foot one-story masonry building was constructed in 1972 as a banking facility with one drive-up window.

The Bank leases a facility in Pella’s downtown business district that opened on January 29, 2001. The 5,700 square foot facility is located in a retail/office complex and is leased for a period of ten years with options to renew. The Bank owns a branch facility at 500 Oskaloosa Street in Pella, Iowa. The facility is located approximately six blocks south of the community’s main business district. The building was acquired in the summer of 1997 and was completely renovated to become a modern banking facility containing approximately 1,860 square feet of usable space with two drive-up teller lanes.

The Bank owns two offices in Burlington, Iowa and two branch office facilities in other communities near Burlington. The Burlington office located at 3225 Division Street, on the western side of the community, is adjacent to one of the major highways through Burlington. It is a one-story facility of approximately 10,300 square feet, constructed in 1974, with four drive-up lanes and one ATM. The Bank also owns a branch facility located in Burlington’s main downtown business district at 323 Jefferson Street. This facility is approximately 2,400 square feet and was the main office until 1974. The branch located in Fort Madison, Iowa at 926 Avenue G was acquired in 1975, has one drive-up window, and contains approximately 3,300 square feet on one level. The 960 square foot Wapello, Iowa branch is located on Highway 61 and was acquired in 1974.

The Bank leases a branch office facility in downtown Davenport, Iowa that was occupied on February 26, 2007. The branch contains approximately 6,450 square feet and has two drive-up lanes and an ATM. The lease agreement is for a period of twelve years with a bargain purchase option.

 

12


Table of Contents

The Bank is in the process of constructing a new branch facility in Cedar Falls. Iowa, in a new commercial/retail/residential development on the city’s south side. The new facility will contain approximately 7,250 square feet of space on one level and will have two drive-up lanes and an ATM. The new facility will be in an area that will attract more retail deposits and loans. It is anticipated that the new facility will be occupied in the early fall of 2007. The Bank will own this facility.

MidWest O ne Investments, Inc. leases approximately 2,600 square feet of office space adjoining the Bank facility in downtown Pella. The office space is leased for a period of ten years with options to renew.

Cook & Son Agency, Inc. rents office space of approximately 1,260 square feet in downtown Pella. The rental agreement is on a month-to-month basis.

Item 3.   Legal Proceedings

MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and its subsidiaries are involved in various claims and legal actions arising in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, the ultimate disposition of these matters will not have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

Item 4.   Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders

There were no matters submitted during the fourth quarter of the fiscal year covered by this report to a vote of security holders, through the solicitation of proxies or otherwise.

 

13


Table of Contents

PART II

Item 5.   Market for the Registrant’s Common Equity and Related Stockholder Matters

The Company’s common stock, par value $5.00 per share, is listed for quotation on the NASDAQ Global Market under the symbol “OSKY”. As of December 31, 2006, there were 3,715,431 shares of common stock outstanding held by approximately 412 holders of record. Additionally, there are an estimated 1,200 beneficial holders whose stock was held in street name by brokerage houses as of that date. The closing price of the Company’s common stock was $19.94 on December 31, 2006. The following table sets forth the high and low closing price per share of the Company’s stock during 2006 and 2005.

 

     2006    2005
     Closing price    Closing price

Quarter Ended

   High    Low    High    Low

March 31

   $ 19.80    $ 17.50    $ 20.26    $ 17.48

June 30

     19.70      18.75      18.90      17.50

September 30

     19.86      18.80      19.24      18.38

December 31

     20.55      18.85      18.74      17.25

The Company paid dividends to common shareholders in 2006 and in 2005 of $.71 and $.68 per share, respectively. The Company has paid per share cash dividends with respect to its common stock as follows:

 

Quarter

   1st    2nd    3rd    4th

2006

   $ 0.17    $ 0.18    $ 0.18    $ 0.18

2005

   $ 0.17    $ 0.17    $ 0.17    $ 0.17

Dividend declarations are evaluated and determined by the Board of Directors on a quarterly basis. In January 2007, the Board of Directors declared a dividend of $.18 per common share payable March 15, 2007. The Company’s loan agreement with Harris N.A. allows the Company to pay dividends so long as no default or event of default exists. Except for certain regulatory restrictions that may affect dividend payments, there are no other restrictions on the Company’s present or future ability to pay dividends. The Company currently anticipates that comparable cash dividends will continue to be paid in the future.

The Company repurchased shares on the open market in 2006 as authorized by a stock repurchase program adopted by the Board of Directors on April 28, 2006. The Board authorized the repurchase of up to $2,000,000 of the outstanding shares of the Company through December 31, 2006. During the period from April through December 2006, the Company repurchased 65,500 shares for $1,268,325, or an average of $19.36 per share. During the year 2006, the Company received 1,550 shares in exchange from the exercise of stock options previously granted.

The Company did not repurchase any of its common stock on the open market during the fourth quarter of 2006.

The Company has two stock incentive plans under which shares of common stock are reserved for issuance pursuant to options or other awards that may be granted to officers, key employees and certain nonaffiliated directors of the Company. The stock incentive plans have been approved by the Company’s shareholders. The Company does not have any stock incentive plans that have not been approved by the Company’s shareholders. A summary of the shares that potentially could be issued, the weighted-average price and the remaining shares of the approved stock incentive plans as of December 31, 2006 follows:

 

Plan Category

  

Number of

Securities to be

issued upon

exercise of

outstanding options

  

Weighted-average

exercise price of

outstanding options

  

Number of

securities

remaining available

for future issuance

Stock incentive plans approved by shareholders

   501,556    $ 17.05    324,398

 

14


Table of Contents

Financial Performance

The following graph illustrates the cumulative, five-year total return experienced by the Company’s shareholders since December 31, 2001, through December 31, 2006, compared to the NASDAQ Composite, SNL Midwest Bank Index and the MidWest One Custom Peer Group. The indexes assume the investment of $100 on December 31, 2001 with all dividends reinvested. The Company’s stock price performance shown in the following graph is not indicative of future stock price performance.

LOGO

 

15


Table of Contents

Item 6.   Selected Financial Data

The following table sets forth certain selected consolidated financial data at or for the periods indicated. This information should be read in conjunction with the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements and Notes thereto included herein. See “Item 8, Consolidated Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.”

 

Year Ended December 31 (In thousands, except per share data)

  2006     2005     2004     2003     2002  

Summary of income data:

         

Interest income excluding loan pool participations

  $ 37,312     29,858     27,977     28,593     27,482  

Interest and discount on loan pool participations

    9,142     10,222     9,395     8,985     10,058  
                               

Total interest income

    46,454     40,080     37,372     37,578     37,540  

Total interest expense

    21,209     15,426     13,370     14,767     17,027  
                               

Net interest income

    25,245     24,654     24,002     22,811     20,513  

Provision for loan losses

    180     468     858     589     1,070  

Noninterest income

    5,928     4,428     4,276     4,358     3,787  

Noninterest expenses

    21,459     19,415     18,513     17,387     14,426  
                               

Income before income tax

    9,534     9,199     8,907     9,193     8,804  

Income tax expense

    3,093     3,111     3,078     3,267     3,015  
                               

Net income

  $ 6,441     6,088     5,829     5,926     5,789  
                               

Per share data:

         

Net income—basic

  $ 1.74     1.63     1.54     1.54     1.49  

Net income—diluted

    1.71     1.59     1.50     1.50     1.46  

Cash dividends declared

    0.71     0.68     0.68     0.64     0.64  

Book value

    16.83     15.77     15.18     14.84     14.17  

Net tangible book value

    12.92     11.77     11.32     11.08     11.53  

Selected financial ratios:

         

Net income to average assets

    0.92 %   0.93 %   0.92 %   0.98 %   1.07 %

Net income to average equity

    10.65     10.49     10.23     10.52     10.91  

Dividend payout ratio

    40.80     41.72     44.16     41.56     42.95  

Total shareholder’s equity to total assets

    8.39     8.63     8.75     9.01     10.37  

Tangible shareholder’s equity to tangible assets

    6.57     6.59     6.67     6.88     8.60  

Tier 1 capital ratio

    10.01     10.38     10.88     11.20     14.67  

Net interest margin

    3.99     4.11     4.14     4.10     4.10  

Gross revenue of loan pools to total gross revenue

    17.45     22.97     22.17     21.42     24.34  

Allowance for loan losses to total loans

    1.13     1.16     1.19     1.29     1.30  

Non-performing loans to total loans

    1.15     0.77     0.73     0.83     0.86  

Net loans charged off (recovered) to average loans

    (0.11 )   0.05     0.25     0.08     0.15  
December 31 (In thousands)   2006     2005     2004     2003     2002  

Selected balance sheet data:

         

Total assets

  $ 744,911     676,332     650,564     623,306     537,026  

Total loans net of unearned discount

    503,832     433,437     398,854     377,017     306,024  

Total loan pool participations

    98,885     103,570     105,502     89,059     82,341  

Allowance for loan losses

    5,693     5,011     4,745     4,857     3,967  

Total deposits

    560,615     505,245     475,102     453,125     395,546  

Total shareholders’ equity

    62,533     58,386     56,930     56,144     55,698  

Item 7.   Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

The following presents management’s discussion and analysis of the consolidated financial condition and results of operations of the Company as of the dates and for the periods indicated. This discussion should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements and the Notes thereto and the Selected Financial Data presented herein.

SAFE HARBOR STATEMENT

This report contains certain forward-looking statements within the meanings of such term in the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. The Company and its representatives may, from time to time, make

 

16


Table of Contents

written or oral statements that are “forward-looking” and provide information other than historical information, including statements contained in the Form 10-K, the Company’s other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission or in communications to its stockholders. These statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause actual results to be materially different from any results, levels of activity, performance or achievements expressed or implied by any forward-looking statement. These factors include, among other things, the factors listed below.

Forward-looking statements, which may be based upon beliefs, expectations and assumptions of the Company’s management and on information currently available to management, are generally identifiable by the use of words such as “believe”, “expect”, “anticipate”, “should”, “could”, “would”, “plans”, “intend”, “project”, “estimate”, “forecast”, “may” or similar expressions. These forward-looking statements are subject to certain risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in, or implied by, these statements. The Company wishes to caution readers not to place undue reliance on any such forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date made. Additionally, the Company undertakes no obligation to update any statement in light of new information or future events.

The Company’s ability to predict results or the actual effect of future plans or strategies is inherently uncertain. Factors that could have an impact on the Company’s ability to achieve operating results, growth plan goals and future prospects include, but are not limited to, the following:

 

   

Management’s ability to reduce and effectively manage interest rate risk and the impact of interest rates in general on the volatility of the Company’s net interest income.

 

   

Changes in the economic environment, competition, or other factors that may affect the Company’s ability to acquire loan pool participations.

 

   

Fluctuations in the value of the Company’s investment securities.

 

   

The ability to attract and retain key executives and employees experienced in banking and financial services.

 

   

The sufficiency of the allowance for loan losses to absorb the amount of actual losses inherent in the existing loan portfolio.

 

   

The Company’s ability to adapt successfully to technological changes to compete effectively in the marketplace.

 

   

Credit risks and risks from concentrations (by geographic area and by industry) within the Bank’s loan portfolio.

 

   

The effects of competition from other commercial banks, thrifts, mortgage banking firms, consumer finance companies, credit unions, securities brokerage firms, insurance companies, money market and other mutual funds, and other financial institutions operating in the Company’s market or elsewhere or providing similar services.

 

   

The failure of assumptions underlying the establishment of allowances for loan losses and estimation of values of collateral and various financial assets and liabilities.

 

   

Volatility of rate sensitive deposits.

 

   

Operation risks, including data processing system failures or fraud.

 

   

Asset/liability matching risks and liquidity risks.

 

   

Changes in the economic environment, competition, or other factors that may influence the anticipated growth rate of loans and deposits and the quality of the loan portfolio and loan and deposit pricing.

 

   

The Company’s ability to successfully pursue acquisition and expansion strategies and integrate any acquired companies.

 

17


Table of Contents
   

The costs, effects and outcomes of existing or future litigation.

 

   

Governmental monetary and fiscal policies, as well as legislative and regulatory changes, that may result in the imposition of costs and constraints on the Company.

 

   

Changes in general economic or industry conditions, nationally or in the communities in which the Company conducts business.

 

   

Acts of war or terrorism.

 

   

Changes in accounting policies and practices, as may be adopted by state and federal regulatory agencies and the Financial Accounting Standards Board.

 

   

The ability of the Company to manage the risks associated with the foregoing as well as anticipated.

These risks and uncertainties should be considered in evaluation of the forward-looking statement and undue reliance should not be placed on such statements. The Company cautions that the foregoing list of important factors may not be all-inclusive and specifically declines to undertake any obligation to publicly revise any forward-looking statements that have been made to reflect any events or circumstances after the date of such statements or to reflect the occurrence of anticipated or unanticipated events.

OVERVIEW

The Company is a diversified financial services holding company providing full-service community banking through its banking subsidiaries in south central and eastern Iowa. The Company’s recent initiatives include the expansion of its banking activity through the establishment of a branch office in Davenport, Iowa in early 2006 and continued focus on non-banking activities to provide additional financial services such as investment brokerage and property casualty insurance to customers in the markets it serves. Additionally, the Company derives a substantial portion of its revenue from its investments in pools of performing and non-performing loans referred to as loan pool participations. The profitability of the Company depends primarily on its net interest income, provision for loan losses, noninterest income and noninterest expenses.

Net interest income is the difference between total interest income and total interest expense. Interest income is earned by the Company on its loans made to customers, the investment securities it holds in its portfolio, and the interest and discount recovery generated from its loan pool participations. The interest expense incurred by the Company results from the interest paid on customer deposits and borrowed funds. Fluctuations in net interest income can result from the changes in volumes of assets and liabilities as well as changes in market interest rates. The provision for loan losses reflects the cost of credit risk in the Company’s loan portfolio and is dependent on increases in the loan portfolio and management’s assessment of the collectibility of the loan portfolio under current economic conditions. Noninterest income consists of service charges on deposit accounts, commissions and fees for securities brokerage, commissions from the sale of insurance policies, fees received for data processing services provided to nonaffiliated banks, mortgage loan origination fees, other fees and commissions, and realized security gains or losses. Noninterest expenses include salaries and employee benefits, occupancy and equipment expenses, professional fees, other noninterest expenses, and the amortization of intangible assets. These noninterest expenses are significantly influenced by the growth of operations, with additional employees necessary to staff new banking centers.

PERFORMANCE SUMMARY

For the year ended December 31, 2006, the Company recorded net income of $6,441,000, or $1.74 per share basic and $1.71 per share diluted. This compares with $6,088,000, or $1.63 per share basic and $1.59 per share diluted, for the year ended December 31, 2005. Net income was $353,000, or 6 percent, greater in 2006 due to an increase in net interest income, a reduction in loan loss provision and an increase in noninterest income that was offset, in part, by increased noninterest expense.

 

18


Table of Contents

On January 6, 2006, the Company received the proceeds from the recovery of an agricultural loan that had been charged off in 2001. The proceeds included a loan principal recovery of $901,000 that was credited to the allowance for loan losses, $364,000 in interest that was recorded to interest income on loans and $50,000 credited to other loan income for the reimbursement of attorney fees incurred by the Company in 2001. The interest income and fees contributed $.08 per share basic and diluted to the Company’s earnings in 2006.

Total assets of the Company increased $68,579,000 or 10 percent to $744,911,000 as of December 31, 2006 compared to $676,332,000 as of December 31, 2005. The Company’s total loans outstanding increased $70,395,000 or 16 percent to $503,832,000 at December 31, 2006. Loan pool participations as of December 31, 2006 totaled $98,885,000, a decrease of 5 percent from the December 31, 2005 balance of $103,570,000. Deposits increased $55,370,000 or 11 percent to $560,615,000 as of December 31, 2006.

Return on average assets is a measure of profitability that indicates how effectively a financial institution utilizes its assets. It is calculated by dividing net income by average total assets. The Company’s return on average assets was .92 percent for 2006, .93 percent for 2005 and .92 percent for 2004. Although net income for the year 2006 was greater, average assets also increased during the year at a proportionally greater amount, thus contributing to the lower return on average assets in 2006. Return on average equity indicates what the Company earned on its shareholders’ investment and is calculated by dividing net income by average total shareholders’ equity. The return on average equity for the Company was 10.65 percent for 2006, 10.49 percent for 2005 and 10.23 percent for 2004. The return on average shareholders’ equity increased in 2006 reflecting the improved earnings of the Company with an increase in average shareholders’ equity.

Various operating and equity ratios for the Company are presented in the table below for the years indicated. The dividend payout ratio represents the percentage of the Company’s net income that is paid to shareholders in the form of cash dividends. Average equity to average assets is a measure of capital adequacy that presents the percentage of average total shareholders’ equity compared to the average assets of the Company. The equity to assets ratio expresses this ratio using the period-end amounts instead of on an average basis.

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2006     2005     2004  

Return on average total assets

   0.92 %   0.93 %   0.92 %

Return on average equity

   10.65     10.49     10.23  

Dividend payout ratio

   40.80     41.72     44.16  

Average equity to average assets

   8.65     8.86     9.03  

Equity to assets ratio (at period end)

   8.39     8.63     8.75  

Results of Operations

2006 Compared to 2005

Net Interest Income. Net interest income is the total of interest income earned on earning assets less interest expense paid on interest bearing liabilities. Net interest income is affected by changes in the volume and yields on earning assets and the volume and rates paid on interest bearing liabilities. Net interest margin is a ratio measurement of the net return on interest earning assets computed by dividing net interest income on a tax-equivalent basis by the annual average balance of all interest earning assets.

Net interest income increased $591,000 or 2 percent in 2006 to $25,245,000 compared with $24,654,000 in 2005 due primarily to greater loan volumes and higher market interest rates. The net interest margin decreased in 2006 to 3.99 percent compared with 4.11 percent in 2005 as the increase in net interest income was proportionately less than the increase in average earning assets.

Total interest income increased $6,374,000 or 16 percent in 2006 compared with 2005. Interest and fees on loans and interest on other earning assets increased in 2006, while interest and discount on loan pools and interest

 

19


Table of Contents

income on investment securities declined. Interest income on loans totaled $33,897,000 in 2006, an increase of $7,379,000 or 28 percent compared with 2005. The higher interest income on loans was due to growth in loan volumes and higher market interest rates. The average volume of loans outstanding in 2006 was $57,340,000 greater than in 2005. Most of this increase was in the agricultural operating, agricultural real estate, commercial and commercial real estate loan categories. A significant portion of the Company’s loan growth is attributable to opening a new branch in the Davenport, Iowa market early in 2006 and to continued expansion and loan demand in the Waterloo/Cedar Falls, Iowa market. The increase in the national prime rate has benefited the Company as the overall average rate on the total loan portfolio increased to 7.23 percent for 2006 compared with 6.41 percent for 2005. Interest and discount on loan pools decreased $1,080,000 or 11 percent in 2006 compared with 2005. The average balance of loan pools was $92,133,000 in 2006 compared with $100,808,000 in 2005, a decrease of $8,675,000 or 9 percent. This decrease in volume contributed to the reduction in interest income, as did a lower yield on the loan pools. The average yield on loan pools declined to 9.92 percent in 2006 from 10.14 percent in 2005. The lower yield on loan pools in 2006 was due to reduced collection cash flow. Interest income on investment securities declined $19,000 in 2006 to $3,299,000. This compares with $3,318,000 in 2005. The average balance of investment securities declined $9,463,000 as the proceeds from maturing securities were utilized to fund loan growth. The average tax-equivalent yield on the investment portfolio increased to 4.59 percent in 2006 compared with 3.99 percent in 2005 as lower-yielding securities matured and were replaced with securities having a higher market rate, which helped to offset the decrease in volume. The overall yield on earning assets increased to 7.27 percent in 2006 from 6.66 percent in 2005, while total earning assets averaged $647,609,000, or $40,513,000 higher in 2006.

Growth in deposits, additional borrowed funds and higher market interest rates contributed to an increase in total interest expense for 2006 in comparison to 2005. Total interest expense increased $5,783,000 or 37 percent in 2006 to $21,209,000. Total interest-bearing deposits averaged $34,377,000 higher in 2006 compared with 2005, while the average rate paid on deposits increased to 3.21 percent in 2006 versus 2.28 percent in 2005. Interest expense on deposits was $15,045,000 in 2006, an increase of $5,156,000 or 52 percent from 2005. Factors that contributed to the increase in interest expense on deposits for the year 2006 compared to 2005 include higher market interest rates and growth in the interest-bearing deposit totals resulting from an emphasis by the Company on attracting more deposits. In order to attract more deposits in its markets, the Company increased the rates it paid on selected terms of certificates of deposit to meet or exceed the competition’s rates. Throughout the year 2006, the Company averaged $7,849,000 in Fed Funds Purchased compared with $7,698,000 for 2005. Interest expense on Fed Funds Purchased increased $146,000 in 2006 compared with 2005 primarily due to higher market interest rates. The interest rates on Fed Funds Purchased correlate directly with the actions taken by the Federal Reserve to raise the discount rate in 2006. The average rate paid by the Company on Fed Funds Purchased increased to 5.32 percent in 2006 compared with 3.54 percent in 2005, which increased interest expense. The average balance of Federal Home Loan Bank Advances was $6,764,000 greater in 2006, with the average rate paid increasing to 4.83 percent in 2006 from 4.61 percent in 2005. The additional Federal Home Loan Bank Advances were utilized to fund loan growth. The increase in average rate was due to maturing advances that either were paid off or renewed at higher rates during the year. Interest expense on Federal Home Loan Bank Advances was $513,000 higher in 2006 compared with 2005. The average rate paid on all interest-bearing liabilities increased to 3.64 percent for 2006, compared with 2.82 percent for 2005.

 

20


Table of Contents

The following table presents a comparison of the average balance of earning assets, interest-bearing liabilities, interest income and expense, and average yields and costs for the years indicated. Interest income on tax-exempt securities is reported on a fully tax-equivalent basis assuming a 34 percent tax rate. Dividing income or expense by the average balances of assets or liabilities results in such yields and costs. Average balances are derived from daily balances. Nonaccrual loans are included in the loan category.

 

    Year ended December 31,  
    2006     2005     2004  
   

Average

Balance

 

Interest

Income (2)/

Expense

 

Average

Rate/

Yield

   

Average

Balance

 

Interest

Income (2)/

Expense

 

Average

Rate/

Yield

   

Average

Balance

 

Interest

Income (2)/

Expense

 

Average

Rate/

Yield

 
    (dollars in thousands)  

Average earning assets:

                 

Loans (1)

  $ 471,312   $ 34,052   7.23 %   $ 413,972   $ 26,518   6.41 %   $ 391,131   $ 23,885   6.11 %

Loan pool participations

    92,133     9,142   9.92       100,808     10,222   10.14       89,430     9,395   10.50  

Interest-bearing deposits

    541     32   5.78       393     9   2.25       498     4   0.84  

Investment securities available for sale:

                 

Taxable investments

    58,097     2,379   4.09       74,869     2,671   3.57       90,214     3,455   3.83  

Tax exempt investments

    11,351     652   5.75       4,193     239   5.70       3,478     203   5.83  

Investment securities held to maturity:

                 

Taxable investments

    456     26   5.72       220     13   5.90       1,347     118   8.77  

Tax exempt investments

    12,056     702   5.83       12,141     721   5.93       7,415     501   6.76  

Federal funds sold

    1,663     84   5.05       500     13   2.70       3,329     50   1.49  
                                         

Total earning assets

  $ 647,609   $ 47,069   7.27     $ 607,096   $ 40,406   6.66     $ 586,842   $ 37,611   6.41  
                                         

Average interest-bearing liabilities:

                 

Interest-bearing checking

  $ 64,056   $ 347   0.54     $ 67,591   $ 321   0.47     $ 64,203   $ 239   0.37  

Savings

    114,040     2,818   2.47       119,850     1,677   1.40       124,106     1,328   1.07  

Certificates of deposit

    289,932     11,880   4.10       246,210     7,891   3.20       232,373     6,770   2.91  

Federal funds purchased

    7,849     418   5.32       7,698     272   3.54       5,578     82   1.47  

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

    92,091     4,446   4.83       85,327     3,933   4.61       82,250     3,975   4.83  

Notes payable

    4,881     373   7.63       9,998     583   5.83       10,108     428   4.23  

Long-term debt

    10,310     927   8.99       10,310     749   7.26       10,310     548   5.32  
                                         

Total interest-bearing liabilities

  $ 583,159   $ 21,209   3.64     $ 546,984   $ 15,426   2.82     $ 528,928   $ 13,370   2.53  
                                         

Net interest income

    $ 25,860   3.63       $ 24,980   3.84       $ 24,241   3.88  
                             

Net interest margin (3)

      3.99 %       4.11 %       4.13 %
                             

(1) Average loans outstanding includes the daily average balance of non-performing loans. Interest on these loans does not include additional interest of $196,000, $353,000, and $166,000 for 2006, 2005 and 2004, respectively, which would have been accrued based on the original terms of these loans compared to the interest that was actually recorded. Interest earned on loans includes loan fees (which are not material in amount).
(2) Includes interest income and discount realized on loan pool participations.
(3) Net interest margin is net interest income divided by average total earning assets.

 

21


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth an analysis of volume and rate changes in interest income and interest expense of the Company’s average earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities reported on a fully tax-equivalent basis assuming a 34% tax rate. The table distinguishes between the changes related to average outstanding balances (changes in volume holding the initial interest rate constant) and the changes related to average interest rates (changes in average rate holding the initial outstanding balance constant). The change in interest due to both volume and rate has been allocated to volume and rate changes in proportion to the relationship of the absolute dollar amounts of the change in each.

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2006 Compared to 2005
Increase/ (Decrease) Due to
    2005 Compared to 2004
Increase/ (Decrease) Due to
 
     Volume     Rate     Net     Volume     Rate     Net  
     (in thousands)  

Interest income from average earning assets:

            

Loans

   $ 3,917     $ 3,617     $ 7,534     $ 1,432     $ 1,201     $ 2,633  

Loan pool participations (1)

     (865 )     (215 )     (1,080 )     1,162       (335 )     827  

Interest-bearing deposits

     5       18       23       (1 )     6       5  

Investment securities available for sale:

            

Taxable investments

     (651 )     359       (292 )     (559 )     (225 )     (784 )

Tax exempt investments

     411       2       413       41       (5 )     36  

Investment securities held to maturity:

            

Taxable investments

     13       —         13       (75 )     (30 )     (105 )

Tax exempt investments

     (6 )     (13 )     (19 )     287       (67 )     220  

Federal funds sold

     52       19       71       (60 )     23       (37 )
                                                

Total income from earning assets

     2,876       3,787       6,663       2,227       568       2,795  
                                                

Interest expense from average interest-bearing liabilities:

            

Interest-bearing checking

     (18 )     44       26       14       68       82  

Savings

     (85 )     1,226       1,141       (47 )     396       349  

Certificates of deposit

     1,553       2,436       3,989       418       703       1,121  

Federal funds purchased

     6       140       146       40       150       190  

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     321       192       513       146       (188 )     (42 )

Notes payable

     (356 )     146       (210 )     (5 )     160       155  

Long-term debt

     —         178       178       —         201       201  
                                                

Total expense from interest-bearing liabilities

     1,421       4,362       5,783       566       1,490       2,056  
                                                

Net interest income

   $ 1,455     $ (575 )   $ 880     $ 1,661     $ (922 )   $ 739  
                                                

(1) Includes interest income and discount realized on loan pool participations.

PROVISION FOR LOAN LOSSES. The provision for loan losses recorded by the Company for 2006 was $180,000, a decrease of $288,000 or 62 percent, compared with the provision of $468,000 for 2005. Early in 2006, the Company recovered $901,000 from an agricultural loan that had been charged off in 2001. This amount was credited to the allowance for loan losses. Management determines an appropriate provision based on its evaluation of the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses in relationship to a continuing review of current collection risks within its loan portfolio, identified problem loans, the current local and national economic conditions, actual loss experience, regulatory policies, and industry trends. The reduction in the provision for loan losses in 2006 compared with 2005 primarily reflects the recovery of the previously charged off loan. Net loan recoveries for 2006 totaled $502,000 compared with net charge-offs of $202,000 in 2005. The effect of the recovery was partially offset by growth in the Company’s loan portfolio, identified problem loans and local economic conditions as management evaluated the allowance for loan losses and the provision for losses required to maintain an adequate level in the allowance.

 

22


Table of Contents

NONINTEREST INCOME. Noninterest income (including realized investment security gains and losses) increased $1,500,000 or 34 percent in 2006 to $5,928,000. This compares with noninterest income of $4,428,000 for 2005. The Company recognized losses of $212,000 from the sale of investment securities available for sale in 2006 compared with realized gains of $28,000 in 2005. During 2006, the Company executed two sales of investment securities available for sale. The first sale involved five securities having a par value of $6,530,000 with a remaining average maturity of 10 months and a yield of 2.57 percent. These securities were sold with a recognized loss of $126,000 with the proceeds utilized to fund loan demand. A second sale of $4,000,000 with a remaining average maturity of 10 months and a weighted-average yield of 3.11 percent resulted in a loss of $86,000. The proceeds from this sale were reinvested in similar securities with an average maturity of 7.4 years and yield of 5.81 percent. The transaction was undertaken to improve the overall yield of the Company’s investment portfolio in view of the interest rate yield curve. Excluding security losses recognized and gains realized, noninterest income was $6,140,000 for 2006 compared with $4,400,000 for 2005. Service charges increased $526,000 in 2006 with much of the additional income due to increased overdraft fees following the implementation of an overdraft protection program late in 2005. Brokerage commissions attributable to MWI increased $431,000 or 76 percent in 2006 as a result of growth in investment sales to clients. Insurance commissions generated by Cook and by Bank sales of credit life insurance totaled $705,000 in 2006 compared with $218,000 in 2005, in increase of $487,000. The Company acquired Cook in September 2005, so there is not a full-year comparison. Secondary market mortgage loan origination fees increased $137,000 or 31 percent reflecting additional lending activity in the Davenport market and continued demand in other markets. Mortgage origination fees are very dependent on new mortgage loan originations and customers refinancing real estate loans to take advantage of lower market interest rates. Depending on future interest rates, the level of refinancing activity may change. If the refinancing activity slows, mortgage origination fee income may be reduced in subsequent periods. Other operating income totaled $483,000 in 2006, an increase of $209,000 or 76 percent in 2006. The increase was primarily due to the nonrecurring gain on the sale of the Company’s minority interest in a commercial real estate development partnership.

NONINTEREST EXPENSE. Noninterest expense totaled $21,459,000 for 2006 compared with $19,415,000 for 2005, an increase of $2,044,000 or 11 percent. Salaries and employee benefits increased $1,716,000 or 16 percent in 2006 due to the additional employees of the new Davenport office, the full year effects of the Cook acquisition, annual compensation adjustments, greater health insurance costs and increased other benefit costs. Net occupancy expense increased $23,000 to $3,491,000 in 2006. Data processing expense was $656,000 in 2006 compared with $451,000 in 2006, reflecting higher computer supplies and personal computer expenses. Other intangible asset amortization decreased to $289,000 in 2006 from $305,000 in 2005 reflecting the utilization of accelerated amortization method for the customer list intangible of MWI and Cook. Professional fees were $507,000 or 52 percent lower in 2006 compared with 2005 primarily due to reduced attorney and consultant fees. Other operating expense increased $623,000 or 18 percent in 2006 reflecting increased advertising, donations, internet banking costs, loan department expenses relating to foreclosed property, cash shortages and losses.

INCOME TAX EXPENSE. Income taxes decreased $18,000 in 2006 compared with 2005 due to an increase in the amount of tax-exempt income. The Company’s consolidated income tax rate varies from the statutory rate mainly due to the amount of tax-exempt income. The 2006 effective income tax as a percentage of income before tax was 32.4 percent, compared with 33.8 percent for 2005.

2005 Compared to 2004

Net Interest Income. Net interest income increased $652,000 or 3 percent in 2005 to $24,654,000 compared with $24,002,000 in 2004 due primarily to greater loan volumes and higher interest rates. The net interest margin decreased slightly in 2005 to 4.11 percent compared with 4.14 percent in 2004 as the increase in net interest income was proportionately less than the increase in average earning assets.

Total interest income increased $2,708,000 or 7 percent in 2005 compared with 2004. Interest and fees on loans and interest and discount on loan pools increased in 2005, while interest income on investment securities

 

23


Table of Contents

and other earning assets declined. Interest income on loans totaled $26,518,000 in 2005, an increase of $2,633,000 or 11 percent compared with 2004. The higher interest income on loans was due to growth in loan volumes and higher market interest rates. The average volume of loans outstanding in 2005 was $22,841,000 greater than in 2004. Most of this increase was in the commercial, commercial real estate and residential real estate loan categories. A significant portion of the Company’s loan growth is attributable to the Waterloo/Cedar Falls, Iowa market. The increase in the prime rate during 2005 benefited the Company as the overall average rate on the total loan portfolio increased to 6.41 percent for 2005 compared with 6.11 percent for 2004. Interest and discount on loan pools increased $827,000 or 9 percent in 2005 compared with 2004. The average balance of loan pools was $100,808,000 in 2005 compared with $89,430,000 in 2004, an increase of $11,378,000 or 13 percent. This increase in volume contributed to the higher interest income. The average yield on loan pools declined to 10.14 percent in 2005 from 10.50 percent in 2004, thereby offsetting some of the increase in interest and discount income attributable to the higher volume. The lower yield on loan pools in 2005 was due to reduced collection cash flow. Interest income on investment securities declined $720,000 in 2005 to $3,318,000. This compares with $4,038,000 in 2004 and reflects a decline in the average balance of investment securities of $11,031,000 as the proceeds from maturing securities were utilized to fund loan growth. The average tax-equivalent yield on the investment portfolio declined to 3.99 percent in 2005 compared with 4.18 percent in 2004 as higher-yielding securities matured and were replaced with securities having a lower market yield, also contributing to the reduction in interest income. The overall yield on earning assets increased to 6.66 percent in 2005 from 6.41 percent in 2004, while total earning assets averaged $607,096,000, or $20,254,000 higher in 2005.

Growth in deposits, greater utilization of borrowed funds and higher market interest rates all contributed to an increase in total interest expense for 2005 in comparison to 2004. Interest expense increased $2,056,000 or 15 percent in 2005 to $15,426,000. Total interest-bearing deposits averaged $12,969,000 higher in 2005 compared with 2004, while the average rate paid on deposits increased to 2.28 percent in 2005 versus 1.98 percent in 2004. Interest expense on deposits was $9,889,000 in 2005, an increase of $1,552,000 or 19 percent from 2004. Factors that contributed to the increase in interest expense on deposits for the year 2005 compared to 2004 include higher market interest rates and growth in the interest-bearing deposit totals resulting from an emphasis by the Company on attracting more deposits. In order to attract more deposits in its markets, the Company increased the rates it paid on selected terms of certificates of deposit to meet or exceed the competition’s rates. Throughout the year 2005, the Company averaged $7,698,000 in Fed Funds Purchased compared with $5,578,000 for 2004, with the greater balance contributing to the $190,000 increased interest expense. The interest rates on Fed Funds Purchased correlate directly with the actions taken by the Federal Reserve to raise the discount rate in 2005. The average rate paid by the Company on Fed Funds Purchased increased to 3.54 percent in 2005 compared with 1.47 percent in 2004, also contributing to the increased interest expense. The average balance of Federal Home Loan Bank Advances was $3,077,000 greater in 2005, but the average rate paid declined to 4.61 percent in 2005. This decline in average rate was due to maturing advances that either were paid off or renewed at lower rates during the year. Interest expense on Federal Home Loan Bank Advances was $42,000 lower in 2005 compared with 2004. The average rate paid on all interest-bearing liabilities was 2.82 percent for 2005 compared with 2.53 percent for 2004.

PROVISION FOR LOAN LOSSES. The provision for loan losses recorded by the Company for 2005 was $468,000, a decrease of $390,000 or 45 percent, compared with the provision of $858,000 for 2004. Management determines an appropriate provision based on its evaluation of the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses in relationship to a continuing review of current collection risks within its loan portfolio, identified problem loans, the current local and national economic conditions, actual loss experience, regulatory policies, and industry trends. The reduction in the provision for loan losses in 2005 primarily reflects the decrease in net loans charged off in 2005 compared with 2004. Net loan charge-offs for 2005 were $202,000 compared with $970,000 in 2004. The effect of the reduction in net charge-offs was partially offset by growth in the Company’s loan portfolio, identified problem loans and local economic conditions as management evaluated the allowance for loan losses and the provision for losses required to maintain an adequate level in the allowance.

 

24


Table of Contents

NONINTEREST INCOME. Noninterest income (including realized investment security gains) increased $152,000 or 4 percent in 2005 to $4,428,000. This compares with noninterest income of $4,276,000 for 2004. The Company realized gains of $28,000 from the sale of investment securities available for sale in 2005 compared with $226,000 in 2004. Excluding security gains realized, noninterest income was $4,400,000 for 2005 and $4,050,000 for 2004. Service charges and other fees increased $388,000 in 2005 with much of the additional income due to increased brokerage commissions attributable to MWI. Data processing income and secondary market mortgage loan origination fees declined slightly. Other operating income increased minimally in 2005.

NONINTEREST EXPENSE. Noninterest expense totaled $19,415,000 for 2005 compared with $18,513,000 for 2004, an increase of $902,000 or 5 percent. Salaries and employee benefits increased $291,000 or 3 percent in 2005 due to the additional employees of MWI and Cook, annual compensation adjustments, greater health insurance costs and increased other benefit costs. Net occupancy expense increased $246,000 or 8 percent in 2005 mainly due to increased real estate taxes, higher utilities cost and greater maintenance agreement cost on data processing equipment. Professional fees were $121,000 or 14 percent higher in 2005 compared with 2004 primarily due to consultant fees. Other operating expense increased $243,000 in 2005 reflecting increased advertising, donations, internet banking costs, loan department expenses relating to foreclosed property, cash shortages and losses.

INCOME TAX EXPENSE. Income taxes increased $33,000 in 2005 compared with 2004. The amount of income before tax was greater in 2005, thus increasing income tax expense. The Company’s consolidated income tax rate varies from the statutory rate mainly due to the amount of tax-exempt income. The 2005 effective income tax as a percentage of income before tax was 33.8 percent, compared with 34.6 percent for 2004.

ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION

LOANS

The Company’s loan portfolio increased $70,395,000 or 16 percent to $503,832,000 on December 31, 2006 from $433,437,000 on December 31, 2005. Most of this increase was in the commercial, commercial real estate and agricultural loan categories. A significant portion of the Company’s commercial and commercial real estate loan growth is attributable to the Davenport, Iowa market that the Company entered by establishing a branch office in January 2006 and the Waterloo/Cedar Falls, Iowa market that the Company entered through a bank acquisition in 2003. As of December 31, 2006, the Company’s loan to deposit ratio was 89.9 percent, compared with 85.8 percent at December 31, 2005.

The Company’s loan portfolio largely reflects the profile of the communities in which it operates. Total real estate loans (including 1-4 family residential, commercial, agricultural, construction, and multi-family real estate) were $332,534,000 as of December 31, 2006 compared with $293,363,000 as of December 31, 2005. Real estate loans of all types are the Company’s largest category of loans, comprising 66.0 percent of total loans at year-end 2006 and 67.7 percent at December 31, 2005. Commercial loans are the next largest category of loans at December 31, 2006, totaling approximately $89,236,000 or 17.7 percent of total loans compared with $72,248,000 or 16.7 percent of loans at December 31, 2005. As a percentage of the Company’s total loans as of December 31, 2006 agricultural loans were 13.2 percent compared with 12.8 percent as of December 31, 2005. Agricultural loans totaled $66,393,000 on December 31, 2006 compared with $55,471,000 as of December 31, 2005. The remaining 3.1 percent of the portfolio as of December 31, 2006 consisted of $15,579,000 in consumer and other loans compared with $12,355,000 as of December 31, 2005.

 

25


Table of Contents

The following table shows the composition of the Company’s loan portfolio as of the dates indicated. Total loans do not include the Company’s investment in loan pool participations.

 

    December 31,  
    2006     2005     2004     2003     2002  
    Amount  

% of

Total

    Amount  

% of

Total

    Amount  

% of

Total

    Amount  

% of

Total

    Amount  

% of

Total

 
    (dollars in thousands)  

Agricultural

  $ 66,393   13.2 %   $ 55,471   12.8 %   $ 53,545   13.4 %   $ 56,036   14.9 %   $ 38,004   12.4 %

Commercial

    89,326   17.7       72,248   16.7       70,104   17.6       60,532   16.0       39,324   12.9  

Real estate:

                   

1-4 family residences

    131,223   26.0       130,605   30.1       132,702   33.3       132,801   35.2       133,850   43.7  

5+ residential property

    14,752   2.9       11,077   2.5       10,210   2.5       7,323   1.9       4,373   1.4  

Agricultural

    52,765   10.5       40,641   9.4       38,163   9.6       42,809   11.4       28,947   9.5  

Construction

    57,669   11.5       36,654   8.5       20,113   5.0       10,475   2.8       8,058   2.6  

Commercial

    76,125   15.1       74,386   17.2       63,334   15.9       56,360   14.9       41,622   13.6  
                                                           

Real estate total

    332,534   66.0       293,363   67.7       264,522   66.3       249,768   66.2       216,850   70.8  
                                                           

Installment

    15,579   3.1       12,355   2.8       10,464   2.6       10,415   2.8       11,517   3.8  

Lease financing

    —     —         —     —         219   0.1       266   0.1       329   0.1  
                                                           

Total loans (1)

  $ 503,832   100.0 %   $ 433,437   100.0 %   $ 398,854   100.0 %   $ 377,017   100.0 %   $ 306,024   100.0 %
                                                           

Total assets

  $ 744,911     $ 676,332     $ 650,564     $ 623,306     $ 537,026  
                                       

Loans to total assets

    67.6 %     64.1 %     61.3 %     60.5 %     57.0 %

(1) Total loans do not include the Company’s investments in loan pool participations.

The following table sets forth the remaining maturities for certain loan categories as of December 31, 2006.

 

   

Due Within

One Year

 

Due in

One to

Five Years

 

Due After

Five Years

  Total  

Total for Loans

Due Within

One Year Having:

 

Total for Loans

Due After

One Year Having:

          Fixed
Rates
  Variable
Rates
  Fixed
Rates
  Variable
Rates
    (in thousands)

Agricultural

  $ 46,323   $ 16,741   $ 3,329   $ 66,393   $ 11,876   $ 34,447   $ 11,756   $ 8,314

Commercial

    48,679     33,058     7,589     89,326     18,315     30,364     29,652     10,995

Real estate:

               

1-4 family residences

    8,371     33,278     89,574     131,223     7,000     1,371     39,966     82,886

5+ residential property

    749     12,376     1,627     14,752     749     —       12,052     1,951

Agricultural

    4,962     24,548     23,255     52,765     4,763     199     30,769     17,034

Construction

    34,104     19,209     4,356     57,669     21,001     13,103     18,974     4,591

Commercial

    5,773     46,134     24,218     76,125     4,561     1,212     50,898     19,454
                                               

Real estate total

    53,959     135,545     143,030     332,534     38,074     15,885     152,659     125,916
                                               

Installment

    4,140     10,580     859     15,579     3,918     222     11,011     428
                                               

Total loans

  $ 153,101   $ 195,924   $ 154,807   $ 503,832   $ 72,183   $ 80,918   $ 205,078   $ 145,653
                                               

INVESTMENT IN LOAN POOLS

The Company invests in pools of performing and nonperforming loans categorized as loan pool participations. These loan pool participations are purchased at a discount from the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the underlying loans. Income is derived from this investment in the form of interest collected and the repayment of principal in excess of the purchase cost which is herein referred to as “discount.” For a more detailed discussion of loan pool participations and related accounting treatment, refer to Part I, Item 1. Business, Section C. Loan Pool Participations in this document.

 

26


Table of Contents

At year-end 2006, the Company’s loan pool participation total was $98,885,000 compared with $103,570,000 in 2005, a decrease of $4,685,000 or 5 percent. The balance of the loan pool participations represents the purchase cost of the loans. The average loan pool participation investment for 2006 was $92,133,000 compared with an average of $100,808,000 for 2005. The average balance of loan pool participations is affected by the ability of the Servicer to purchase loan pools, collection activity, and refinancing and settlements from borrowers. The ability of the Servicer to purchase pools of loans is influenced by the availability of pools from selling banks, competition from other buyers, liquidity of the Company and the interest rate environment. The Company is under no obligation to invest in pools of loans identified by the Servicer. Loan pool participation purchases made by the Company during 2006 totaled $40,071,000 compared with purchases of $51,058,000 in 2005. Approximately $18,921,000 or 47 percent of the loan pool purchases for 2006 were made in the fourth quarter of the year. Throughout 2006, loan pool participations represented 14.2 percent of average earning assets while in 2005 they represented 16.6 percent of average earning assets.

LOAN QUALITY

Total loans increased 16 percent during 2006 to $503,832,000 as of December 31, 2006. Non-performing assets as of December 31, 2006 totaled $5,989,000 or 1.19 percent of total loans. The year-end 2006 total of non-performing assets increased $164,000 or 3 percent when compared with the December 31, 2005 amount of $5,825,000 or 1.34 percent of total loans. Non-performing assets consist of nonaccrual loans, loans past due 90 days and still accruing, troubled debt restructurings and other real estate owned. Nonaccrual loans decreased $795,000 to a December 31, 2006 total of $727,000. Loans past due 90 days and over as of year-end 2006 totaled $3,060,000, an increase of $1,389,000 compared with the year-end 2005 total. Approximately one-half of the increase in loans past due 90 days and over is attributable to one credit, which is a truck terminal/warehouse facility. Troubled debt restructurings were $2,014,000 on December 31, 2006 and $159,000 on December 31, 2005. The increase in troubled debt restructurings is attributable to a truck stop/convenience store that was carried in other real estate on December 31, 2005 as a result of foreclosure late in 2005. The property was subsequently acquired by a new party who injected additional capital into the operation. The additional capital reduced the Company’s loan exposure in the credit. The operation continued to struggle financially under the new buyer, who negotiated a restructure of the terms of the loan. Other real estate owned consists of real estate acquired by the Company through foreclosure. Other real estate owned decreased $2,285,000 in 2006 as a result of the truck stop/convenience store property restructure to $188,000 as of December 31, 2006 from the December 31, 2005 total of $2,473,000. The Company does not have any commitments to lend additional funds to any borrowers who have non-performing loans or troubled debt restructurings. Efforts to further improve asset quality continue.

The following table provides information on the Company’s non-performing loans as of the dates indicated.

 

     December 31,  
     2006     2005     2004     2003     2002  
     (dollars in thousands)  

90 days past due

   $ 3,060     $ 1,671     $ 858     $ 825     $ 1,401  

Restructured

     2,014       159       486       567       206  

Nonaccrual

     727       1,522       1,571       1,737       1,038  
                                        

Total non-performing loans

   $ 5,801     $ 3,352     $ 2,915     $ 3,129     $ 2,645  
                                        

Ratio of nonperforming loans to total loans

     1.15 %     0.77 %     0.73 %     0.83 %     0.86 %

The allowance for loan losses was $5,693,000 on December 31, 2006 and totaled $5,011,000 as of December 31, 2005. The allowance represented 1.13 percent of total loans at December 31, 2006 and 1.16 percent of loans on December 31, 2005. Additions to the allowance for the year 2006 were the result of growth in agricultural loans, agricultural real estate loans, commercial loans and commercial real estate loans. The allowance as a percentage of non-performing assets was 95.1 percent on December 31, 2006 and 86.0 percent on

 

27


Table of Contents

December 31, 2005. The allowance as a percentage of non-performing loans was 98.1 percent and 149.5 percent as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively. The decrease in the percentage of the allowance relative to non-performing loans reflects the increase in troubled debt restructure of the truck stop/convenience store property, which is included in the non-performing loan category. In January 2006 the Company received the proceeds from the recovery of an agricultural loan that had been charged off in 2001 totaling $901,000. This amount was credited to the allowance for loan losses as a charge-off recovery in 2006. Net loan recoveries were $502,000 or (.11%) of average loans compared with 2005 net charge-offs of $202,000 or .05 percent of average loans. The allowance for loan losses is maintained at a level considered by management to be adequate to provide for loan losses inherent in the portfolio at the balance sheet date.

The following table sets forth loans charged off and recovered by the type of loan and an analysis of the allowance for loan losses for the years indicated.

 

    Year ended December 31,  
    2006     2005     2004     2003     2002  
    (dollars in thousands)  

Amount of loans outstanding at end of period (net of unearned interest) (1)

  $ 503,832     $ 433,437     $ 398,854     $ 377,017     $ 306,024  
                                       

Average amount of loans outstanding for the period (net of unearned interest)

  $ 471,312     $ 413,972     $ 391,131     $ 366,754     $ 313,041  
                                       

Allowance for loan losses at beginning of period

  $ 5,011     $ 4,745     $ 4,857     $ 3,967     $ 3,381  
                                       

Charge-offs:

         

Agricultural

    113       67       333       65       43  

Commercial

    119       141       282       44       204  

Real estate—mortgage

    285       50       350       150       221  

Installment

    43       54       77       88       105  

Lease financing

    —         153       —         —         —    
                                       

Total charge-offs

    560       465       1,042       347       573  
                                       

Recoveries:

         

Agricultural

    968       160       18       5       42  

Commercial

    81       15       7       7       15  

Real estate—mortgage

    6       72       17       7       1  

Installment

    7       16       30       22       31  
                                       

Total recoveries

    1,062       263       72       41       89  
                                       

Net loans charged off (recovered)

    (502 )     202       970       306       484  

Provision for loan losses

    180       468       858       589       1,070  

Allowance at date of acquisition

    —         —         —         607       —    
                                       

Allowance for loan losses at end of period

  $ 5,693     $ 5,011     $ 4,745     $ 4,857     $ 3,967  
                                       

Net loans charged off (recovered) to average loans

    (0.11 )%     0.05 %     0.25 %     0.08 %     0.15 %

Allowance for loan losses to total loans at end of period

    1.13 %     1.16 %     1.19 %     1.29 %     1.30 %

(1) Loans do not include, and the allowance for loan losses does not include, any allowance for investments in loan pool participations.

 

28


Table of Contents

The Company has allocated the allowance for loan losses to provide for loan losses within the categories of loans set forth in the table below. The allocation of the allowance and the ratio of loans within each category to total loans as of the dates indicated are as follows:

 

    December 31,  
    2006     2005     2004     2003     2002  
   

Allowance

Amount

 

Percent of

Loans to

Total

Loans

   

Allowance

Amount

 

Percent of

Loans to

Total

Loans

   

Allowance

Amount

 

Percent of

Loans to

Total

Loans

   

Allowance

Amount

 

Percent of

Loans to

Total

Loans

   

Allowance

Amount

 

Percent of

Loans to

Total

Loans

 
    (dollars in thousands)  

Agricultural

  $ 1,189   13.2 %   $ 1,333   12.8 %   $ 1,183   13.4 %   $ 1,231   14.9 %   $ 831   12.4 %

Commercial

    1,343   17.7       1,069   16.7       1,245   17.6       1,038   16.1       626   12.9  

Real estate— mortgage

    3,021   66.0       2,410   67.7       2,089   66.3       2,329   66.1       2,199   70.8  

Installment

    140   3.1       199   2.8       156   2.6       183   2.8       255   3.8  

Lease financing

    —     —         —     —         72   0.1       76   0.1       56   0.1  
                                                           

Total

  $ 5,693   100.0 %   $ 5,011   100.0 %   $ 4,745   100.0 %   $ 4,857   100.0 %   $ 3,967   100.0 %
                                                           

INVESTMENT SECURITIES

The Company manages its investment portfolio to provide both a source of liquidity and earnings. The portfolio largely consists of U.S. Government agency securities, corporate securities, mortgage-backed securities, and municipal bonds. Investment securities available for sale totaled $70,743,000 on December 31, 2006 compared to $74,506,000 at December 31, 2005. The Company’s investment in available for sale securities balances was reduced to fund loan growth in 2006. Securities classified as held to maturity decreased by $766,000 to a balance of $12,220,000 on December 31, 2006.

The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the book value of the Company’s investment portfolio as of December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004.

 

     December 31,
     2006    2005    2004
     (in thousands)

Securities available for sale:

        

U.S. government agency securities

   $ 23,776    $ 31,039    $ 39,873

Mortgage-backed securities

     16,166      19,292      24,645

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     17,131      7,250      3,128

Corporate debt securities

     7,436      11,182      14,143
                    

Total debt securities

     64,509      68,763      81,789

Federal Home Loan Bank stock

     5,439      4,937      5,096

Equity securities

     795      806      910
                    

Total securities available for sale

     70,743      74,506      87,795
                    

Securities held to maturity:

        

Mortgage-backed securities

     129      157      279

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     12,091      12,829      8,911

Corporate debt securities

     —        —        —  
                    

Total securities held to maturity

     12,220      12,986      9,190
                    

Total investment securities

   $ 82,963    $ 87,492    $ 96,985
                    

 

29


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth the contractual maturities of investment securities as of December 31, 2006, and the weighted average yields (for tax-exempt obligations on a fully tax-equivalent basis assuming a 34% tax rate) of such securities. As of December 31, 2006, the Company held no securities with a book value exceeding 10% of shareholders’ equity.

 

     Maturity  
     Within One Year    

After One

but Within

Five Years

   

After Five

but Within

Ten Years

    After Ten Years  
     Amount    Yield     Amount    Yield     Amount    Yield     Amount    Yield  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Securities available for sale:

                    

U.S. government agency securities

   $ 4,515    3.12 %   $ 16,209    4.69 %   $ 3,052    5.80 %   $ —      —   %

Mortgage-backed securities

     —      —         16,166    4.05       —      —         —      —    

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     1,821    5.88       3,590    6.01       7,512    5.76       4,208    6.00  

Corporate debt securities

     4,916    3.72       2,520    4.96       —      —         —      —    
                                    

Total securities available for sale

     11,252    3.83       38,485    4.56       10,564    5.77       4,208    6.00  
                                    

Securities held to maturity:

                    

Mortgage-backed securities

     —      —         —      —         —      —         129    6.02  

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     1,122    5.04       7,035    5.87       3,934    6.29       —      —    
                                    

Total securities held to maturity

     1,122    5.04       7,035    5.87       3,934    6.29       129    6.02  
                                    

Total investment securities

   $ 12,374    3.94 %   $ 45,520    4.76 %   $ 14,498    5.91 %   $ 4,337    6.00 %
                                    

GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Goodwill totaled $13,405,000 on December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005. Goodwill is subject to testing for impairment on an annual basis in accordance with the provisions of FASB Statement No. 142 “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets.” No impairment write-down of goodwill was recorded in 2006, 2005 or 2004. Other intangible assets decreased to $1,128,000 as of December 31, 2006 compared with $1,417,00 on December 31, 2005 due to amortization. Amortization of intangible assets is recorded using an accelerated method based on the estimated life of the core deposit intangible and the estimated life of customer lists.

DEPOSITS

Total deposits were $560,615,000 on December 31, 2006 compared with $505,245,000 as of December 31, 2005, an increase of $55,370,000 or 11 percent. Deposit growth occurred mainly in the noninterest-bearing demand deposits and certificates of deposits. Balances of interest-bearing demand deposits, savings and money market deposit categories declined. As of December 31, 2006, certificates of deposit were the largest component of the Company’s deposit base representing approximately 58.8 percent of total deposits. This compares with 54.3 percent of total deposits on December 31, 2005. Savings and money market accounts were the next largest category at 18.1 percent, while interest-bearing demand deposits comprised 11.7 percent and non-interest bearing demand deposits were 11.5 percent of total deposits at year-end. The Company does not utilize brokered deposits as a source of funds.

 

30


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth the average amount of and the average rate paid on deposits by deposit category for the years indicated.

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2006     2005     2004  
    

Average

Balance

   Rate    

Average

Balance

   Rate    

Average

Balance

   Rate  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Non-interest bearing demand deposits

   $ 48,902    N/A     $ 44,762    N/A     $ 40,690    N/A  

Interest-bearing checking

     64,056    0.54 %     67,591    0.47 %     64,203    0.37 %

Savings

     114,040    2.47       119,850    1.40       124,106    1.07  

Certificates of deposit

     289,932    4.10       246,210    3.20       232,373    2.91  
                           

Total deposits

   $ 516,930    2.91 %   $ 478,413    2.07 %   $ 461,372    1.81 %
                                       

The following table summarizes certificates of deposit in amounts of $100,000 or more by time remaining until maturity as of December 31, 2006. These time deposits are made by individuals, corporations and public entities, all of which are located in the Company’s market area or are State of Iowa public funds.

 

    

December 31,

2006

     (in thousands)

Three months or less

   $ 16,171

Over three through six months

     10,743

Over six months through one year

     39,195

Over one year

     7,715
      

Total

   $ 73,824
      

FEDERAL HOME LOAN BANK ADVANCES

As of December 31, 2006, the Company’s subsidiary bank had borrowed $99,100,000 in fixed-rate advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank of Des Moines. Advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank at year-end 2006 increased $16,000,000 from 2005 to aid in funding the growth in loans. The Company utilizes Federal Home Loan Bank advances as an alternate source of funds to supplement deposits.

NOTES PAYABLE

As of December 31, 2006, the Company had $3,000,000 borrowed on a term note from Harris N.A. that matures November 30, 2009. The term note calls for semi-annual principal payments of $500,000 due May 31 and November 30 until maturity. The Company also had borrowed $1,050,000 on its revolving line of credit with the same unaffiliated bank. The Company maintains a revolving line arrangement that provides for a maximum line of $9,000,000 and matures on April 30, 2007. Management anticipates that this revolving line of credit will be renewed for a period of one year on substantially the same terms and conditions. Both of these credit facilities are priced on a variable basis at the national prime rate less .60 percent, with interest due quarterly. The Company had no material commitments for capital expenditures as of December 31, 2006.

LONG-TERM DEBT

On June 20, 2002, the Company obtained $10,310,000 in long-term subordinated debt from its participation in the issuance of a pooled trust preferred security. This security is a hybrid capital instrument that is included in Tier 1 capital for regulatory purposes, yet is non-dilutive to common shareholders and to return on equity. The trust preferred has a 30-year maturity, does not require any principal amortization and is callable in five years at par at the issuer’s option. The interest rate is variable based on the three month Libor rate plus 3.65 percent, with

 

31


Table of Contents

the interest payable quarterly. Under the terms of the trust preferred agreement, the Company may, at its option, call the security at par on June 20, 2007. In the event the Company does refinance its trust preferred debt, the unamortized issuance costs associated with the original security would be expensed in the period of call. As of December 31, 2006, the unamortized issuance costs associated with the trust preferred security total $262,000.

The following table summaries the outstanding amount of and the average rate on borrowed funds as of December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004.

 

     December 31,  
     2006     2005     2004  
     Balance   

Average

Rate

    Balance   

Average

Rate

    Balance   

Average

Rate

 
     (dollars in thousands)  

Long-term debt (1)

   $ 10,310    9.02 %   $ 10,310    7.80 %   $ 10,310    5.72 %

Notes payable (2)

     4,050    7.65       6,100    6.65       9,700    4.95  

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     99,100    4.90       83,100    4.58       91,874    4.39  

Federal funds purchased

     465    5.50       7,575    4.33       2,090    2.46  
                           

Total

   $ 113,925    5.37 %   $ 107,085    4.99 %   $ 113,974    4.52 %
                                       

(1) On June 27, 2002, the Company obtained $10,310,000 in long-term subordinated debt from its participation in the issuance of a pooled trust preferred security. The trust preferred has a 30 year maturity, does not require any principal amortization and is callable after five years at par at the issuer’s option. The interest rate is variable based on the three month Libor rate plus 3.65 percent, with interest payable quarterly.
(2) The notes payable balance at December 31, 2006, consists of $1,050,000 in advances on a revolving line of credit and $3,000,000 on a term note, both with Harris N.A. Both notes have a variable interest rate at 0.60 percent below the lender’s prime rate. Interest is payable quarterly. The revolving line of credit has a maximum limit of $9,000,000 and matures April 30, 2007. The term note calls for six semi-annual payments of $500,000 until maturity on November 30, 2009.

The maximum amount of borrowed funds outstanding at any month end for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004 were as follows:

 

     2006    2005    2004
     (in thousands)

Long-term debt

   $ 10,310    $ 10,310    $ 10,310

Notes payable

     6,100      10,900      10,700

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     103,100      90,890      91,874

Federal funds purchased

     18,095      26,845      15,645
                    

The following table sets forth the average amount of and the average rate paid on borrowed funds for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004.

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2006     2005     2004  
    

Average

Balance

  

Average

Rate

   

Average

Balance

  

Average

Rate

   

Average

Balance

  

Average

Rate

 
     (dollars in thousands)  

Long-term debt

   $ 10,310    8.99 %   $ 10,310    7.26 %   $ 10,310    5.32 %

Notes payable

     4,881    7.63       9,998    5.83       10,108    4.23  

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     92,091    4.83       85,327    4.61       82,250    4.83  

Federal funds purchased

     7,849    5.32       7,698    3.54       5,578    1.47  
                           

Total

   $ 115,131    5.35 %   $ 113,333    4.89 %   $ 108,246    4.65 %
                                       

 

32


Table of Contents

CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER COMMITMENTS

The following table summarizes contractual obligations and other commitments as of December 31, 2006:

Payments due by Period:

 

       Total    

Less

than 1

year

   

1 to 3

years

  

3 to 5

years

  

More

than 5

years

     (Amounts in thousands)

Contractual obligations

            

Time certificates of deposit

   $ 329,399     268,133     53,203    3,994    4,069

Federal funds purchased

     465     465     0    0    0

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     99,100     27,500     49,300    17,000    5,300

Long-term debt

     13,310     1,000     2,000    0    10,310

Lines of credit

     1,050     1,050     0    0    0

Noncancelable operating leases and capital lease obligations

     1,484     182     365    276    661
                            

Total

   $ 444,808     298,330     104,868    21,270    20,340
                            

Amount of Commitment—Expiration by Period:

Commitments to lend to borrowers

   $ 90,290     90,290     0    0    0

Commitments to purchase (sell) loans

     (580 )   (580 )   0    0    0

Standby letters of credit

     2,495     2,476     19    0    0
                            

Total

   $ 92,205     92,766     19    0    0
                            

CAPITAL RESOURCES

As of December 31, 2006, total shareholders’ equity was $62,533,000. Total equity increased by $4,147,000 in 2006 from $58,386,000 at December 31, 2005 as a result of the retention of earnings and unrealized gains arising during the year on securities available for sale, which was partially offset by the repurchase of the Company’s stock. The Company repurchased shares on the open market in 2006 as authorized by a stock repurchase program adopted by the Board of Directors on April 29, 2006. The Board authorized the repurchase of up to $2,000,000 of the outstanding shares of the Company through December 31, 2006. During the period from April through December 2006, the Company repurchased 65,500 shares for $1,268,325, or an average of $19.36 per share. During the year 2006, the Company received 1,550 shares in exchange from the exercise of stock options previously granted. A total of 68,469 shares were reissued upon the exercise of stock options throughout 2006. Restricted stock units representing 12,625 shares were awarded to directors and employees during 2006. A total of 3,715,431 shares were outstanding at December 31, 2006.

Shareholders’ equity as a percentage of total assets was 8.4 percent on December 31, 2006, versus 8.6 percent on December 31, 2005. Tangible shareholders’ equity was 6.6 percent at the end of 2006 and 6.3 percent at year-end 2005. Tangible equity is the ratio of shareholders’ equity less goodwill and intangible assets in proportion to total assets less goodwill and intangible assets.

The Company’s risk-based Tier 1 core capital ratio was 10.0 percent as of December 31, 2006, and the Total Capital ratio was 11.3 percent. Risk-based capital guidelines require the classification of assets and some off-balance-sheet items in terms of credit-risk exposure and the measuring of capital as a percentage of the risk-adjusted asset totals. Tier 1 core capital is the Company’s total common shareholders’ equity plus the $10,310,000 trust preferred security, reduced by goodwill. Total Capital adds the allowance for loan losses to the Tier 1 capital amount. As of December 31, 2005, the Company’s Tier 1 capital ratio was 10.4 percent, and the

 

33


Table of Contents

Total Capital ratio was 11.6 percent. They exceeded the minimum regulatory requirements of 4.0 percent for Tier 1 capital and 8.0 percent for Total Capital. The Company’s Tier 1 Leverage ratio, which measures Tier 1 capital in relation to total assets, was 8.2 percent as of December 31, 2006 and 8.3 percent at December 31, 2005, exceeding the regulatory minimum requirement range of 3.0 percent to 5.0 percent.

The Company’s common stock closed the year 2006 at $19.94 per share, representing 1.18 times the December 31, 2006 book value per share of $16.83. The book value per share was $15.77 on December 31, 2005. Tangible book value per share was $12.92 on December 31, 2006 compared with $11.77 on December 31, 2005.

LIQUIDITY

Liquidity management involves the ability to meet the cash flow requirements of depositors and borrowers. Liquidity management is conducted by the Company on both a daily and long-term basis. The Company adjusts its investments in liquid assets based upon management’s assessment of expected loan demand, projected loan sales, expected deposit flows, yields available on interest-bearing deposits, and the objectives of its asset/liability management program. Excess liquidity is invested generally in short-term U.S. Government and agency securities, short-term state and political subdivision securities, and other investment securities.

Liquid assets of cash on hand, balances due from other banks, and federal funds sold are maintained to meet customer needs. The Company had liquid assets of $20,726,000 as of December 31, 2006, compared with $13,520,000 as of December 31, 2005. Investment securities classified as available for sale and securities and loans maturing within one year totaled $224,966,000 and $199,428,000 as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively. Assets maturing within one year, combined with liquid assets, were 43.8 percent at December 31, 2006 and 42.1 percent at December 31, 2005 of total deposits as of the same dates.

The Company’s principal sources of funds are deposits, advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank, principal repayments on loans, proceeds from the sale of loans, principal recoveries on loan pool participations, proceeds from the maturity and sale of investment securities, its commercial bank line of credit, and funds provided by operations. While scheduled loan amortization and maturing interest-bearing deposits are relatively predictable sources of funds, deposit flows and loan prepayments are greatly influenced by economic conditions, the general level of interest rates, and competition. Principal recoveries on loan pool participations are also influenced by economic conditions and to a lesser extent, the interest rate environment. The Company utilizes particular sources of funds based on comparative costs and availability. This includes fixed-rate advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank that were obtained at a more favorable cost than deposits. The Company generally manages the pricing of its deposits to maintain a steady deposit base but has from time to time decided not to pay rates on deposits as high as its competition.

Net cash provided by operations is another major source of liquidity. The net cash provided by operating activities was $11,571,000 in 2006 and $6,161,000 in 2005. This trend of strong cash from operations is expected to continue into the foreseeable future.

The Company anticipates that it will have sufficient funds available to fund its loan commitments. As of December 31, 2006, the Company had outstanding commitments to extend credit to borrowers of $90,290,000, issued standby letters of credit of $2,495,000 and had commitments to sell loans of $580,000. Certificates of deposit maturing in one year or less totaled $268,133,000 as of December 31, 2006. Management believes that a significant portion of these deposits will remain with the Company.

The declaration of dividends is subject to, among other things, the Company’s financial condition and results of operations, the Bank’s compliance with regulatory capital requirements, tax considerations, industry standards, economic conditions, regulatory restrictions, general business practices and other factors. Refer to Note 19 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for information on regulatory limitations on dividends from the Bank to the Company and additional information on dividends. The payment of dividends is dependent

 

34


Table of Contents

upon the Company having adequate cash or other assets that can be converted into cash to pay dividends to its stockholders. The Company does not anticipate a liquidity problem in 2007 relating to the payment of dividends.

The Company was in compliance with all the covenants of its loan agreement with Harris, N.A. as of December 31, 2006 and at the end of each calendar quarter throughout the year 2006. The Company continues to seek acquisition opportunities that would strengthen its presence in current and new market areas. There are currently no pending acquisitions that would require the Company to secure capital from public or private markets.

ASSET-LIABILITY MANAGEMENT

The Company’s strategy with respect to asset-liability management is to maximize net interest income while limiting exposure to risks associated with volatile interest rates. This strategy is implemented by the Bank’s asset-liability committee that takes action based upon its analysis of expected changes in the composition and volumes of the balance sheet and the fluctuations in market interest rates. One of the measures of interest-rate sensitivity is the gap ratio. This ratio indicates the amount of interest-earning assets repricing within a given period in comparison to the amount of interest-bearing liabilities repricing within the same period of time. A gap ratio of 1.0 indicates a matched position, in which case the effect on net interest income due to interest rate movements will be minimal. A gap ratio of less than 1.0 indicates that more liabilities than assets reprice within the time period and a ratio greater than 1.0 indicates that more assets reprice than liabilities.

As of December 31, 2006, the Company’s cumulative gap ratios for assets and liabilities repricing within three months and within one year were .51 and .56, respectively, meaning more liabilities than assets are repriceable within these periods. The gap position is largely the result of classifying interest-bearing demand deposit accounts, money market accounts, and savings accounts as immediately repriceable. Historically, the Company has not repriced these accounts as frequently or as quickly as it adjusts the rates on new and renewing certificates of deposit. During 2006, the Company has offered twelve-month certificates of deposit at competitive market rates. This has increased the one-year liability sensitive position of the Company compared to previous years. Loan pool participations are repriced over a three-year period based on the historical average for return of pool investment.

 

35


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth the scheduled repricing or maturity of the Company’s consolidated assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2006, based on the assumptions described below. The effect of these assumptions is to quantify the dollar amount of items that are interest rate sensitive and can be repriced within each of the periods specified. The table does not necessarily indicate the impact of general interest rate movements on the Company’s interest margin because the repricing of certain categories of assets and liabilities is subject to competitive and other pressures beyond the Company’s control. As a result, certain assets and liabilities indicated as maturing or otherwise repricing within a stated period may, in fact, mature or reprice at different times and at different volumes.

 

   

Three

Months

or Less

   

Over Three

Months

to One Year

   

One to

Three

Years

   

Three

Years

or More

    Total
    (dollars in thousands)

Interest earning assets:

         

Loans

  $ 113,850     $ 110,118     $ 121,875     $ 157,989     $ 503,832

Loan pool participations

    8,241       24,721       65,923       —         98,885

Interest-bearing deposits in banks

    447       —         —         —         447

Investment securities:

         

Available for sale

    7,738       7,987       17,000       38,018       70,743

Held to maturity

    250       2,540       5,210       4,220       12,220
                                     

Total interest earning assets

    130,526       145,366       210,008       200,227       686,127
                                     

Interest-bearing liabilities:

         

Interest-bearing checking

    65,482       —         —         —         65,482

Savings

    101,443       —         —         —         101,443

Certificates of deposit

    61,232       206,901       53,203       8,063       329,399

Federal funds purchased

    465       —         —         —         465

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

    2,500       25,000       49,300       22,300       99,100

Notes payable

    4,050       —         —         —         4,050

Long-term debt

    10,310       —         —         —         10,310
                                     

Total interest-bearing liabilities

    245,482       231,901       102,503       30,363       610,249
                                     

Interest sensitivity gap per period

  $ (114,956 )   $ (86,535 )   $ 107,505     $ 169,864    
                                 

Cumulative Interest sensitivity gap

  $ (114,956 )   $ (201,491 )   $ (93,986 )   $ 75,878    
                                 

Interest sensitivity gap ratio

    0.53 %     0.63 %     2.05 %     6.59 %  

Cumulative Interest sensitivity gap ratio

    0.53 %     0.58 %     0.84 %     1.12 %  

In the table above, interest-bearing checking and savings are included as interest-bearing liabilities in the three months or less category.

Loan pool participations are included in the interest rate sensitivity analysis using an estimated three-year average life. The historical average for the return of original investment on the pools is approximately 36 months. Given the non-performing aspect of the loan pool portfolio, management feels that the use of contractual weighted-average maturity data is inappropriate.

FUTURE PROSPECTS

Inflation can have a significant effect on the operating results of all industries. Management believes that inflation does not affect the banking industry as much as it does other industries with a high proportion of fixed assets and inventory. Inflation does, however, have an impact on the growth of total assets and the need to maintain a proper level of shareholders’ capital.

Interest rates are significantly affected by inflation. It is difficult to assess the impact rate changes have since neither the timing nor the magnitude of changes in the various inflation indices coincides with changes in

 

36


Table of Contents

interest rates. There is, of course, an impact on longer-term earning assets; however, this effect continues to diminish as investment maturities are shortened and interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities shift from fixed-rate long-term to rate-sensitive short-term.

During 2006 the national inflation rate increased as the economy continued to grow. The Federal Reserve continued to move interest rates upward with increases in the fed funds rate that served to increase the prime rate to 8.25 percent as of December 31, 2006, compared to 7.25 percent as of December 31, 2005. Management of the Company believes that the 2007 rate of inflation will increase somewhat and that interest rates will moderate slightly. The Company is in a negative gap position with a greater amount of interest-bearing liabilities repriceable compared to repriceable interest-earning assets. If interest rates decline, the Company’s net interest margin may improve as interest expense may decrease faster than interest income. If interest rates increase, the Company’s net interest margin may contract as interest expense may increase faster than interest income. Management continues to focus on managing the net interest margin in 2007.

Management anticipates that in 2007 it will continue to focus on growing the Company through increased deposits. Growth in the loan portfolio will remain a priority. On January 23, 2006, the Bank opened a new branch facility in the downtown business district of Davenport, Iowa. This location was a temporary location. On February 26, 2007, the Davenport branch was relocated to a permanent facility two blocks from the original location. Additional branch locations in the Davenport/Bettendorf area are also being considered. A new branch location in Cedar Falls, Iowa is under construction with completion anticipated in the third quarter of 2007.

Opportunities to acquire additional loan pool participation investments will continue. Bids on pool participations during the year will take into account the availability of funds to invest, the market for such pools in terms of price and availability, and the potential return on the pools relative to risk.

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES

The Company has identified two critical accounting policies and practices relative to the financial condition and results of operation. These two accounting policies relate to the allowance for loan losses and to loan pool accounting.

Critical Accounting Policies

The allowance for loan losses represents management’s estimate of the probable credit losses inherent in the loan portfolio. These potential losses could be either identified or unidentified. The accuracy of this estimate could have a material impact on the Company’s earnings. To the extent actual outcomes differ from management estimates, additional provision for loan losses could be required that could adversely affect earnings or financial position in future periods.

The loan portfolio represents the largest asset type on the consolidated balance sheet. Loan losses are charged against the allowance, while recoveries of amounts previously charged off are credited to the allowance. A provision for loan losses is charged to operations based on management’s periodic evaluation of various factors.

Estimating the amount of the allowance for loan losses requires significant judgment and the use of estimates related to the amount and timing of potential losses. In evaluating the portfolio, management takes into consideration numerous factors; some are quantitative while others require qualitative judgment. These factors include: current economic conditions and trends, historical loan loss experience, the composition of the loan portfolio including mix and loan type, loan collateral values, loan classification, loan delinquencies, specific impaired loans and estimated probable credit losses. Nonperforming, classified and large loans are specifically reviewed for impairment and the allowance is allocated on a loan by loan basis as deemed necessary. Loans not specifically allocated and homogeneous loans are grouped into categories to which a loss percentage, based on historical experience, is allocated.

 

37


Table of Contents

The adequacy of the allowance for loan losses is monitored on an on-going basis by the loan review officer, senior management and the Bank’s board of directors. In addition, the various regulatory agencies that examine the Bank periodically review the allowance for loan losses. These agencies may require the Company to make additional provisions to the allowance based upon their judgment about information available to them at the time of their examination.

There can be no assurances that the allowance for loan losses will be adequate to cover all loan losses, but management believes that the allowance for loan losses was adequate as of December 31, 2006.

The loan pool accounting practice is also considered a critical accounting policy by the Company. The loan pool accounting practice relates to management’s opinion that the investment amount reflected on the Company’s financial statements does not exceed the estimated net realizable value of the fair value of the underlying collateral securing the purchased loans. In evaluating the purchased loan portfolio, management takes into account many of the same factors that are considered relative to the adequacy of the Company’s allowance for loan losses. In addition to the aforementioned factors, consideration is also given to the borrower’s current financial situation, underlying collateral values, historical collection experience and the borrower’s repayment history. The procedures employed to evaluate the fair value of the loan pool assets are essentially similar to those employed in evaluating the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses with an estimate of potential loss based on impairment by homogeneous and non-homogeneous loans.

The evaluation of the net realizable value of the purchased loans is performed by the Company’s loan review officer and monitored by the senior management and the Bank’s board of directors. Impairment of the net realizable value is recognized as a write-down in the basis of the asset and reflected as a reduction in the interest and discount income. To the extent that the net realizable value of the loan pools is impaired, the Company’s yield on the loan pools would be reduced. Management believes that as of December 31, 2006, the net realizable value of the loan pool investment exceeds the carrying amount reflected on the Company’s books.

IMPACT OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act was signed into law on July 30, 2002. The Act aimed to correct what were perceived as structural weaknesses affecting the capital markets, which may have contributed to massive losses such as experienced by the stockholders of Enron and WorldCom. These structural weaknesses were revealed by substantial misstatements in the financial statements of these companies, the apparent failure of boards of directors and public accountants to detect and correct these errors on a timely basis, and the apparent failures of stock analysts to detect weaknesses in financial information. The Act aimed to increase the reliability of financial information by placing corporate executives under considerable pressure to make sure financial information is correct. This included a requirement for the CEO and CFO to certify reports submitted to the SEC and to report on the effectiveness of internal control. The Act strengthened the power and independence of corporate audit committees by requiring the committee to take charge of hiring, overseeing, and compensating the Company’s auditor and requiring that the audit committee members be independent of the Company. Auditors now report directly to the audit committee. The Act also limited the non-audit services that the Company’s audit firm may provide and required that any allowable non-audit services must be pre-approved by the audit committee. The Act added more disclosure to be included in financial reports filed with the SEC. It added new sanctions and increases the severity of a number of civil and criminal penalties related to securities law violations, in addition to severe penalties for certification of faulty financial statements. Additionally, the Act placed a number of restrictions on the activities of securities firms and their employees that are supposed to isolate security analysts from pressures that may compromise the objectivity of their reports.

The implementation deadlines for Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 continue to evolve. Section 404 requires that management of the Company assess the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of the end of the fiscal year, and to include in the Company’s annual report to shareholders management’s conclusion, as a result of that assessment, about whether the Company’s internal

 

38


Table of Contents

control is effective. Additionally, the Company’s external auditors are required under Section 404 to evaluate and attest to management’s assessment. Under the definitions of Sarbanes-Oxley, the Company is a “non-accelerated filer” since it has “public float” of less than $75,000,000. “Public float” for this purpose is the market value of the Company’s outstanding common equity held by non-affiliates as of the end of its second fiscal quarter. For the Company, this is the quarter ended June 30. In December 2006, the SEC revised the compliance deadline for non-accelerated filers. Under the new rule, non-accelerated filers must comply with the management-assessment requirement for the first fiscal year ending on or after December 15, 2007. The requirement to provide an auditors’ report on internal control over financial reporting now applies to the first fiscal year ending on or after December 15, 2008.

Management and the Company’s audit committee are working together to ensure that the financial information reported by the Company is correct and reliable, that the required evaluation of internal controls takes place, and that certification by management is performed. Management is committed to meeting the SEC requirements. During the year 2006, the Company continued to utilize the services of an outside consultant to assist management in the evaluation of the adequacy of its internal control structures and procedures for financial reporting. Additionally, an assistant internal auditor was hired by the Company to facilitate the process.

Effect of New Financial Accounting Standards

In February 2006, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued SFAS No. 155, “Accounting for Certain Hybrid Financial Instruments.” SFAS No. 155 is an amendment of SFAS No. 133, “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities,” and SFAS No. 140, “Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities.” This Statement eliminates the exemption from applying SFAS No. 133 to interests in securitized financial assets so that similar instruments are accounted for similarly regardless of the form of the instruments. The Statement also allows an entity to elect fair value measurement at acquisition, at issuance or when a previously recognized financial instrument is subject to a remeasurement event, at an instrument-by-instrument basis. SFAS No. 155 is effective for the Company beginning January 1, 2007. The Company does not expect this Statement to have a material effect on its financial condition or results of operations.

In March 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 156, “Accounting for Servicing of Financial Assets.” SFAS No. 156 is an amendment to SFAS No. 140 that requires an entity to recognize a servicing asset or liability each time it undertakes an obligation to service a financial asset and requires each servicing asset or liability to be initially measured at fair value. Entities are permitted to choose the fair value measurement method or the amortization method for subsequent reporting periods. SFAS No. 156 is effective for the Company beginning January 1, 2007. The Company does not expect this Statement to have a material effect on its financial condition or results of operations.

In July 2006, the FASB issued Financial Interpretation No. 48 (“FIN 48”), “Accounting for Income Tax Uncertainties.” FIN 48 supplements SFAS No. 109, “Accounting for Income Taxes,” by defining the threshold for recognizing the benefits in the financial statements as “more-likely-than-not” to be sustained by the applicable taxing authority. The benefit recognized for a tax position that meets the “more-likely-than-not” criterion is measured based on the largest benefit that is more than fifty percent likely to be realized, taking into consideration the amount and probabilities of the outcome upon settlement. The Company adopted FIN 48 on January 1, 2007. The Company does not expect this Statement to have a material effect on its financial condition or results of operations.

In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 157, “Fair Value Measurements.” SFAS No. 157 establishes a framework for measuring fair value in U.S. generally accepted accounting principles and extends disclosures about fair value measurements. SFAS No. 157 applies whenever other standards require or permit assets or liabilities to be measured at fair value. This Statement does not expand the use of fair value in any new circumstances. SFAS No. 157 is effective for the Company beginning January 1, 2008. The Company does not expect the adoption of this Statement to have a material effect on its financial condition or results of operations.

 

39


Table of Contents

In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 158, “Employers’ Accounting for Defined Benefit Pension and Other Postretirement Plans.” SFAS No. 158 is an amendment to SFAS Nos. 87, 88, 106 and 132(R). This Statement requires employers to fully recognize the overfunded or underfunded status of a defined benefit retirement plan, retiree healthcare or other postretirement plans as an asset or liability in their financial statements as of the end of the fiscal year. SFAS No. 158 is effective for the Company for 2006. The adoption of this Statement did not have an impact on the Company’s financial condition or results of operations.

In September 2006, the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) ratified Issue No. 06-4, “Accounting for Deferred Compensation and Postretirement Benefit Aspects of Endorsement Split-Dollar Life Insurance Arrangements.” This EITF Issue addresses accounting for separate agreements that split life insurance policy benefits between an employer and employee. The Issue requires the employer to recognize a liability for future benefits payable to the employee under these agreements. The effects of applying this Issue must be recognized through either a change in accounting principle through an adjustment to equity or through the retrospective application to all prior periods. The Issue is effective for the Company beginning January 1, 2008. The adoption of the Issue will not have a material effect on the Company’s financial condition or results of operations.

In September 2006, the EITF ratified Issue No. 06-5, “Accounting for Purchases of Life Insurance—Determining the Amount That Could Be Realized in Accordance with FASB Technical Bulletin No. 85-4, Accounting for Purchase of Life Insurance.” EITF Issue No. 06-5 addresses accounting for what could be realized as an asset and provides clarification regarding additional amounts included in the contractual terms of an individual policy in determining the amount that could be realized under the insurance contract. The effects of applying this Issue must be recognized through either a change in accounting principle through an adjustment to equity or through the retrospective application to all prior periods. The Issue is effective for the Company beginning January 1, 2007. The Company does not expect the adoption of the Issue to have a material effect on its financial condition or results of operations.

In September 2006, the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) issued Staff Accounting Bulletin (“SAB”) No. 108, “Considering the Effects of Prior Year Misstatements in Current Year Financial Statements.” SAB No. 108 addresses how the effects of prior year uncorrected errors must be considered in quantifying misstatements in the current year financial statements. The effects of prior year uncorrected errors include the potential accumulation of improper amounts that may result in a material misstatement on the statement of financial condition or the reversal of prior period errors in the current period that result in a material misstatement of the current period results of operations. Adjustments to current or prior period financial statements would be required in the event that after application of various approaches for assessing materiality of a misstatement in current period financial statements and consideration of all relevant quantitative and qualitative factors, a misstatement is determined to be material. SAB No. 108 is applicable to all financial statements issued after November 15, 2006. The adoption of SAB No. 108 did not have an effect on the Company’s financial condition or results of operations.

In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, “The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities.” SFAS No. 159 allows companies to elect fair-value measurement of specified financial instruments and warranty and insurance contracts when an eligible asset or liability is initially recognized or when an event, such as a business combination, triggers a new basis of accounting for that asset or liability. The election, called the “fair-value option,” will enable some companies to reduce the volatility in reported earnings caused by measuring related assets and liabilities differently. The election is available for eligible assets or liabilities on a contract-by-contract basis without electing it for identical assets or liabilities under certain restrictions. SFAS No. 159 is effective as of the beginning of the Company’s first fiscal year beginning after November 15, 2007. The Company does not anticipate that the adoption of this Statement will have a material effect on its financial condition or results of operations.

Item 7A.   Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

Market risk is the risk of earnings volatility that results from adverse changes in interest rates and market prices. The Company’s market risk is comprised primarily of interest rate risk arising from its core banking

 

40


Table of Contents

activities of lending and deposit taking. Interest rate risk is the risk that changes in market interest rates may adversely affect the Company’s net interest income. Management continually develops and applies strategies to mitigate this risk. Management does not believe that the Company’s primary market risk exposures and how those exposures were managed in 2006 changed when compared to 2005.

The Company uses a third-party computer software simulation modeling program to measure its exposure to potential interest rate changes. For various assumed hypothetical changes in market interest rates, numerous other assumptions are made such as prepayment speeds on loans and securities backed by mortgages, the slope of the Treasury yield curve, the rates and volumes of the Company’s deposits, and the rates and volumes of the Company’s loans. This analysis measures the estimated change in net interest income in the event of hypothetical changes in interest rates. The following table presents the Company’s projected changes in net interest income for the various rate shock levels at December 31, 2006.

 

     $ Change     % Change  

+200 bp

   $ (1,116,000 )   -4.13 %

+100 bp

     (568,000 )   -2.10 %

Base

     0     0.00 %

-100 bp

     124,000     0.46 %

-200 bp

     (343,000 )   -1.27 %

As shown above, at December 31, 2006, the effect of an immediate and sustained 200 basis point increase in interest rates would decrease the Company’s net interest income by approximately $1,116,000. The effect of a ramped 200 basis point decrease in rates would decrease the Company’s net interest income by approximately $343,000. An increase in interest rates would cause more of the Company’s interest-bearing liabilities to reprice than interest-earning assets, thus reducing net interest income. As the rate on many of the interest-bearing liabilities could not be decreased by another 200 basis points, any additional reductions in market interest rates could reduce the Company’s net interest income as rates on repriceable assets are reduced while rates on liabilities cannot be lowered proportionally.

Computations of the prospective effects of hypothetical interest rate changes are based on numerous assumptions. Actual values may differ from those projections set forth above. Further, the computations do not contemplate any actions the Company may undertake in response to changes in interest rates.

Item 8.   Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

See Consolidated Financial Statements on pages F-1 through F-29.

Item 9.   Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure

Within the two most recent fiscal years or any subsequent interim period, there have been no changes in or disagreements with accountants of the Company.

Item 9A.   Controls and Procedures

As of the end of the period covered by this report, an evaluation was performed under the supervision and with the participation of the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of the effectiveness of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 240.13a-15(e)). Based on that evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer have concluded that the Company’s current disclosure controls and procedures are effective to ensure that information required to be disclosed by the Company in the reports that it files or submits under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarized and reported, within the time periods specified in the Securities and Exchange Commission’s rules and forms.

There were no changes in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by this report that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

41


Table of Contents

PART III

Item 10.   Directors and Executive Officers of the Registrant

Information regarding directors of the Company is included in the Company’s Proxy Statement for its 2007 Annual Meeting of Shareholders (“Proxy Statement”) under the heading “Election of Directors.” Information regarding the executive officers of the Company is included under the heading “Executive Officers” in the Company’s Proxy Statement. The definitive Proxy Statement of MidWest O ne Financial Group, Inc. is incorporated herein by reference. Also incorporated herein by reference from the definitive Proxy Statement is the information pertaining to Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance.

The Company has adopted a code of ethics which applies to all directors, officers and employees, including the chairman, president and chief executive officer, chief financial officer and controller. The chairman, president and chief executive officer, chief financial officer and controller have each signed such code of ethics and agreed to be bound by same. A copy of the code of ethics was filed as Exhibit 14 to the Company’s Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2004.

Item 11.   Executive Compensation

Information regarding compensation of executive officers and directors is included in the Company’s Proxy Statement under the headings “Executive Compensation” and “Directors’ Compensation.” The definitive proxy statement of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 12.   Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management

Information regarding security ownership of certain beneficial owners and management is included in the Company’s Proxy Statement under the heading “Ownership of Securities by Certain Beneficial Owners.” The definitive Proxy Statement of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. is incorporated herein by reference. Reference is also made to Item 5 hereof, pertaining to the issuance of shares of the Company pursuant to the Stock Incentive Plan approved by the shareholders.

Item 13.   Certain Relationships and Related Transactions

Information regarding certain relationships and related transactions is included in the Company’s Proxy Statement under the heading “Loans to Officers and Directors and Other Transactions with Officers and Directors.” The definitive Proxy Statement of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 14.   Principal Accounting Fees and Services

Fees billed for the last two fiscal years for services provided by the principal accountant for audit fees, audit-related fees, tax fees and all other fees are presented under the heading “Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” of the Company’s definitive Proxy Statement. The definitive Proxy Statement of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. is incorporated herein by reference.

The Audit Committee pre-approved the fees for the audit, audit-related and tax services provided by the principal accountant for the years ended December 31, 2006 and 2005.

 

42


Table of Contents

PART IV

Item 15.   Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules

The following exhibits and financial statement schedules are filed as part of this report:

 

  (a) 1.     Financial Statements: See pages F-1 through F-34 of this document.

 

  2. Exhibits (not covered by independent auditors’ report).

Exhibit 3.1

Articles of Incorporation, as amended through April 30, 1998, of Mahaska Investment Company. The Articles of Incorporation, as amended, of Mahaska Investment Company are incorporated by reference to the Company’s quarterly report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 1998.

Exhibit 3.1.1

Amendment to the Articles of Incorporation of Mahaska Investment Company changing the name of the corporation to MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. is incorporated by reference to the Company’s quarterly report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2003.

Exhibit 3.2

Bylaws of Mahaska Investment Company. The Amended and Restated Bylaws of Mahaska Investment Company dated July 23, 1998, are incorporated by reference to the Company’s quarterly report on Form 10-Q for the Quarter ended September 30, 1998.

Exhibit 10.1

MidwestOne Financial Group, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan & Trust as restated and amended.

Exhibit 10.2.1

1993 Stock Incentive Plan. This 1993 Stock Incentive Plan is incorporated by reference to Form S-1 Registration Number 33-81922 of Mahaska Investment Company.

Exhibit 10.2.2

1996 Stock Incentive Plan. This 1996 Stock Incentive Plan is incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1996.

Exhibit 10.2.3

1998 Stock Incentive Plan. This 1998 Stock Incentive Plan is incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1997.

Exhibit 10.2.4

2006 Stock Incentive Plan. This 2006 Stock Incentive Plan is incorporated by reference to the Company’s Definitive Proxy Statement on Form 14A filed March 21, 2006.

Exhibit 10.3

States Resources Corp. Loan Participation and Servicing Agreement dated February 5, 1999 between States Resources Corp. and Mahaska Investment Company. This agreement is incorporated herein by reference to the Form 10-K report filed by Mahaska Investment Company for the Year ended December 31, 1999.

 

43


Table of Contents

Exhibit 10.5

Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated November 30, 2003 between MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and Harris Trust and Savings Bank. This Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement is incorporated herein by reference to the Form 10-K Annual Report filed by Midwest One Financial Group, Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2003.

Exhibit 10.5.1

Fifth Amendment to the Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated November 27, 2006 between MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and Harris N.A.

Exhibit 13

The Annual Report to Shareholders of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. for the 2006 calendar year.

Exhibit 21

Subsidiaries

Exhibit 23

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Exhibit 31.1

Certification of Chief Executive Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a – 14(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Exhibit 31.2

Certification of Chief Financial Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a – 14(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Exhibit 32.1

Certification of the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer pursuant to Rule 13a – 14(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and 18 U.S.C., Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

The Company will furnish to any shareholder upon request and upon payment of a fee of $.50 per page, a copy of any exhibit. Requests for copies should be directed to David A. Meinert, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, MidWest One Financial Group, Inc., P.O. Box 1104, Oskaloosa, Iowa 52577-1104.

 

44


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

M ID W EST O NE F INANCIAL G ROUP , I NC .
    (Registrant)

By:

 

/s/    C HARLES S. H OWARD        

  Charles S. Howard
  Chairman, President, Chief Executive
Officer and Director

March 23, 2007

 

By:

 

/s/    D AVID A. M EINERT        

  David A. Meinert
  Executive Vice President, Chief Financial
Officer and Director

March 23, 2007

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

By:  

/s/    R ICHARD R. D ONOHUE        

Richard R. Donohue

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    D ONAL D. H ILL        

Donal D. Hill

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    C HARLES S. H OWARD        

Charles S. Howard

  

Director, Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer

 

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    B ARBARA J. K NIFF -M C C ULLA        

Barbara J. Kniff-McCulla

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    D AVID A. M EINERT        

David A. Meinert

  

Director, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Accounting Officer)

 

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    J OHN P. P OTHOVEN        

John P. Pothoven

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    J AMES G. W AKE        

James G. Wake

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    M ICHAEL R. W ELTER        

Michael R. Welter

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

 

45


Table of Contents
By:  

/s/    R OBERT D. W ERSEN        

Robert D. Wersen

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    E DWARD C. W HITHAM        

Edward C. Whitham

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

By:  

/s/    R. S COTT Z AISER        

R. Scott Zaiser

   Director  

March 23, 2007

Date

 

46


Table of Contents

Consolidated Balance Sheets

 

     December 31  
     2006     2005  
     (in thousands)  

Assets:

    

Cash and due from banks

   $ 20,279     13,103  

Interest-bearing deposits in banks

     447     417  
              

Cash and cash equivalents

     20,726     13,520  
              

Investment securities (notes 2 and 10):

    

Available for sale, at fair value

     70,743     74,506  

Held to maturity (fair value of $12,168 in 2006 and $12,925 in 2005)

     12,220     12,986  

Loans, net of unearned discount (notes 3, 5 and 10)

     503,832     433,437  

Allowance for loan losses (note 4)

     (5,693 )   (5,011 )
              

Net loans

     498,139     428,426  
              

Loan pool participations (note 6)

     98,885     103,570  

Premises and equipment, net (note 7)

     12,327     10,815  

Accrued interest receivable

     6,587     5,334  

Goodwill (note 8)

     13,405     13,405  

Other intangible assets (note 8)

     1,128     1,417  

Bank-owned life insurance

     7,798     7,523  

Other real estate owned (note 3)

     188     2,473  

Other assets

     2,765     2,357  
              

Total assets

   $ 744,911     676,332  
              

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity:

    

Deposits (notes 2 and 9):

    

Demand

   $ 64,291     50,309  

Interest-bearing checking

     65,482     65,435  

Savings

     101,443     115,218  

Certificates of deposit

     329,399     274,283  
              

Total deposits

     560,615     505,245  

Federal funds purchased

     465     7,575  

Federal Home Loan Bank advances (note 10)

     99,100     83,100  

Notes payable (note 11)

     4,050     6,100  

Long-term debt (note 12)

     10,310     10,310  

Accrued interest payable

     2,804     1,672  

Other liabilities

     5,034     3,944  
              

Total liabilities

     682,378     617,946  
              

Shareholders’ equity:

    

Common stock, $5 par value; authorized 20,000,000 shares; issued 4,912,849 shares as of December 31, 2006 and 2005 (note 11)

     24,564     24,564  

Capital surplus

     13,076     12,886  

Treasury stock at cost, 1,197,418 and 1,211,462 shares as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively

     (17,099 )   (16,951 )

Retained earnings (note 19)

     42,447     38,630  

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

     (455 )   (743 )
              

Total shareholders’ equity

     62,533     58,386  
              

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

   $ 744,911     676,332  
              

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Consolidated Statements of Income

 

     Year ended December 31
     2006     2005    2004
    

(in thousands, except

per share amounts)

Interest income:

       

Interest and fees on loans

   $ 33,897       26,518      23,885

Interest income and discount on loan pool participations

     9,142       10,222      9,395

Interest on bank deposits

     32       9      4

Interest on federal funds sold

     84       13      50

Interest on investment securities:

       

Available for sale

     2,809       2,829      3,589

Held to maturity

     490       489      449
                     

Total interest income

     46,454       40,080      37,372
                     

Interest expense:

       

Interest on deposits (note 9):

       

Interest-bearing checking

     347       321      239

Savings

     2,818       1,677      1,328

Certificates of deposit

     11,880       7,891      6,770

Interest on federal funds purchased

     418       272      82

Interest on Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     4,446       3,933      3,975

Interest on notes payable

     373       583      428

Interest on long-term debt

     927       749      548
                     

Total interest expense

     21,209       15,426      13,370
                     

Net interest income

     25,245       24,654      24,002

Provision for loan losses (note 4)

     180       468      858
                     

Net interest income after provision for loan losses

     25,065       24,186      23,144
                     

Noninterest income:

       

Deposit service charges

     2,114       1,588      1,611

Other customer service charges and fees

     716       721      681

Brokerage commissions

     995       564      326

Insurance commissions

     705       218      85

Data processing income

     219       203      209

Mortgage origination fees

     580       443      455

Bank-owned life insurance income

     328       389      224

Other operating income

     483       274      459

(Losses)/gains on sale of available for sale securities (note 2)

     (212 )     28      226
                     

Total noninterest income

     5,928       4,428      4,276
                     

Noninterest expense:

       

Salaries and employee benefits expense (notes 15 and 16)

     12,546       10,830      10,539

Net occupancy expense

     3,491       3,468      3,222

Professional fees

     468       975      854

Data processing expense

     656       451      447

Other intangible asset amortization

     289       305      308

Other operating expense

     4,009       3,386      3,143
                     

Total noninterest expense

     21,459       19,415      18,513
                     

Income before income tax expense

     9,534       9,199      8,907

Income tax expense (note 14)

     3,093       3,111      3,078
                     

Net income

   $ 6,441       6,088      5,829
                     

Net income per share—basic

   $ 1.74     $ 1.63    $ 1.54
                     

Net income per share—diluted

   $ 1.71     $ 1.59    $ 1.50
                     

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity and Comprehensive Income

 

    Common
Stock
  Capital
Surplus
    Treasury
Stock
    Retained
Earnings
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
    Total  
    (in thousands, except share data)  

Balance at December 31, 2003

  $ 24,564   12,976     (14,589 )   31,832     1,361     56,144  
                                   

Comprehensive income:

           

Net income

    —     —       —       5,829     —       5,829  

Unrealized losses arising during the year on securities available for sale, net of tax benefit of $750

    —     —       —       —       (1,256 )   (1,256 )

Less realized gains on securities available for sale, net of tax of $84

    —     —       —       —       (140 )   (140 )
                                   

Total comprehensive income

    —     —       —       5,829     (1,396 )   4,433  
                                   

Dividends paid ($.68 per share)

    —     —       —       (2,576 )   —       (2,576 )

Treasury stock reissued for the purchase of KCI (6,601 shares)

    —     27     88     —       —       115  

Stock options exercised (77,456 shares)

    —     (129 )   1,005     —       —       876  

Treasury stock purchased (115,379 shares)

    —     —       (2,144 )   —       —       (2,144 )

ESOP shares allocated

    —     82     —       —       —       82  
                                   

Balance at December 31, 2004

    24,564   12,956     (15,640 )   35,085     (35 )   56,930  
                                   

Comprehensive income:

           

Net income

    —     —       —       6,088     —       6,088  

Unrealized losses arising during the year on securities available for sale, net of tax benefit of $410

    —     —       —       —       (687 )   (687 )

Less realized gains on securities available for sale, net of tax of $7

    —     —       —       —       (21 )   (21 )
                                   

Total comprehensive income

    —     —       —       6,088     (708 )   5,380  
                                   

Dividends paid ($.68 per share)

    —     —       —       (2,543 )   —       (2,543 )

Treasury stock reissued for the purchase of Cook (4,393 shares)

    —     21     61     —       —       82  

Stock options exercised (73,405 shares)

    —     (160 )   1,002     —       —       842  

Treasury stock purchased (127,797 shares)

    —     —       (2,374 )   —       —       (2,374 )

ESOP shares allocated

    —     69     —       —       —       69  
                                   

Balance at December 31, 2005

    24,564   12,886     (16,951 )   38,630     (743 )   58,386  
                                   

Comprehensive income:

           

Net income

    —     —       —       6,441     —       6,441  

Unrealized gains arising during the year on securities available for sale, net of tax of $92

    —     —       —       —       155     155  

Less realized losses on securities available for sale, net of tax benefit of $79

    —     —       —       —       133     133  
                                   

Total comprehensive income

    —     —       —       6,441     288     6,729  
                                   

Dividends paid ($.71 per share)

    —     —       —       (2,624 )   —       (2,624 )

Stock-based compensation

    —     81     178     —       —       259  

Stock options exercised (68,469 shares)

    —     (16 )   972     —       —       956  

Treasury stock purchased (67,050 shares)

    —     —       (1,298 )   —       —       (1,298 )

ESOP shares allocated

    —     125     —       —       —       125  
                                   

Balance at December 31, 2006

  $ 24,564   13,076     (17,099 )   42,447     (455 )   62,533  
                                   

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 

     Year ended December 31  
     2006     2005     2004  
     (in thousands)  

Cash flows from operating activities:

      

Net income

   $ 6,441     6,088     5,829  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

      

Depreciation and amortization

     1,903     2,084     2,213  

Provision for loan losses

     180     468     858  

Loss (gain) on sale of available for sale securities

     212     (28 )   (226 )

Gain on sale of other assets

     —       —       (106 )

Loss on sale of premises and equipment

     —       13     33  

Stock-based compensation

     259     —       —    

Excess tax benefits related to stock options

     (88 )   —       —    

Amortization of investment securities and loan premiums

     349     681     782  

Accretion of investment securities and loan discounts

     (85 )   (86 )   (93 )

Deferred tax benefit

     (341 )   (352 )   (567 )

Decrease (increase) in other assets

     519     (3,849 )   (1,570 )

Increase in other liabilities

     2,222     1,142     58  
                    

Total adjustments

     5,130     73     1,382  
                    

Net cash provided by operating activities

     11,571     6,161     7,211  
                    

Cash flows from investing activities:

      

Investment securities available for sale:

      

Proceeds from sales

     10,414     5,113     17,835  

Proceeds from maturities

     16,804     26,024     20,447  

Purchases

     (23,489 )   (19,492 )   (29,376 )

Investment securities held to maturity:

      

Proceeds from maturities

     736     973     4,752  

Purchases

     —       (4,806 )   (1,739 )

Net increase in loans

     (69,846 )   (34,797 )   (22,864 )

Purchases of loan pool participations

     (40,071 )   (51,058 )   (61,511 )

Principal recovery on sale of loan pool participations

     4,763     12,387     3,931  

Principal recovery on loan pool participations, net of charge-offs

     39,993     40,603     41,137  

Purchases of premises and equipment

     (3,126 )   (2,236 )   (1,798 )

Proceeds from sale of premises and equipment

     —       197     7  

Cash paid for the purchase of KCI

     —       —       (450 )

Cash paid for the purchase of Cook

     —       (136 )   —    
                    

Net cash used in investing activities

     (63,822 )   (27,228 )   (29,629 )
                    

Cash flows from financing activities:

      

Net increase in deposits

     55,370     30,143     21,977  

Net (decrease) increase in federal funds purchased

     (7,110 )   5,485     (8,360 )

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     110,000     15,000     21,000  

Repayment of Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     (94,000 )   (23,850 )   (8,262 )

Advances on notes payable

     450     2,600     2,200  

Principal payments on notes payable

     (2,500 )   (6,200 )   (1,500 )

Excess tax benefits related to stock options

     88     —       —    

Dividends paid

     (2,624 )   (2,543 )   (2,576 )

Purchases of treasury stock

     (1,298 )   (2,374 )   (2,144 )

Proceeds from stock options exercised

     956     842     876  

ESOP shares allocated

     125     69     82  
                    

Net cash provided by financing activities

     59,457     19,172     23,293  
                    

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     7,206     (1,895 )   875  

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     13,520     15,415     14,540  
                    

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

   $ 20,726     13,520     15,415  
                    

Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information:

      

Cash paid during the period for:

      

Interest

   $ 20,077     14,830     13,493  
                    

Income taxes

   $ 3,672     3,300     3,766  
                    

Acquisitions:

      

Treasury stock reissued for the purchase of KCI

   $ —       —       115  
                    

Treasury stock reissued for the purchase of Cook

   $ —       82     —    
                    

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004

1.  Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

Nature of Operations

MidWest One Bank (the “Bank”) engages in retail and commercial banking and related financial services, providing the usual products and services such as deposits, commercial, agricultural, real estate, and consumer loans, and trust services. The Bank also provides data processing services to non-affiliated banks.

Since 1988, MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”), either directly or through the Bank, has invested in loan pool participations that have been purchased by certain non-affiliated independent service corporations (collectively, the “Servicer”) from other financial institutions, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”), or other sources. These loan pool investments are comprised of packages of loans previously made by financial institutions, which often include distressed or nonperforming loans, that have been sold at prices reflecting various discounts from the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the underlying loans depending on the credit quality of the portfolio. The Servicer collects and remits these amounts, less servicing fees, to the participants.

Principles of Consolidation

The accounting and reporting policies of the Company conform to U.S. generally accepted accounting principles. The consolidated financial statements of the Company include its 100 percent owned subsidiaries, MidWest One Bank, MidWest One Investment Services, Inc. and Cook and Son Agency, Inc. All material intercompany transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

Merger of Subsidiary Banks

Effective January 1, 2006, the Company’s subsidiary banks of MidWest One Bank & Trust, Central Valley Bank, Pella State Bank, and MidWest One Bank were merged into one state chartered bank with the name MidWest One Bank. The new name better describes the Company’s focus, enhances the opportunity for local and regional growth and strengthens the overall corporate identity.

Acquisition of Securities Brokerage Company

On July 30, 2004, the Company completed its acquisition of Koogler Company of Iowa (“KCI”), a sole proprietorship, which was a broker and registered investment advisor. The acquisition was a purchase transaction with the Company acquiring KCI’s book of business in exchange for $450,000 in cash and 6,601 shares of the Company’s stock with a fair market value of $115,000. Contemporaneously with this acquisition, the Company formed a new wholly owned subsidiary called MidWest One Investment Services, Inc. (“MWI”) to provide investment advisory and brokerage services throughout the banking offices of the Company.

Acquisition of Insurance Agency

The Company acquired all the outstanding shares of Cook & Son Agency, Inc. (“Cook”) on September 1, 2005, with Cook becoming a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. Cook is a full-service property and casualty insurance agency located in Pella, Iowa.

The transaction was accounted for as a purchase transaction with the revenues and expenses reflected on the Company’s financial statements from September 1, 2005 forward. The Company acquired Cook’s book of business in exchange for $830,000 in cash and 4,393 shares of the Company’s stock with a fair market value of $82,000. The excess of purchase price over the identifiable fair value of the tangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed of $653,000 was recorded as goodwill of $249,000 and other intangible assets of $404,000.

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Use of Estimates in the Preparation of Financial Statements

The preparation of the consolidated financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates. Significant estimates that are particularly sensitive to change relate to the allowance for loan losses and the carrying basis of the loan pool participations.

Cash and Due from Banks

The Company is required to maintain certain daily reserve balances on hand in accordance with federal banking regulations. The average reserve balances maintained in accordance with such regulations for the years ended December 31, 2006 and 2005 were $4,640,000 and $2,408,000, respectively.

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

For purposes of reporting cash flows, cash and cash equivalents include cash and due from banks and interest-bearing deposits in banks.

Investment Securities

The Company classifies investment securities based on the intended holding period. Securities which may be sold prior to maturity to meet liquidity needs, to respond to market changes, or to adjust the Company’s asset-liability position are classified as available for sale. Securities held principally for the purpose of near-term sales are classified as trading. Securities the Company intends to hold until maturity are classified as held to maturity.

Investment securities available for sale are recorded at fair value. The aggregate unrealized gains and losses, net of the income tax effect, are recorded as a component of other comprehensive income until realized. Securities with unrealized losses are analyzed quarterly for other-than-temporary impairment. If a security is determined to have an other-than-temporary impairment, a loss is recognized on the consolidated statements of income and a new cost basis is established. Securities held to maturity are recorded at cost, adjusted for amortization of premiums and accretion of discounts. Amortization of premiums and accretion of discounts are computed using the level yield method over the remaining maturities of the securities.

Net gains or losses on the sales of securities are shown in the consolidated statements of income using the specific identification method and are recognized on a trade date basis.

Loans

Loans are stated at the principal amount outstanding, net of deferred loan fees and allowance for loan losses. Interest on loans is credited to income as earned based on the principal amount outstanding. Deferred loan fees are amortized using the level yield method over the remaining maturities of the loans.

It is the Company’s policy to discontinue the accrual of interest income on any loan when, in the opinion of management, there is reasonable doubt as to the collectibility of interest or principal, normally when a loan is 90 days past due. When interest accruals are deemed uncollectible, interest credited to income in the current year is reversed and interest accrued in prior years is charged to the allowance for loan losses. Interest income on nonaccrual loans is only recognized on a cash basis. Nonaccrual loans are returned to an accrual status when, in the opinion of management, the financial position of the borrower indicates there is no longer any reasonable doubt as to timely payment of principal or interest.

A loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that a creditor will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. All

 

F-6


Table of Contents

non-homogeneous loans are reviewed for impairment on an individual basis. All impaired loans, including nonaccrual loans and loans that are restructured in a troubled debt restructuring involving a modification of terms, are either measured at the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s initial effective interest rate, the fair value of the collateral of an impaired collateral-dependent loan, or an observable market price, if one exists. If the measure of the impaired loan is less than the recorded investment in the loan, impairment will be recognized through the allowance for loan losses.

Allowance for Loan Losses

The allowance for loan losses is established through a provision for loan losses charged to expense. Loans are charged against the allowance for loan losses when management believes collectibility of the principal is unlikely.

Management believes the allowance for loan losses is adequate to absorb probable losses in the loan portfolio on the balance sheet date. While management uses available information to recognize loan losses, future additions to the allowance may be necessary based on changes in economic conditions. In addition, various regulatory agencies, as an integral part of the examination process, periodically review the Bank’s allowance for loan losses. Such agencies may require the subsidiary bank to increase its allowance for loan losses based on their judgments and interpretations about information available to them at the time of their examinations.

Loan Pool Participations

The Company has invested in participation in pools of loans acquired from the FDIC and other sources at substantial discounts. The pools consist of loans to borrowers located throughout the United States.

The Company carries its investment in the loan pools as a separate earning asset on the balance sheet. Principal or interest restructures, write-downs, or write-offs within the pools are not included in the Company’s disclosures for its loan portfolio. The loan pools are managed by a non-affiliate Servicer operating in Omaha, Nebraska.

Each pool has a different composition and different characteristics. The composition of a loan pool is generally determined by the seller based on its desire to maximize the price it receives for all loans among the various pools. Many of the pools consist of loans primarily secured by single-family, multi-family, and small commercial real estate. Some pools may consist of a large number of small consumer loans that are secured by other assets such as automobiles or mobile homes, while other pools may consist of small to medium balance commercial loans. Some may contain a mixture of various types of loans.

The Company invests in pools consisting of both performing loans and past-due nonperforming loans. The price bid and paid for such a loan pool is determined based on the composition of the particular pool, the amounts the Servicer believes can be collected on such a pool, and the risks associated with the collection of such amounts.

Upon the acquisition of a participation interest in a loan pool, the Company assumes the risk of loss. The extent of such risk is dependent on a number of factors, including the Servicer’s ability to locate the debtors, the debtors’ financial condition, the possibility the debtor may file for protection under applicable bankruptcy laws, the Servicer’s ability to locate the collateral, if any, for the loan and to obtain possession of such collateral, the value of such collateral, and the length of time it takes to realize the ultimate recovery either through collection procedures or through a resale of the loans following a restructure.

A cost “basis” is assigned to each individual loan acquired on a cents per dollar (discounted price) based on the Servicer’s assessment of the recovery potential of each such loan. This methodology assigns a higher basis to performing loans with greater potential collectibility and a lower basis to those loans identified as having little or no potential for collection.

 

F-7


Table of Contents

Loan pool participations are shown on the Company’s balance sheet as a separate asset category. The original carrying value of the loan pool participations represents the discounted price paid by the Company to acquire its participation interests in various loan pools purchased by the Servicer. The Company’s investment balance is reduced as the Servicer collects principal payments on the loans and remits the proportionate share of such payments to the Company.

Prior to January 1, 2005, the investment in loan pools was accounted for on a nonaccrual (or cash) basis. Beginning January 1, 2005, subsequent pools acquired are accounted for in accordance with the provisions of Statement of Position 03-3 (“SOP 03-3”) issued by the Accounting Standards Executive Committee of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants. No change is required for those pools acquired prior to December 31, 2004, and the accounting treatment utilized on those pools remains on the cash basis.

SOP 03-3 provides updated guidance on the accounting for purchased loans that show evidence of deterioration of credit quality since origination and for which it is probable, at acquisition, that the purchaser will be unable to collect all contractually required payments receivable. SOP 03-3 generally requires that the excess of the estimated cash flows expected to be collected on the loan over the initial investment be accreted over the estimated remaining life of the loan. According to SOP 03-3, in order to apply the interest method of recognition to these types of loans, there must be sufficient information to reasonably estimate the amount and timing of the cash flows expected to be collected. When that is not the case, the loan should be accounted for as a nonaccrual status applying the cash basis income recognition to the loan.

The Company has developed and implemented procedures to determine if accretion of the discount (“accretable yield”) on the purchased loans in a pool is required under SOP 03-3. These procedures were applied to all loans acquired subsequent to January 1, 2005 (the adoption date for SOP 03-3) that had been held by the Servicer for at least six months as of December 31, 2006. Given the impaired nature of the loan pools typically purchased, the individual loans are evaluated for SOP 03-3 purposes by the end of a six-month window from the date of purchase. This provides time for the Servicer to assess the quality of the loans and assign basis to each loan within the pool. Purchased loans are evaluated individually with a determination made utilizing various criteria including: past-due status, late payments, legal status of the loan (not in foreclosure, judgment against the borrower, for referred to legal counsel), frequency of payments made, collateral adequacy and the borrower’s financial condition. If all criteria for being able to reasonably estimate the amount and timing of cash flows are met, the individual loan will utilize the accounting treatment required by SOP 03-3 with the accretable yield difference between the expected cash flows and the purchased basis accreted into income on the level yield basis over the anticipated life of the loan. If any of the six criteria are not met, the loan is accounted for on the cash-basis of accounting.

In the event that a prepayment is received on a loan accounted for under SOP 03-3, the accretable yield is recomputed and the revised amount accreted over the estimated remaining life of the loan on the level yield basis. If a loan subject to accretable yield under SOP 03-3 fails to make timely payments, it is subject to classification and an allowance for loss would be established. An allowance of $49,000 and $10,000 existed as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively, related to loans subject to accretable yield.

Collection expenses incurred by the Servicer are netted against discount income. Discount income is added to interest income and reflected as one amount on the Company’s consolidated statements of income. The Servicer and representatives of the Company continually evaluate the collectability of the loans and the recovery of the underlying basis. On a quarterly basis, those loans that are determined to have a possible recovery of less than the assigned basis amount are placed on a “watch list.” The amount of basis exceeding the estimated recovery amount on the “watch list” loans is written off by a charge against discount income.

Interest income is only recognized when collected and actually remitted to the Company by the Servicer for those loans acquired prior to December 31, 2004, and for those loans subject to nonaccrual status in accordance with SOP 03-3. Many of the pools that have been purchased by the Servicer do not include purchased interest in the cost basis. Interest income collected by the Servicer is reflected in the Company’s consolidated financial statements as interest income included as part of the interest income and discount on loan pool participations.

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Premises and Equipment

Premises and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line or accelerated method over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets, which range from 5 to 40 years for buildings and improvements and 3 to 10 years for furniture and equipment.

Intangible Assets

Intangible assets consist of goodwill and other intangible assets. Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price of acquired subsidiaries’ net assets over their fair value. The Company assesses goodwill for impairment annually, and more frequently in the presence of certain circumstances. Impairment exists when the carrying amount of the goodwill exceeds its implied fair value. No impairment write-down of goodwill has been recorded in 2006, 2005 or 2004.

Other intangible assets consist of core deposit premium and customer list intangible which are being amortized using the effective-yield method over 10 years. Annually, the Company reviews the core deposit premium and customer list intangible for events or circumstances that may indicate a change in the recoverability of the underlying basis. For the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004, there were no events or circumstances that triggered an impairment charge against intangible assets.

Bank-Owned Life Insurance

The Company and its subsidiaries have purchased life insurance policies on the lives of certain officers. The one-time premiums paid for the policies, which equal the initial cash surrender value, are recorded as an asset. Increases or decreases in the cash surrender value, other than proceeds from death benefits, are recorded as noninterest income. Proceeds from death benefits first reduce the cash surrender value attributable to the individual policy and then any additional proceeds are recorded as noninterest income.

Other Real Estate Owned

Other real estate owned represents property acquired through foreclosure or deeded to the Bank in lieu of foreclosure on real estate mortgage loans on which the borrowers have defaulted as to payment of principal and interest. Other real estate owned is carried at the lower of the cost of acquisition or fair value, less estimated costs of disposition. Reductions in the balance of other real estate at the date of acquisition are charged to the allowance for loan losses. Expenses incurred subsequent to the acquisition of the property and any subsequent write-downs to reflect current fair market value are charged as noninterest expense as incurred. Gains or losses on the disposition of other real estate owned are recognized in noninterest income or expense in the period in which they are realized.

Income Taxes

The Company files a consolidated federal income tax return. For state purposes, the Bank files a franchise return and the remaining entities file a consolidated income tax return.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to temporary differences between the financial statement carrying amounts and of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date.

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

Fair value estimates are made at a specific point in time, based on relevant market information about the financial instrument. These estimates do not reflect any premium or discount that could result from offering the

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Company’s entire holdings of a particular financial instrument for sale at one time. Unless included in assets available for sale, it is the Company’s general practice and intent to hold its financial instruments to maturity and not to engage in trading or sale activities.

Fair value estimates are based on judgments regarding future expected loss experience, current economic conditions, risk characteristics of various financial instruments and other factors. These estimates are subjective in nature and involve uncertainties and matters of significant judgment and therefore cannot be determined with precision. Changes in assumptions could significantly affect the estimates.

Estimated fair values have been determined by the Company using the best available information and an estimation method suitable for each category of financial instruments.

Trust Department Assets

Property held for customers in fiduciary or agency capacities is not included in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets, as such items are not assets of the Company. Trust department assets totaled $39,072,000 and $35,286,000 as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

Earnings Per Share

Basic earnings per share amounts are computed by dividing net income by the weighted average number of shares outstanding during the year. Diluted earnings per share amounts are computed by dividing net income by the weighted average number of shares and all potentially dilutive shares outstanding during the year. As of December 31, 2006, the Company had 129,605 common stock options outstanding that could potentially be dilutive in the future but are not included in the diluted earnings per share calculation because they are currently anti-dilutive. The following information was used in the computation of earnings per share on both a basic and diluted basis for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004:

 

     2006    2005    2004
    

(in thousands, except per

share amounts)

Basic EPS computation

        

Numerator:

        

Net income

   $ 6,441    6,088    5,829
                

Denominator:

        

Weighted average shares outstanding

     3,695    3,745    3,778
                

Basic EPS

   $ 1.74    1.63    1.54
                

Diluted EPS computation

        

Numerator:

        

Net income

   $ 6,441    6,088    5,829
                

Denominator:

        

Weighted average shares outstanding

     3,695    3,745    3,778

Weighted average dilutive shares outstanding for stock options

     70    78    101
                
     3,765    3,823    3,879
                

Diluted EPS

   $ 1.71    1.59    1.50
                

Stock Incentive Plan

The Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 123(R), “Share-Based Payment,” on January 1, 2006. SFAS 123(R) requires that the cost resulting from share-based awards be recognized in the financial statements. The Company is utilizing the “modified prospective” transition method to

 

F-10


Table of Contents

measure the cost of the awards over the remaining vesting period for those options that had been granted prior to January 1, 2006 and were not fully vested as of that date. The expense is based on the fair value determined at the grant date. The adoption by the Company of SFAS 123(R) resulted in compensation expense, net of tax, of $236,000 or $.06 per share diluted for the year ended December 31, 2006.

Prior to adoption of SFAS 123(R), the Company applied APB Opinion No. 25 and related interpretations in accounting for share-based payments. Accordingly, no compensation cost was recognized in the financial statements for the share-based payments prior to January 1, 2006. Results for periods prior to January 1, 2006 have not been restated.

Had compensation cost for the Company’s stock incentive plan been determined in accordance with SFAS 123(R), the Company’s net income and earnings per share for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004 would have been reduced to the pro forma amounts indicated below:

 

           2005            2004    
    

(in thousands, except

per share data)

Net income:

     

As reported

   $ 6,088    5,829

Compensation expense that would have been recorded under SFAS No. 123 (R), net of tax

     341    278
           

Net income as adjusted

   $ 5,747    5,551
           

Earnings per share:

     

As reported—basic

   $ 1.63    1.54

As reported—diluted

     1.59    1.50

Pro forma—basic

     1.54    1.47

Pro forma—diluted

     1.54    1.46

Concentrations of Credit Risk

The Company originates real estate, consumer, agricultural and commercial loans primarily in its eastern and southeast Iowa market areas and adjacent counties. Although the Company has a diversified portfolio, a substantial portion of its borrowers’ ability to repay their loans is dependent upon economic conditions in the Company’s market areas.

Reclassifications

Certain reclassifications have been made to prior years consolidated financial statements in order to conform to the current year presentation.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

2.  Investment Securities

A summary of investment securities by type as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, follows:

 

December 31, 2006

  

Amortized

Cost

  

Gross

Unrealized

Gains

  

Gross

Unrealized

Losses

  

Fair

Value

     (in thousands)

Investment Securities Available for Sale:

           

U.S. government agency securities

   $ 23,837    102    163    23,776

Mortgage-backed securities

     16,915    1    750    16,166

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     17,114    130    113    17,131

Corporate debt securities

     7,486    2    52    7,436
                     

Total debt securities

     65,352    235    1,078    64,509

Federal Home Loan Bank stock

     5,439    —      —      5,439

Other equity securities

     685    111    1    795
                     

Total

   $ 71,476    346    1,079    70,743
                     

Investment Securities Held to Maturity:

           

Mortgage-backed securities

   $ 129    1    —      130

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     12,091    66    119    12,038
                     

Total

   $ 12,220    67    119    12,168
                     

December 31, 2005

  

Amortized

Cost

  

Gross

Unrealized

Gains

  

Gross

Unrealized

Losses

  

Fair

Value

     (in thousands)

Investment Securities Available for Sale:

           

U.S. government agency securities

   $ 31,513    14    488    31,039

Mortgage-backed securities

     19,959    1    668    19,292

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     7,252    64    66    7,250

Corporate debt securities

     11,346    —      164    11,182
                     

Total debt securities

     70,070    79    1,386    68,763

Federal Home Loan Bank stock

     4,937    —      —      4,937

Other equity securities

     691    115    —      806
                     

Total

   $ 75,698    194    1,386    74,506
                     

Investment Securities Held to Maturity:

           

Mortgage-backed securities

   $ 157    2    —      159

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     12,829    101    164    12,766
                     

Total

   $ 12,986    103    164    12,925
                     

During the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004, the Company incurred no other–than-temporary impairment losses on securities available for sale.

The following table summarizes the amount of unrealized losses, defined as the amount by which amortized cost exceeds fair value, and the related fair value of investments with unrealized losses in the Company’s securities portfolio as of December 31, 2006 and 2005. The investments were segregated into two categories: those that have been in a continuous unrealized loss position for less than twelve months and those that have been in a continuous unrealized loss position for twelve or more months. The reference point for determining how long an investment was in an unrealized loss position was December 31, 2006 and 2005. All of the investments held by the Company as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, that had unrealized losses for a period of less than twelve months were due to the increased rates being offered by year-end 2006 and 2005 on similar investment securities.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Various types of investment securities held by the Company as of December 31, 2006 had unrealized losses for a period greater than twelve months. The unrealized loss for U.S. government agencies and mortgage-backed securities primarily relates to nineteen securities issued by FNMA, FHLB and FHLMC. The unrealized losses reported for obligations of states and political subdivisions relates primarily to fifty-four securities issued by various Iowa communities and entities. Nine corporate debt securities and one equity security had unrealized losses for a period of greater than twelve months. Management does not believe that any remaining individual unrealized loss for a period greater than twelve months as of December 31, 2006 represents other-than-temporary impairment. The unrealized losses in the debt securities are the result of changes in interest rates and are not related to credit downgrades of the securities. The Company has the ability and intent to hold the securities contained in the table for a time necessary to recover its amortized cost.

 

     Less Than 12 Months    12 Months or Longer    Total

December 31, 2006

   Fair
Value
   Unrealized
Losses
   Fair
Value
   Unrealized
Losses
   Fair
Value
   Unrealized
Losses
     (in thousands)

U.S. government agency securities

   $ 3,962    14    10,745    149    14,707    163

Mortgage-backed securities

     —      —      16,124    750    16,124    750

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     6,142    70    10,869    162    17,011    232

Corporate debt securities

     —      —      6,441    52    6,441    52

Equity securities

     —      —      2    1    2    1
                               

Total temporarily impaired securities

   $ 10,104    84    44,181    1,114    54,285    1,198
                               

Various types of investment securities held by the Company as of December 31, 2005 had unrealized losses for a period greater than twelve months. The unrealized loss for U.S. government agencies and mortgage-backed securities primarily relates to twenty-four securities issued by Fed Farm Credit, FNMA, FHLB and FHLMC. The unrealized losses reported for obligations of states and political subdivisions relates primarily to thirteen securities issued by various Iowa communities and entities. Six corporate debt securities and one equity security had unrealized losses for a period of greater than twelve months. Management does not believe that any remaining individual unrealized loss for a period greater than twelve months as of December 31, 2005 represents other-than-temporary impairment. The unrealized losses in the debt securities are the result of changes in interest rates and are not related to credit downgrades of the securities. The Company has the ability to hold the securities contained in the table for a time necessary to recover its amortized cost.

     Less Than 12 Months    12 Months or Longer    Total

December 31, 2005

  

Fair

Value

  

Unrealized

Losses

  

Fair

Value

  

Unrealized

Losses

  

Fair

Value

  

Unrealized

Losses

                 
     (in thousands)

U.S. government agency securities

   $ 6,253    79    19,786    409    26,039    488

Mortgage-backed securities

     —      —      19,223    668    19,223    668

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     11,742    184    3,222    46    14,964    230

Corporate debt securities

     6,746    78    4,436    86    11,182    164

Equity securities

     3    —      4    —      7    —  
                               

Total temporarily impaired securities

   $ 24,744    341    46,671    1,209    71,415    1,550
                               

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Proceeds from the sale of investment securities available for sale during 2006, 2005, and 2004 were $10,414,000, $5,113,000, and $17,835,000, respectively. Gross gains and losses realized on the sale of investment securities available for sale for the years ended December 31 were as follows:

 

     2006     2005     2004  
     (in thousands)  

Realized gains

   $ 1     82     238  

Realized losses

     (213 )   (54 )   (12 )
                    

Total

   $ (212 )   28     226  
                    

As of December 31, 2006 and 2005, investment securities with carrying values of approximately $8,701,000 and $27,969,000 respectively, were pledged as collateral to secure public fund deposits and for other purposes required or permitted by law. The merger of the Company’s four banks into one charter on January 1, 2006 increased the capital of the consolidated Bank and thereby reduced the amount of collateral required to secure public fund deposits. Public funds approximated $41,968,000 and $41,104,000 at December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

The amortized cost and approximate fair value of investment securities as of December 31, 2006, by contractual maturity, are shown as follows. Expected maturities will differ from contractual maturities because issuers may have the right to call or repay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.

 

     Amortized
Cost
   Fair
Value
     (in thousands)

Investment Securities Available for Sale:

     

Due in 1 year or less

   $ 11,323    11,252

Due after 1 year through 5 years

     39,347    38,485

Due after 5 years through 10 years

     10,504    10,564

Due after 10 years

     4,178    4,208
           

Total

   $ 65,352    64,509
           

Investment Securities Held to Maturity:

     

Due in 1 year or less

   $ 1,122    1,117

Due after 1 year through 5 years

     7,035    6,952

Due after 5 years through 10 years

     3,934    3,969

Due after 10 years

     129    130
           

Total

   $ 12,220    12,168
           

3.  Loans

A summary of the respective loan categories as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, follows:

 

     2006     2005  

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount    %     Amount    %  

Real estate loans

   $ 332,534    66.0 %   293,363    67.7 %

Commercial loans

     89,326    17.7     72,248    16.7  

Agricultural loans

     66,393    13.2     55,471    12.8  

Loans to individuals

     15,579    3.1     12,355    2.8  
                        

Total

   $ 503,832    100.0 %   433,437    100.0 %
                        

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Total nonperfoming loans and assets at December 31, 2006 and 2005, were:

 

     2006    2005
     (in thousands)

Impaired loans:

     

Nonaccrual

   $ 727    1,522

Restructured

     2,014    159
           

Total impaired loans

     2,741    1,681

Loans past due 90 days and more

     3,060    1,671
           

Total nonperforming loans

     5,801    3,352

Other real estate owned

     188    2,473
           

Total nonperforming assets

   $ 5,989    5,825
           

The average balances of nonperforming loans for the years ended December 31, 2006 and 2005, were $3,472,000 and $3,640,000, respectively. The allowance for credit losses related to nonperforming loans at December 31, 2006 and 2005, was $350,000 and $304,000, respectively. Nonperforming loans of $2,213,000 and $1,389,000 at December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively, were not subject to a related allowance for credit losses because of the net realizable value of loan collateral, guarantees and other factors. As of December 31, 2006, the Company has no commitments to lend additional funds to any borrowers who have nonperforming loans. The effect of nonaccrual and restructured loans on interest income for each of the three years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004 was:

 

     2006    2005    2004
     (in thousands)

Interest income:

        

As originally contracted

   $ 395    377    202

As recognized

     199    24    36
                

Reduction of interest income

   $ 196    353    166
                

4.  Allowance for Loan Losses

Changes in the allowance for loan losses for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004 were as follows:

 

     2006     2005     2004  
     (in thousands)  

Balance at beginning of year

   $ 5,011     4,745     4,857  

Provision for loan losses

     180     468     858  

Recoveries on loans previously charged off

     1,062     263     72  

Loans charged off

     (560 )   (465 )   (1,042 )
                    

Balance at end of year

   $ 5,693     5,011     4,745  
                    

 

F-15


Table of Contents

5.  Loans to Related Parties

Certain directors and officers of the Company, including their immediate families and companies in which they are principal owners, were loan customers of the Bank. All loans to this group were made in the ordinary course of business at prevailing terms and conditions. The loan activity of this group, including loans as of December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004, was as follows:

 

     2006    2005    2004
     (in thousands)

Aggregate balance at beginning of year

   $ 5,951    7,929    5,839

Advances

     15,576    7,156    12,402

Payments

     15,995    9,134    10,312
                

Aggregate balance at end of year

   $ 5,532    5,951    7,929
                

6.  Loan Pool Participations

A summary of the changes in the carrying value of loan pool participations for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004 were as follows:

 

     2006     2005     2004  
     (in thousands)  

Balance at beginning of year, net of allowance of $2,234, $2,054 and $1,255

   $ 103,570     105,502     89,059  

Purchases

     40,071     51,058     61,511  

Principal payments

     (42,173 )   (50,506 )   (42,920 )

Net charge-offs

     (2,583 )   (2,484 )   (2,148 )
                    

Balance at end of year, net of allowance of $2,234, $2,234 and $2,054

   $ 98,885     103,570     105,502  
                    

Total face value at end of year

   $ 146,529     150,556     151,731  

The Company evaluated all loans purchased after January 1, 2005 under the SOP 03-3 criteria and determined that certain loans did not meet the criteria for level-yield income recognition required by SOP 03-3. The outstanding balance of those loans was $44,816,000, with a carrying value of $31,088,000, and $20,296,000, with a carrying value of $14,584,000, as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively. Additionally, the Company purchased $36,850,000 in loans during the fourth quarter of 2006 that were in the process of being evaluated under SOP 03-3 as of December 31, 2006 in accordance with the Company’s accounting policy on loan pool participations.

The outstanding balances and carrying values as of December 31 of the loans purchased after January 1, 2005 that met the level-yield income recognition criteria under SOP 03-3 are as follows:

 

     2006    2005
     (in thousands)

Agricultural

   $ 75      —  

Commercial

     570      530

Real estate:

     

1-4 family residences

     322      340

Agricultural

     288      295

Land development

     7      10

Commercial

     4,266      1,378
             

Total real estate

     4,883      2,023
             

Loans to individuals

     1      —  
             

Outstanding balance

   $ 5,529    $ 2,553
             

Carrying amount, net of allowance of $49 and $10

   $ 5,023      2,220

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Changes in accretable yield on the loans purchased after January 1, 2005 that met the level-yield income recognition criteria under SOP 03-3 were as follows:

 

     Accretable Yield  
     2006     2005  
     (in thousands)  

Balance at beginning of year

   $ 758     —    

Additions

     977     793  

Accretion

     (359 )   (56 )

Reclassifications from nonaccretable difference

     188     21  
              

Balance at end of year

   $ 1,564     758  
              

Cash flows expected to be collected at acquisition

   $ 4,477     3,075  

Basis in acquired loans at acquisition

     3,500     2,282  

7.  Premises and Equipment

A summary of premises and equipment as of December 31, 2006 and 2005 was as follows:

 

     2006    2005
     (in thousands)

Land and improvements

   $ 2,410    1,309

Building and improvements

     10,997    10,663

Leasehold improvements

     1,634    1,461

Premises leased under capital leases

     913    —  

Furniture and equipment

     12,184    11,595
           

Total premises and equipment at cost

     28,138    25,028

Less accumulated depreciation and amortization

     15,811    14,213
           

Total

   $ 12,327    10,815
           

Depreciation and amortization expense was $1,598,000, $1,687,000 and $1,687,000 for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004, respectively.

Capital Lease

At December 31, 2006, the Company was obligated under a capital lease for the new bank premises located in Davenport, Iowa. This lease has a term through July 2018 and provides a bargain purchase option on the leased property at the expiration of the lease period. The present value of the related lease payments is recorded in other liabilities. The following is an analysis of leased property under capital leases:

 

     Asset Balances at
December 31,
     2006     2005

Bank building

   $ 913     0

Less: Accumulated amortization

     (10 )   0
            

Total

   $ 903     0
            

 

F-17


Table of Contents

The following summary reflects the future minimum rental payments, by year, required under the capital lease agreement together with the present value of the net minimum lease payments as of December 31, 2006:

 

Year ending December 31,

  

Total

(in thousands)

 

2007

   $ 78  

2008

     78  

2009

     78  

2010

     81  

2011

     84  

2012 and thereafter

     583  
        

Total payments required

     982  

Less: Amount representing interest

     (253 )
        

Present value of net minimum lease payments

   $ 729  
        

8.  Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets

As a result of the acquisition of Cook on September 1, 2005, the Company recorded goodwill of $249,000 and other intangible assets of $404,000.

As a result of the acquisition of KCI on June 30, 2004, the Company recorded goodwill of $179,000 and other intangible assets of $383,000.

The gross carrying amount of intangible assets and the associated accumulated amortization at December 31, 2006 and 2005 is presented in the table below. Amortization expense for intangible assets was $289,000, $305,000, and $308,000 for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004, respectively.

 

    

Gross

Carrying

Amount

  

Accumulated

Amortization

  

Unamortized

Intangible

Assets

     (in thousands)

Other intangible assets:

        

Core deposit premium

   $ 3,281    2,716    565

Customer list intangible

   $ 786    223    563
                

Total

   $ 4,067    2,939    1,128
                

Projections of amortization expense are based on existing asset balances and the remaining useful lives. The following table shows the estimated future amortization expense for amortizing intangible assets for each of the years ended December 31:

 

    

Core

Deposit

Premium

  

Customer

List

Intangible

   Totals
     (in thousands)

2007

   $ 155    97    252

2008

     156    87    243

2009

     127    79    206

2010

     41    71    112

2011

     41    62    103

Thereafter

     45    167    212

 

F-18


Table of Contents

9.  Deposits

The scheduled maturities of certificate of deposit accounts are as follows as of December 31, 2006:

 

     (in thousands)

2007

   $ 268,133

2008

     36,979

2009

     16,224

2010

     2,810

2011

     1,184

Thereafter

     4,069
      

Total

   $ 329,399
      

Time deposits in excess of $100,000 approximated $73,824,000 and $58,471,000 as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively. Interest expense on such deposits for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004 was approximately $2,521,000, $1,486,000, and $1,009,000, respectively.

10.  Federal Home Loan Bank Advances

At December 31, 2006 and 2005, Federal Home Loan Bank (FHLB) advances consisted of the following:

 

     2006   

Weighted-

Average

interest rate

    2005   

Weighted-

Average

interest rate

 
     (in thousands)  

Maturity in year ending:

          

2006

     —      —       14,000    4.34 %

2007

   $ 27,500    4.78 %   11,500    3.81  

2008

     26,600    4.85     24,600    4.71  

2009

     22,700    4.86     14,700    4.57  

2010

     17,000    5.16     13,000    5.08  

2011

     5,000    5.02     5,000    5.02  

Thereafter

     300    5.97     300    5.97  
                

Total

   $ 99,100    4.90     83,100    4.58  
                        

Many of the advances listed above have call provisions which allow the FHLB to request that the advance be paid back or refinanced at the rates then being offered by the FHLB. As of December 31, 2006, the Company had advances from the FHLB with the following call features:

 

     Callable Quarterly
in year 2007

Year of Maturity

   (in thousands)

2008

   $ 2,000

2009

     500

2010

     6,000
      

Total

   $ 8,500
      

Advances from the FHLB are secured by stock in the FHLB. In addition, the Bank has agreed to maintain unencumbered additional security in the form of certain residential mortgage loans, certain commercial real estate loans, certain agricultural real estate loans, and certain investment securities totaling $213,521,000 and $175,127,000 as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

 

F-19


Table of Contents

11.  Notes Payable

The notes payable balance as of December 31, 2006, consists of $1,050,000 in advances on a revolving line of credit and $3,000,000 on a term note, both with Harris N.A. As of December 31, 2005, the notes payable balance consisted of $2,100,000 in advances on the revolving line and $4,000,000 on the term note. Both notes have a variable interest rate at 0.60 percent below the lender’s prime rate. Interest is payable quarterly. As of December 31, 2006, the interest rate on the notes payable was 7.65 percent. During 2006, the interest rate ranged from 6.65 percent to 7.65 percent. During 2005, the interest rate ranged from 4.95 percent to 6.65 percent. As of December 31, 2005, the interest rate on the notes payable was 6.65 percent. The weighted average interest paid on the notes payable for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004 was 7.63%, 5.83%, and 4.23%, respectively.

Both notes are secured by all of the common stock of the subsidiaries. The revolving line of credit has a maximum limit of $9,000,000 and matures April 30, 2007. The term note calls for semi-annual payments of $500,000 until maturity on November 30, 2009.

The Company was in compliance with all covenants of its loan agreement with Harris N.A. as of December 31, 2006.

12.   Long-term Debt

On June 20, 2002, the Company obtained $10,310,000 in long-term subordinated debt from its participation in the issuance of a pooled trust preferred security. The trust preferred has a 30 year maturity, does not require any principal amortization and is callable in five years at par at the issuer’s option. The interest rate is variable based on the three month Libor rate plus 3.65 percent, with interest payable quarterly. During the year 2006, the interest rate ranged from 7.80 percent to 9.16 percent. As of December 31, 2006, the interest rate on the long-term subordinated debt was 9.16 percent. As of December 31, 2005, the interest rate was 7.80 percent. During the year 2005, the interest rate ranged from 5.72 percent to 7.80 percent. The weighted average interest paid on the trust preferred for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004 was 8.99%, 7.26%, and 5.32%, respectively.

 

F-20


Table of Contents

13.  Fair Value of Financial Instruments

The fair value of the Company’s financial instruments as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, were as follows:

 

2006

   Carrying
Value
   Fair
Value
     (in thousands)

Financial assets:

     

Cash and due from banks

   $ 20,279    20,279

Interest-bearing deposits with banks

     447    447

Investment securities

     82,963    82,911

Loans, net

     498,139    493,944

Loan pool participations

     98,885    98,885

Cash surrender value of life insurance

     7,798    7,798

Accrued interest receivable

     6,587    6,587

Financial liabilities:

     

Deposits

   $ 560,615    560,669

Federal funds purchased

     465    465

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     99,100    98,856

Notes payable

     4,050    4,050

Long-term debt

     10,310    10,310

Accrued interest payable

     2,804    2,804

2005

   Carrying
Value
   Fair
Value
     (in thousands)

Financial assets:

     

Cash and due from banks

   $ 13,103    13,103

Interest-bearing deposits with banks

     417    417

Investment securities

     87,492    87,431

Loans, net

     428,426    423,630

Loan pool participations

     103,570    103,570

Cash surrender value of life insurance

     7,523    7,523

Accrued interest receivable

     5,334    5,334

Financial liabilities:

     

Deposits

   $ 505,245    505,745

Federal funds purchased

     7,575    7,575

Federal Home Loan Band advances

     83,100    83,044

Notes payable

     6,100    6,100

Long-term debt

     10,310    10,310

Accrued interest payable

     1,672    1,672

The recorded amount of cash and due from banks, interest-bearing deposits with banks and accrued interest receivable and payable approximates fair value due to the short-term nature of these instruments.

The estimated fair value of investment securities has been determined using available quoted market prices.

Loans have been valued using a present value discounted cash flow with a discount rate approximating the current market rate for similar loans.

The recorded amount of the loan pool participations approximates fair value due to the characteristics of the loan pool participations. Any additional value attained in the loan pool participations over purchase cost is directly attributable to the expertise of the Servicer to collect a higher percentage of the contract value of loans in the pools over the discounted purchase price.

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Deposit liabilities with no stated maturities have an estimated fair value equal to the recorded balance. Deposits with stated maturities have been valued using a present value discounted cash flow with a discount rate approximating the current market rate for similar deposits. The fair value estimate does not include the benefit that results from the low-cost funding provided by the deposit liabilities compared to the cost of borrowing funds in the market. The Company believes the value of these depositor relationships to be significant.

The recorded amount of federal funds purchased approximates fair value due to the short-term nature of these instruments.

The estimated fair value of the Federal Home Loan Bank advances was determined using a present value discounted cash flow with a discount rate approximating the current market rate for similar borrowings.

The recorded amount of the notes payable approximates fair value as a result of the variable nature of these instruments.

The recorded amount of the long-term debt approximates fair value due to the variable nature of this instrument.

14.  Income Taxes

Income tax expense (benefit) for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004, is as follows:

 

2006

   Federal      State      Total  
     (in thousands)  

Current

   $ 2,971      463      3,434  

Deferred

     (309 )    (32 )    (341 )
                      

Total

   $ 2,662      431      3,093  
                      

2005

   Federal      State      Total  
     (in thousands)  

Current

   $ 3,017      446      3,463  

Deferred

     (325 )    (27 )    (352 )
                      

Total

   $ 2,692      419      3,111  
                      

2004

   Federal      State      Total  
     (in thousands)  

Current

   $ 3,160      485      3,645  

Deferred

     (481 )    (86 )    (567 )
                      

Total

   $ 2,679      399      3,078  
                      

Income tax expense differs from the amount computed by applying the United States federal income tax rate of 34 percent in 2006, 2005, and 2004, to income before income tax expense. The reasons for these differences are a follows:

 

       2006     2005     2004  
     (in thousands)  

Provision at statutory rate

   $ 3,242     3,127     3,028  

State franchise tax (net of federal tax benefit)

     285     276     263  

Nontaxable interest income

     (340 )   (267 )   (210 )

Life insurance cash value increase

     (94 )   (113 )   (62 )

Other, net

     —       88     59  
                    

Total

   $ 3,093     3,111     3,078  
                    

 

F-22


Table of Contents

The tax effect of temporary differences that give rise to significant portions of the deferred tax assets and liabilities at December 31, 2006 and 2005, are as follows:

 

     2006     2005  
     (in thousands)  

Deferred tax assets:

    

Allowance for loan losses

   $ 2,957     2,702  

Deferred compensation

     820     828  

Net operating loss

     1,426     1,226  

Unrealized loss on available for sale securities

     277     448  
              

Gross deferred tax assets

     5,480     5,204  
              

Deferred tax liabilities:

    

Depreciation and amortization

     (386 )   (579 )

Federal Home Loan Bank stock

     (109 )   (109 )

Premium amortization

     (727 )   (554 )

Deferred loan fees

     (8 )   (11 )

Purchase accounting adjustments

     (514 )   (595 )

Prepaid expenses

     (92 )   (70 )

Other

     (61 )   (73 )
              

Gross deferred tax liabilities

     (1,897 )   (1,991 )
              

Valuation allowance

     (1,426 )   (1,226 )
              

Net deferred tax asset

   $ 2,157     1,987  
              

The Company has recorded a deferred tax asset for the future tax benefits of Iowa net operating loss carry forwards. The net operating loss carry forwards will expire, if not utilized, between 2007 and 2021. The Company has recorded a valuation allowance to reduce the net operating loss carry forwards. At December 31, 2006 and 2005, the Company believes it is more likely than not that the Iowa net operating loss carry forwards will not be realized. The increase in net operating loss carry forward in 2006 compared with 2005 reflects the additional Iowa income tax net operating loss generated during 2006 less any expiring carry forward. A valuation allowance related to the remaining deferred tax assets has not been provided because management believes it is more likely than not that the results of future operations will generate sufficient taxable income to realize the deferred tax assets.

15.  Stock Incentive Plan

The Company adopted SFAS No. 123(R) “Share-Based Payment,” on January 1, 2006. SFAS No. 123(R) requires that the cost resulting from share-based awards be recognized in the financial statements. The Company is utilizing the “modified prospective” transition method to measure the cost of the awards over the remaining vesting period for those options that had been granted prior to January 1, 2006 and were not fully vested as of that date. The expense is based on the fair value determined at the grant date. Prior to the adoption of SFAS No. 123(R), the Company applied APB Opinion No. 25 and related interpretations in accounting for this plan. Accordingly, no compensation cost was recognized in the financial statements for the share-based payments granted prior to January 1, 2006. Results for periods prior to January 1, 2006 have not been restated.

The Company’s 1998 Stock Incentive Plan reserved up to 550,000 shares of stock for issuance pursuant to options or other awards which may be granted to officers, key employees and certain non-employee directors of the Company. The compensation committee of the Company’s board of directors determines the award of options. The exercise price of each option equals the market price of the Company’s stock on the date of grant. The options’ maximum term is ten years, with vesting occurring at the rate of thirty-three percent on the one-year anniversary of the date of grant, sixty-six percent vesting on the two-year anniversary, and one hundred percent vesting on the three-year anniversary of the date of grant. No awards were granted pursuant to the 1998 plan in

 

F-23


Table of Contents

2006. As of December 31, 2006, the Company had a total of 95,023 shares available for future grants under the 1998 Stock Incentive Plan.

The Company’s 2006 Stock Incentive Plan was approved at the annual meeting of shareholders on April 28, 2006. The 2006 Plan reserves up to 250,000 shares of common stock for issuance pursuant to options and restricted stock units which may be granted to officers and key employees of the Company as determined by the compensation committee of the board of directors. The plan also provides that each non-employee director of the Company be awarded 1,000 stock options as of the date of each annual meeting of shareholders of the Company. The exercise price of each option equals the market price of the Company’s stock on the date of grant. The options’ maximum term is ten years, with vesting occurring at the rate of thirty-three percent on the one-year anniversary of the date of grant, sixty-six percent vesting on the two-year anniversary, and on hundred percent vesting on the three-year anniversary of the date of grant. The plan also provides that 1,000 shares of restricted stock are awarded to existing non-employee directors of the Company upon the adoption of the plan. Any non-employee director subsequently elected to the board will be awarded 1,000 restricted shares of stock upon their initial election to the board of directors. The restricted stock units awarded to non-employee directors will vest thirty-three percent upon the first anniversary of the date of grant, an additional thirty-three percent upon the second anniversary of the date of grant and the remaining thirty-four percent upon the third-anniversary of the date of grant. Each portion of the restricted shares will not, however, be transferable until the third anniversary after such portion vests.

Upon adoption of the 2006 Stock Incentive Plan on April 28, 2006, the eight existing non-employee directors were awarded a total of 8,000 stock options at the exercise price of $19.07, which was the closing stock price on the date of grant. The fair value of each stock option of $2.64 was estimated on the date of the grant using the Black-Scholes model. The expected dividend yield of 3.92 percent was calculated based on the historical annual dividends paid by the Company and the average closing stock price for the sixty month-ends preceding the date of grant. Expected volatility of 16.9 percent was based on historical volatility of the Company’s stock price over the past five years preceding the date of grant. Historical experience was utilized to determine the expected life of the stock options, which is 5.2 years. The risk-free interest rate of 4.90 percent used was the rate on a five year Treasury bond as of the grant date. All inputs into the Black-Scholes model are estimates at the time of grant. Actual results in the future could differ from these estimates, however such results would not impact future reported income. Compensation expense related to the options awarded is based on the fair value of the options and is expensed on a straight-line basis over the three-year vesting period of the options. The following assumptions were used for the grants in 2006, 2005 and 2004:

 

     2006     2005     2004  

Assumptions:

      

Risk-free interest rate

   4.90 %   4.23 %   3.66 %

Expected option life

   5     5     5  

Expected volatility

   16.90 %   20.80 %   25.80 %

Dividend yield

   3.92 %   4.28 %   4.94 %

As of December 31, 2006, the Company had $163,000 of total unrecognized compensation expense related to the unvested stock options. This expense is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 18 months.

During the year 2006 a total of 68,469 options were exercised. The weighted-average exercise price of these options was $12.69 and the intrinsic value totaled $461,000.

 

F-24


Table of Contents

A summary of stock option activity is presented in the following table:

 

     2006    2005    2004
     Shares   

Weighted-

Average

Exercise Price

   Shares   

Weighted-

Average

Exercise Price

   Shares   

Weighted-

Average

Exercise Price

Balance at beginning of year

   571,732    $ 16.56    598,719    $ 15.80    573,453    $ 14.19

Granted

   8,000      19.07    62,523      17.56    106,502      20.30

Exercised

   68,469      12.69    73,405      10.73    77,456      10.03

Forfeited

   9,707      20.41    16,105      19.28    3,780      17.11
                       

Outstanding at end of year

   501,556    $ 17.05    571,732    $ 16.56    598,719    $ 15.80
                       

Options exercisable at year end

   435,828    $ 16.75    440,179    $ 15.79    389,350    $ 14.15

Weighted-average fair value of options granted during the year

      $ 2.64       $ 2.53       $ 3.10

As of December 31, 2006, exercisable stock options had a weighted-average remaining contractual term of 5.42 years, a weighted-average exercise price of $16.75 and an aggregate intrinsic value of $1,446,000.

In accordance with the provisions of the 2006 Stock Incentive Plan, the Company issued 1,000 restricted stock units to each of the non-employee directors of the Company as of the date of the adoption of the plan. A total of 8,000 restricted stock units were issued from shares held in treasury at the current market price of $19.07 per share. The vesting and terms of these restricted stock units are discussed previously in the description of the 2006 Stock Incentive Plan. The total share-based compensation amount related to the issuance of these restricted stock units was $153,000. This amount will be recognized as share-based compensation expense on a straight-line basis over the three years from the date of issuance to coincide with the vesting schedule of these restricted stock units. During 2006, share-based compensation expense of $34,000 related to the restricted stock units was recognized. Unrecognized compensation cost of the restricted stock units was $119,000 as of December 31, 2006 that will be recognized over the remaining twenty-eight months of the vesting period.

The compensation committee of the Company’s board of directors awarded 4,625 shares of restricted stock to officers of the Company as of the close of business December 29, 2006, pursuant to the 2006 Stock Incentive Plan. The award price was $19.94 per share based on the closing market price of the Company’s common stock on that date. The awards will vest ratably over a period of four years. Unrecognized compensation cost related to the 4,625 shares of restricted stock was $92,000 as of December 31, 2006. This amount will be recognized over the forty-eight months of the vesting period.

Information concerning the issuance of restricted stock units and restricted stock is presented in the following table:

 

     2006
     Number   

Weighted-

Average

Grant-Date

Fair Value

Balance at beginning of year

   0    $ —  

Granted

   12,625      19.39

Forfeited

   0      —  
       

Outstanding at end of year

   12,625    $ 19.39
       

The grant of stock options and the award of restricted stock units and restricted stock utilized 20,625 shares in 2006. As of December 31, 2006, the Company had a total of 229,375 shares available for future grants under the 2006 Stock Incentive Plan.

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Total compensation expense recognized under share-based payment arrangements for the year ended December 31, 2006 was $259,000, with a related income tax benefit of $23,000.

The Company has a policy of utilizing treasury stock to satisfy share option exercises and the award of restricted stock units. As of December 31, 2006, the Company held 1,197,418 shares in treasury. The Company periodically repurchases shares on the open market for the treasury.

16.  Employee Benefit Plans

The Company maintains an employee stock ownership plan (“ESOP”) covering substantially all employees meeting minimum age and service requirements. Contributions are determined by the board of directors of each subsidiary. Contributions relating to the plan were $247,000, $318,000, and $237,000 for 2006, 2005, and 2004, respectively. As of December 31, 2006 and 2005 the ESOP owned 484,190 and 513,549 shares of the Company’s common stock, respectively. The reduction in shares owned by the ESOP as of December 31, 2006 compared to December 31, 2005 reflects the distribution of shares to retiring and terminated employees during the year. The Company’s ESOP was leveraged until all debt was repaid on September 28, 2006. As of December 31, 2006, there was no outstanding debt related to the ESOP and there were no shares unallocated to the participants. The release of shares to be allocated to the participants was based on the proportionate reduction in principal paid during the period as a percentage of the principal amount of the debt as of the beginning of each year. As of December 31, 2005, the ESOP had 12,012 unallocated shares with a fair market value of $216,000. The amount of expense recognized on the allocation of shares to the participants was $125,000, $69,000 and 82,000 for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004, respectively.

The Company has a 401(k) plan for its employees whereby the Company matches 50 percent of employee contributions up to a maximum employee contribution of 6 percent of compensation. Contributions relating to the plan were $215,000 in 2006, $193,000 in 2005, and $189,000 in 2004.

The Company has also provided deferred compensation plans to certain executive officers, which provide for a series of payments to be made for a period of 10 or 15 years beginning at age 65. The present value of the future payments is being accrued over the respective employees remaining active service periods. The total expense related to these plans was $226,000, $321,000, and $161,000, for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004, respectively. The total deferred compensation liability was $1,860,000 and $1,670,000 as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

17.  Regulatory Capital Requirements

The Company is subject to various capital requirements administered by the federal banking agencies. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can initiate certain mandatory, and possible additional discretionary, actions by regulators that, if undertaken, could have a direct material effect on the Company’s financial statements. Under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action, the Company must meet specific capital guidelines that involve quantitative measures of the Company’s assets, liabilities and certain off-balance sheet items as calculated under regulatory accounting practices. The Company capital amounts and classifications are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings, and other factors. Quantitative measures established by regulation to ensure capital adequacy require the Company to maintain minimum amounts and ratios (set forth in the following table) of total capital and Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets and of Tier 1 capital to average assets. As of December 31, 2006 and 2005, the Company and its subsidiary bank(s) were well capitalized under the regulatory framework. The Company and its bank subsidiary(s) actual capital amounts and ratios are also presented in the following table.

 

     Actual    

Minimum for Capital

Adequacy Purposes

   

To Be Well Capitalized

Under Prompt Corrective

Action Provisions

 
     Amount    Ratio      Amount      Ratio        Amount        Ratio    
     (in thousands)  

As of December 31, 2006:

               

Total capital (to risk-weighted assets):

               

Consolidated

   $ 66,113    11.3 %   $ 46,975    8.0 %     N/A    N/A  

MidWest One Bank

     62,975    10.8       46,525    8.0     $ 58,157    10.0 %

Tier 1 capital (to risk-weighted assets):

               

Consolidated

   $ 58,765    10.0 %   $ 23,487    4.0 %     N/A    N/A  

MidWest One Bank

     55,697    9.6       23,263    4.0     $ 34,894    6.0 %

Tier 1 capital (to average assets):

               

Consolidated

   $ 58,765    8.2 %   $ 21,404    3.0 %     N/A    N/A  

MidWest One Bank

     55,697    7.9       21,228    3.0     $ 35,381    5.0 %

As of December 31, 2005:

               

Total capital (to risk-weighted assets):

               

Consolidated

   $ 61,197    11.6 %   $ 42,106    8.0 %     N/A    N/A  

MidWest One Bank & Trust

     26,737    10.0       21,324    8.0     $ 26,655    10.0 %

Central Valley Bank

     11,239    11.9       7,567    8.0       9,458    10.0  

Pella State Bank

     6,121    12.7       3,871    8.0       4,838    10.0  

MidWest One Bank

     15,606    13.7       9,117    8.0       11,396    10.0  

Tier 1 capital (to risk-weighted assets):

               

Consolidated

   $ 54,618    10.4 %   $ 21,053    4.0 %     N/A    N/A  

MidWest One Bank & Trust

     23,405    8.8       10,662    4.0     $ 15,993    6.0 %

Central Valley Bank

     10,057    10.6       3,783    4.0       5,675    6.0  

Pella State Bank

     5,516    11.4       1,935    4.0       2,903    6.0  

MidWest One Bank

     14,247    12.5       4,559    4.0       6,838    6.0  

Tier 1 capital (to average assets):

               

Consolidated

   $ 54,618    8.3 %   $ 19,784    3.0 %     N/A    N/A  

MidWest One Bank & Trust

     23,405    8.0       8,764    3.0     $ 14,606    5.0 %

Central Valley Bank

     10,057    8.0       3,770    3.0       6,284    5.0  

Pella State Bank

     5,516    8.6       1,920    3.0       3,201    5.0  

MidWest One Bank

     14,247    8.3       5,135    3.0       8,559    5.0  

18.  Business Segments

The Company has determined that it currently operates in three business segments. The determination of business segments is based on the differences in products and services of the various segments. These segments

 

F-27


Table of Contents

are commercial banking, investment brokerage and insurance brokerage. The commercial banking segment’s products and services consist primarily of taking deposits and making loans to customers. This activity is conducted in a consistent manner in all locations. The investment brokerage activity consists of offering financial planning and consultation services and the retail brokerage of investment securities to clients. Insurance brokerage involves the issuance of property and casualty insurance policies and the processing of claims for clients.

The Company’s wholly-owned subsidiary bank(s), MidWest One Bank & Trust (“MBT”), Central Valley Bank (“CVB”), Pella State Bank (“PSB”) and MidWest One Bank (“MWB”), were previously identified as reportable operating segments in accordance with the provisions of SFAS No. 131, “Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information.” Effective January 1, 2006, the Company’s subsidiary banks were merged into one bank. The information related to commercial banking is now reported as one business segment. Investment brokerage and insurance brokerage segment activity does not meet the quantitative threshold criteria and is included in the “Other” category.

The following table sets forth certain information about the reported profit or loss and assets for each of the Company’s reportable segments.

 

     MWB    Other     Total
     (in thousands)

At or for the year ended December 31, 2006:

       

Total interest income

   $ 46,383    71     46,454

Total interest expense

     19,909    1,300     21,209

Provision for loan losses

     180    —       180

Total noninterest income

     4,270    1,658     5,928

Other intangible asset amortization

     184    105     289

Total other noninterest expense

     17,977    3,193     21,170

Income tax expense (benefit)

     4,116    (1,023 )   3,093

Net income (loss)

     8,287    (1,846 )   6,441

Goodwill

     12,976    429     13,405

Total assets

     737,936    6,975     744,911

At or for the year ended December 31, 2005:

       

Total interest income

   $ 39,028    1,052     40,080

Total interest expense

     14,094    1,332     15,426

Provision for loan losses

     368    100     468

Total noninterest income

     3,263    1,165     4,428

Other intangible asset amortization

     219    86     305

Total other noninterest expense

     15,604    3,506     19,110

Income tax expense (benefit)

     4,065    (954 )   3,111

Net income (loss)

     7,941    (1,853 )   6,088

Goodwill

     12,976    429     13,405

Total assets

     667,855    8,477     676,332

At or for the year ended December 31, 2004:

       

Total interest income

   $ 36,722    650     37,372

Total interest expense

     12,394    976     13,370

Provision for loan losses

     852    6     858

Total noninterest income

     3,836    440     4,276

Other intangible asset amortization

     276    32     308

Total other noninterest expense

     15,568    2,637     18,205

Income tax expense (benefit)

     3,949    (871 )   3,078

Net income (loss)

     7,519    (1,690 )   5,829

 

F-28


Table of Contents

19.  Dividend Restrictions

The Company derives a substantial portion of its cash flow, including that available for dividend payments to shareholders, from the Bank in the form of dividends received. The Bank is subject to certain statutory and regulatory restrictions that affect dividend payments. Based on minimum regulating guidelines as published by those regulators, the maximum dividends which could be paid by the Bank to the Company at December 31, 2006, without prior regulatory approval, approximated $8,577,000.

Under the terms of the Company’s notes payable, the Company is not allowed to pay dividends to its shareholders if it is in default (as defined by the loan agreement) or an event of default exists. The Company was not in default and no events of default existed as of December 31, 2006.

20.  Commitments and Contingencies

The Company is a party to financial instruments with off-balance-sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of its customers, which include commitments to extend credit. The Company’s exposure to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the other party to the commitments to extend credit is represented by the contractual amount of those instruments. The Company uses the same credit policies in making commitments as it does for on-balance-sheet instruments.

Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any conditions established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require payment of a fee. Since many of the commitments are expected to expire without being drawn upon, the total commitment amounts do not necessarily represent future cash requirements. The Company evaluates each customer’s creditworthiness on a case-by-case basis. As of December 31, 2006 and 2005, outstanding commitments to extend credit totaled approximately $90,290,000 and $79,755,000, respectively.

The Company had commitments to sell mortgage loans on the secondary market totaling $580,000 and $433,000 as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

Commitments under standby letters of credit outstanding aggregated $2,495,000 and $3,750,000 as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, respectively. The Company does not anticipate any losses as a result of these transactions.

Certain facilities are leased under operating leases. Rental expense was $115,000, $116,000, and $88,000 for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Future minimum rental commitments under noncancelable leases are as follows as of December 31, 2006:

 

Year ending December 31,

   (in thousands)

2007

   $ 104

2008

     104

2009

     105

2010

     82

2011

     29

Thereafter

     78
      

Total

   $ 502
      

The Company is involved in various legal actions and proceedings arising from the normal course of operations. Management believes, based upon known facts and the advice of legal counsel, that the ultimate liability, if any, not covered by insurance, arising from all legal actions and proceedings will not have a material adverse effect upon the consolidated financial position of the Company.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

21.  MidWest One Financial Group (Parent Company Only)

Balance Sheets

 

     December 31  
     2006     2005  
     (in thousands)  

Assets:

    

Cash on deposit at bank subsidiary

   $ 1,786     924  

Cash at other institutions

     56     109  
              

Cash and cash equivalents

     1,842     1,033  

Investment equity securities

     761     772  

Loans

     —       168  

Investments in:

    

Bank subsidiaries

     68,710     66,132  

Bank-related subsidiaries

     1,927     1,860  

Premises and equipment

     774     1,854  

Cash surrender value of life insurance

     3,399     3,701  

Other assets

     445     439  
              

Total assets

   $ 77,858     75,959  
              

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity:

    

Notes payable

   $ 4,050     6,100  

Long-term debt

     10,310     10,310  

Accrued expenses payable and other liabilities

     965     1,163  
              

Total liabilities

     15,325     17,573  
              

Shareholders’ equity:

    

Common stock

     24,564     24,564  

Capital surplus

     13,076     12,886  

Treasury stock at cost

     (17,099 )   (16,951 )

Retained earnings

     42,447     38,630  

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

     (455 )   (743 )
              

Total shareholders’ equity

     62,533     58,386  
              

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

   $ 77,858     75,959  
              

 

F-30


Table of Contents

Statements of Income

 

     Year ended December 31  
     2006     2005     2004  
     (in thousands)  

Income:

      

Dividends from subsidiaries

   $ 6,000     6,200     5,700  

Interest income and discount on loan pool participations

     —       996     590  

Management, audit, and loan review fees

     285     2,077     1,868  

Other operating income

     297     570     345  
                    

Total income

     6,582     9,843     8,503  
                    

Expense:

      

Salaries and benefits expense

     1,315     2,515     2,309  

Interest on notes payable

     373     583     428  

Interest on long-term debt

     927     748     548  

Other operating expense

     960     2,274     1,935  
                    

Total expense

     3,575     6,120     5,220  
                    

Income before income tax benefit and equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiaries

     3,007     3,723     3,283  

Income tax benefit

     (1,066 )   (842 )   (822 )
                    

Income before equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiaries

     4,073     4,565     4,105  

Equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiaries

     2,368     1,523     1,724  
                    

Net income

   $ 6,441     6,088     5,829  
                    

 

F-31


Table of Contents

Statements of Cash Flows

 

     Year ended December 31  
     2006     2005     2004  
     (in thousands)  

Cash flows from operating activities:

      

Net income

   $ 6,441     6,088     5,829  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

      

Equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiaries

     (2,368 )   (1,523 )   (1,724 )

Depreciation and amortization

     134     715     706  

Investment securities gains

     (1 )   (83 )   (2 )

Stock-based compensation

     259     —       —    

Excess tax benefits related to stock options

     (88 )   —       —    

Decrease (increase) in other assets

     296     (165 )   (2,069 )

(Decrease) increase in other liabilities

     (196 )   336     196  
                    

Total adjustments

     (1,964 )   (720 )   (2,893 )
                    

Net cash provided by operating activities

     4,477     5,368     2,936  
                    

Cash flows from investing activities:

      

Proceeds from investment securities sales

     8     123     17  

Proceeds from investment securities maturities

     —       —       65  

Net decrease in loans

     168     138     129  

Purchases of loan pool participations

     —       —       (646 )

Principal recovery on sales of loan pool participations

     —       2,115     142  

Principal recovery on loan pool participations

     —       1,308     2,403  

Purchases of bank premises and equipment

     (4 )   (123 )   (954 )

Proceeds from sale of bank premises and equipment

     950     —       —    

Cash paid for the purchase of KCI

     —       —       (450 )

Cash paid for the purchase of Cook

     —       (830 )   —    

Advances for bank-related subsidiary equity

     —       (380 )   (236 )

Repayment of bank-related subsidiary equity

     13     135     108  
                    

Net cash provided by investing activities

     1,135     2,486     578  
                    

Cash flows from financing activities:

      

Advances on notes payable

     450     2,600     2,200  

Principal payments on notes payable

     (2,500 )   (6,200 )   (1,500 )

Excess tax benefits related to stock options

     88     —       —    

Dividends paid

     (2,624 )   (2,543 )   (2,576 )

Purchases of treasury stock

     (1,298 )   (2,374 )   (2,144 )

Proceeds from stock options exercised

     956     842     876  

ESOP shares allocated

     125     69     82  
                    

Net cash used in financing activities

     (4,803 )   (7,606 )   (3,062 )
                    

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

     809     248     452  

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     1,033     785     333  
                    

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

   $ 1,842     1,033     785  
                    

Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information:

      

Acquisitions:

      

Treasury stock reissued for the purchase of KCI

   $ —       —       115  
                    

Treasury stock reissued for the purchase of Cook

   $ —       82     —    
                    

 

F-32


Table of Contents

22.  Quarterly Results of Operations

 

     Quarter Ended
     December    September    June    March
     (in thousands, except per share amounts)

2006:

           

Interest income

   $ 12,036      11,926      11,214      11,278

Interest expense

     6,075      5,630      5,016      4,488
                           

Net interest income

     5,961      6,296      6,198      6,790

Provision for loan losses

     90      90      —        —  

Noninterest income

     1,561      1,326      1,602      1,439

Noninterest expense

     5,420      5,390      5,315      5,334
                           

Income before income taxes

     2,012      2,142      2,485      2,895

Income taxes

     591      696      830      976
                           

Net income

   $ 1,421      1,446      1,655      1,919
                           

Net income per share—basic

   $ 0.39    $ 0.40    $ 0.44    $ 0.52

Net income per share—diluted

   $ 0.38    $ 0.38    $ 0.44    $ 0.51

2005:

           

Interest income

     10,630      9,692      9,990    $ 9,768

Interest expense

     4,378      3,954      3,615      3,479
                           

Net interest income

     6,252      5,738      6,375      6,289

Provision for loan losses

     93      76      108      191

Noninterest income

     1,187      1,156      1,091      994

Noninterest expense

     4,869      5,047      5,049      4,450
                           

Income before income taxes

     2,477      1,771      2,309      2,642

Income taxes

     831      590      778      912
                           

Net income

     1,646      1,181      1,531    $ 1,730
                           

Net income per share—basic

   $ 0.45    $ 0.31    $ 0.41    $ 0.46

Net income per share—diluted

   $ 0.43    $ 0.31    $ 0.40    $ 0.45

 

F-33


Table of Contents

The Board of Directors

MidWest One Financial Group, Inc.:

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in shareholders’ equity and comprehensive income, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2006. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2006, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

As discussed in Notes 1 and 15 to the consolidated financial statements, effective January 1, 2006, the Company changed its method of accounting for stock-based compensation.

LOGO

KPMG LLP

Des Moines, Iowa

March 23, 2007

 

F-34

Exhibit 10.1

MIDWESTONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.

EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN AND TRUST

(Restated as of January 1, 2006)


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

ARTICLE I

  

NAME AND PURPOSE OF PLAN

   1

ARTICLE II

  

STATEMENT OF TRUST

   2

ARTICLE III

  

DEFINITIONS

   2

ARTICLE IV

  

EMPLOYEE PARTICIPANTS

   11

4.1   ELIGIBILITY

   11

4.2   YEAR OF SERVICE - PARTICIPATION

   11

4.3   PARTICIPATION UPON RE-EMPLOYMENT

   11

ARTICLE V

  

COMPANY CONTRIBUTIONS

   12

Part 1. Amount of Company Contributions and Plan Allocations: Sections 5.1 through 5.6

   12

5.1   COMPANY CONTRIBUTIONS

   12

a. Amount

   12

b. Form of Contribution

   12

c. Time of Payment of Contribution

   12

d. Return of Contribution

   12

5.2   PARTICIPANT CONTRIBUTIONS

   13

5.3   PARTICIPANT ROLLOVER CONTRIBUTIONS

   13

5.4   CONTRIBUTION ALLOCATION

   13

5.5   FORFEITURE ALLOCATION

   13

5.6   ALLOCATION CONDITIONS

   13

a. Hours of Service Requirement

   13

b. Employment Requirement

   14

c. Suspension of Allocation Requirements

   14

Part 2. Limitations on Allocations: Sections 5.7 through 5.10

   15

5.7   LIMITATIONS ON ALLOCATIONS TO PARTICIPANTS’ ACCOUNTS

   15

a. Estimation of Compensation

   15

b. More Than One Plan

   15

c. Disposition of Excess Amount

   16

 

i


d. Defined Benefit Plan Limitation

   16

5.8   DEFINITIONS - ARTICLE V

   17

ARTICLE VI

   18

SEPARATION FROM SERVICE - PARTICIPANT VESTING

  

6.1   NORMAL RETIREMENT AGE

   18

6.2   VESTING SCHEDULE

   19

a. Vesting in Account-Generally

   19

b. Vesting in Account in Top Heavy Years

   20

c. Special Vesting Schedule

   20

6.3   CASH-OUT DISTRIBUTIONS TO PARTIALLY-VESTED PARTICIPANTS/RESTORATION OF FORFEITED ACCOUNT BALANCE

   20

a. Restoration and Conditions Upon Restoration

   21

b. Time and Method of Restoration

   21

c. 0 Percent Vested Participant

   22

6.4   ACCOUNTING FOR REPAID AMOUNT

   22

6.5   YEAR OF SERVICE - VESTING

   22

6.6   BREAK IN SERVICE - VESTING

   22

6.7   INCLUDED YEARS OF SERVICE - VESTING

   23

6.8   FORFEITURE OCCURS

   23

6.9   AMENDMENT TO VESTING SCHEDULE

   24

6.10 PUT OPTIONS ON DISTRIBUTED COMPANY STOCK

   24

ARTICLE VII

   25

TIME AND METHOD OF PAYMENT OF BENEFITS

  

7.1   PAYMENT OF ACCOUNT BALANCE

   25

7.2   DISTRIBUTION UPON SEPARATION FROM SERVICE FOR ANY REASON OTHER THAN DEATH

   25

a. Participant’s Vested Account Balance Not Exceeding $1,000

   25

b. Participant’s Vested Account Balance Exceeds $1,000

   25

c. Disability

   26

d. Benefit Notice

   26

e. Consent Requirement

   26

f. Determination of Vested Account Balance

   26

g. Consent to Cash-Out/Forfeiture

   26

h. Return to Employment

   27

7.3   DISTRIBUTION UPON DEATH OF THE PARTICIPANT

   27

7.4   METHOD OF DISTRIBUTION OF VESTED ACCOUNT BALANCE

   27

a. Distributions of Company Stock

   27

b. Election to Receive Company Stock

   27

 

ii


7.5   DEFERRED DISTRIBUTIONS

   27

7.6   REQUIRED BEGINNING DATE

   28

7.7   MINIMUM DISTRIBUTION REQUIREMENTS

   28

7.8   ANNUITY DISTRIBUTIONS TO PARTICIPANTS AND SURVIVING SPOUSES

   28

7.9   SPECIAL DISTRIBUTION AND PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS

   28

7.10 DIRECT ROLLOVER OF ELIGIBLE ROLLOVER DISTRIBUTIONS

   29

a. Participant Election

   29

b. Rollover and Withholding Notice

   29

c. Default Rollover

   30

d. Definitions

   30

(1) Eligible Rollover Distribution

   30

(2) Eligible Retirement Plan

   30

(3) Distributee

   31

(4) Direct Rollover

   31

(5) Mandatory Distribution

   31

7.11 DISTRIBUTIONS UNDER DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDERS

   31

7.12 DISTRIBUTION BEFORE SEPARATION FROM SERVICE AFTER ATTAINING AGE 62

   32

ARTICLE VIII

  

COMPANY ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS

   32

8.1 INFORMATION TO COMMITTEE

   32

8.2 NO LIABILITY

   33

8.3 INDEMNITY OF COMMITTEE

   33

ARTICLE IX

  

PARTICIPANT ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS

   33

9.1   BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION

   33

9.2   NO BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION

   33

9.3   PERSONAL DATA TO COMMITTEE

   34

9.4   ADDRESS FOR NOTIFICATION

   34

9.5   ASSIGNMENT OR ALIENATION

   34

9.6   NOTICE OF CHANGE IN TERMS

   34

9.7   LITIGATION AGAINST THE TRUST

   35

9.8   INFORMATION AVAILABLE

   35

9.9   APPEAL PROCEDURE FOR DENIAL OF BENEFITS

   35

9.10 PARTICIPANT DIRECTION OF INVESTMENT

   36

ARTICLE X

  

THE COMMITTEE

   37

10.1 GENERAL

   37

 

iii


10.2   COMPENSATION AND EXPENSES

   37

10.3   POWERS

   37

10.4   AVAILABILITY OF PLAN DOCUMENTS

   39

10.5   LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

   39

10.6   FUNDING POLICY

   39

10.7   MANNER OF ACTION

   39

10.8   AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

   39

10.9   INTERESTED MEMBER

   40

10.10 INDIVIDUAL ACCOUNTS

   40

10.11 VALUE OF PARTICIPANT'S ACCOUNT BALANCE

   40

10.12 ALLOCATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF NET INCOME AND GAIN OR LOSS TO PARTICIPANTS’ ACCOUNTS

   40

a. Company Stock Account

   40

b. General Investments Account

   41

c. Dividends on Company Stock

   41

d. Segregated Investment Accounts

e. Additional Rules

   42
   42

f. Allocation Restriction

   42

10.13 INDIVIDUAL STATEMENT

   43

10.14 ACCOUNT CHARGED

   43

10.15 LOST PARTICIPANTS

   43

a. Attempt to Locate

   43

b. Failure to Locate

   43

c. Nonexclusivity and Uniformity

   43

10.16 PLAN CORRECTION

   44

10.17 NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR OTHERS

   44

ARTICLE XI

  

TRUSTEE POWERS AND DUTIES

   44

11.1   ACCEPTANCE

   44

11.2   RECEIPT OF CONTRIBUTIONS

   44

11.3   TRUSTEE’S INVESTMENT

   45

11.4   RECORDS AND STATEMENTS

   51

11.5   FEES AND EXPENSES FROM FUND

   51

11.6   PARTIES TO LITIGATION

   51

11.7   PROFESSIONAL AGENTS

   51

11.8   DISTRIBUTION OF TRUST FUND

   51

11.9   DISTRIBUTION DIRECTIONS

   51

11.10 THIRD PARTY

   52

11.11 RESIGNATION

   52

11.12 REMOVAL

   52

11.13 INTERIM DUTIES AND SUCCESSOR TRUSTEE

   52

11.14 VALUATION OF TRUST

   52

 

iv


11.15 LIMITATION ON LIABILITY - IF INVESTMENT MANAGER APPOINTED

   52

11.16 PARTICIPANT VOTING RIGHTS - Company Stock

   53

a. Tenders For Company Stock

   53

b. Voting Company Stock; Options and Other Rights

   56

(a) Company Stock in Accounts

   57

(b) Company Stock in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account and other Unallocated Company Stock

   57

11.17 COMMITTEE DIRECTIONS

   60

11.18 PROTECTION OF THE TRUSTEE

   61

ARTICLE XII

  

TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS

   61

12.1 DETERMINATION OF TOP HEAVY STATUS

   61

12.2 DEFINITIONS

   62

12.3 TOP HEAVY MINIMUM ALLOCATION

   63

12.4 DETERMINING TOP-HEAVY CONTRIBUTION RATES

   64

12.5 SATISFACTION OF TOP-HEAVY MINIMUM

   64

ARTICLE 13

  

EXCLUSIVE BENEFIT, AMENDMENT, TERMINATION

   65

13.1 EXCLUSIVE BENEFIT

   65

13.2 AMENDMENT BY COMPANY

   65

13.3 DISCONTINUANCE

   66

13.4 FULL VESTING ON TERMINATION

   66

13.5 MERGER/DIRECT TRANSFER

   66

13.6 TERMINATION

   67

ARTICLE XIV

  

MISCELLANEOUS

   68

14.1 EVIDENCE

14.2 NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPANY ACTION

   68
   68

14.3 FIDUCIARIES NOT INSURERS

   68

14.4 WAIVER OF NOTICE

   68

14.5 SUCCESSORS

   69

14.6 STATE LAW

   69

14.7 EMPLOYMENT NOT GUARANTEED

   69

 

v


MIDWESTONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.

EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN AND TRUST

MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc., an Iowa corporation with its principal place of business in Oskaloosa, Iowa (the “Company”), and MidWestOne Bank, N.A., an Iowa corporation with its principal place of business in Oskaloosa, Iowa, as trustee (the “Trustee”).

WITNESSETH:

MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. continues, with this Agreement, a Plan and Trust for the administration and distribution of contributions made by the Company for the purpose of providing retirement benefits for eligible Employees. This Plan is an amended Plan, in restated form, the original Plan being established on December 31, 1985. The provisions of this Plan, as amended and restated, apply solely to an Employee whose employment with the Company terminates on or after the restated Effective Date of the Plan. If an Employee’s employment with the Company terminates prior to the restated Effective Date, that Employee is entitled to benefits under the Plan and Trust as the Plan and Trust existed on the date of the Employee’s termination of employment.

Now, therefore, in consideration of their mutual covenants, the Company and the Trustee agree as follows:

ARTICLE I

NAME AND PURPOSE OF PLAN

This Plan shall be known as the MIDWESTONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC. EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN AND TRUST.

This Plan is established by the Company, as an employee stock ownership plan within the meaning of Code § 4975(e), to create a uniform retirement program covering all eligible Employees of the Company. The intent of this Plan is to help each Participant build an estate to provide financial security for the Participant and his or her family when his or her working career ends. Because the value of each Account depends on the overall prosperity of the Company, this Plan should give each Participant an incentive to increase Company profits and make his or her career more rewarding. The Plan is designed to invest primarily in Company securities.

This Plan provides benefits which are in addition to any benefits under any other retirement plans of the Company which are currently in effect.

This Plan is administered by a Committee on an annual basis ending each December 31. All Company contributions are paid to the Trustee and, together with all income received, are held by the Trustee in the Trust and administered for the exclusive benefit of Participants and their Beneficiaries, pursuant to the Plan and the Trust.

 

1


ARTICLE II

STATEMENT OF TRUST

All funds and property contributed to the Trustee hereunder shall be held and administered by the Trustee, in trust, in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement. The Plan and Trust are intended to meet the requirements of Code § 401 (a) and ERISA and are designed to invest primarily in Company Stock.

The Trustee hereby agrees that it will hold the Trust Fund, all moneys or property contributed, transferred or assigned to it as Trustee and all earnings and enhancement in value of the Trust Fund for the uses and purposes, and subject to the terms and conditions, of the Plan and the Trust.

ARTICLE III

DEFINITIONS

In this Agreement, unless the context clearly implies otherwise, the singular includes the plural, the masculine includes the feminine, and the capitalized words and phrases shall have the following meanings:

3.1 “Account(s)” means an individual account maintained to record a Participant’s interest in the Trust Fund attributable to the Company’s contributions, Forfeitures and gains or losses, if any, under this Plan.

3.2 “Account Balance” means the Participant’s Plan Benefit.

3.3 “Accounting Date” means the last day of the Plan Year. Unless otherwise specified in the Plan, the Plan Administrator will make all Plan allocations for a particular Plan Year as of the Accounting Date of that Plan Year.

3.4 “Beneficiary” (or “Beneficiaries”) means a person designated by a Participant who is or may become entitled to a benefit under the Plan upon a Participant’s death. A Beneficiary who becomes entitled to a benefit under this Plan remains a Beneficiary under this Plan until the Trustee has fully distributed his or her benefit to him or her. The Beneficiary’s right to (and the Plan Administrator’s or the Committee’s duty to provide to the Beneficiary) information or data concerning the Plan does not arise until he or she first becomes entitled to receive a benefit under this Plan.

3.5 “Break in Service or One Year Break in Service” means a Plan Year in which an Employee does not complete more than 500 Hours of Service with the Company.

3.6 “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

 

2


3.7 “Committee” means the committee appointed pursuant to the provisions of the Plan by the Board of Directors of the Company to administer the Plan and give instructions to the Trustee.

3.8 “Company” means MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. (f/k/a Mahaska Investment Company), any corporation adopting the Plan pursuant to the provisions of this Section 3.8 (the “Adopting Corporation”) and any corporation which succeeds to all or part of the business of MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. or of an Adopting Corporation by merger, consolidation, transfer of stock or transfer of assets or by any other method, if such corporation agrees in writing to adopt the Plan and be bound by and subject to the provisions of this Agreement.

Any corporation which together with the Company is a member of a controlled group of corporations within the meaning of Code § 1563(a) determined without regard to Code §§1563(a)(4) and (e)(3)(c), with the consent of MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc., may adopt the Plan by written resolution of its Board of Directors. From and after the effective date of such resolution, such corporation shall for all purposes hereunder be included within the meaning of the word “Company.” Only MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. shall be deemed to be the “Company,” however, for purposes of appointing the Committee, replacing the Trustee and amending, restating, merging or terminating this Plan.

3.9 “Company Stock” means securities issued by the Company, or by a corporation which is a member of the same controlled group of corporations, which satisfy the definition of “qualifying employer securities” in Code §4975(e)(8).

3.10 “Compensation” means a Participant’s W-2 wages for federal income tax withholding purposes, as defined under Code § 3401(a), plus all other payments to an Employee in the course of the Company’s trade or business, for which the Company must furnish the Employee a written statement under Code §§6041, 6051 and 6052, disregarding any rules limiting the remuneration included as wages under this definition based on the nature or location of the employment or service performed.

The following paragraphs a., b., c. and d. apply to the definition of Compensation:

a. Elective Contributions. “Elective Contributions” are amounts excludible from the Employee’s gross income under Code §§ 125, 132(f)(4), 402(e)(3), 402(h)(2), 403(b), 408(p) or 457, and contributed by the Company, at the Employee’s election, to a cafeteria plan, a qualified transportation fringe benefit plan, a 401(k) arrangement, a SARSEP, a tax-sheltered annuity, a SIMPLE plan or a Code § 457 plan.

b. Compensation Dollar Limitation. For any Plan Year beginning prior to January 1, 2002, the Plan Administrator cannot take into account more than $150,000 (or such larger or smaller amount as the Commissioner of Internal Revenue may prescribe) of any Participant’s Compensation. For any Plan Year beginning after December 31, 2001, the Plan Administrator cannot take into account more than $200,000 (as adjusted for cost of living increases in accordance with Code § 401(a)(17)(B)) of any Participant’s Compensation.

 

3


c. Nondiscrimination. For purposes of determining whether the Plan discriminates in favor of Highly Compensated Employees, Compensation means Compensation as defined in this Section 3.9, except the Company annually may elect operationally to include or to exclude Elective Contributions. In applying the immediately preceding sentence, the Company must be consistent and uniform with respect to all Employees and all plans of the Company for any particular Plan Year. The Company may elect to exclude from this nondiscrimination definition of Compensation any items of Compensation excludible under Code §414(s) and the applicable Treasury regulations, provided such adjusted definition conforms to the nondiscrimination requirements of those regulations.

d. Other Rules. Any reference in this Plan to Compensation is a reference to the definition in this Section 3.10, unless the Plan reference specifies a modification to this definition. The Plan Administrator will take into account only Compensation actually paid for the relevant period. The term “Compensation” does not include (1) Company contributions to a plan of deferred compensation to the extent the contributions are not included in the gross income of the Employee for the taxable year in which contributed, on behalf of an Employee to a Simplified Employee Pension Plan to the extent such contributions are excludible from the Employee’s gross income, and any distributions from a plan of deferred compensation, regardless of whether such amounts are includible in the gross income of the Employee when distributed; (2) amounts realized from the exercise of a non-qualified stock option, or when restricted stock (or property) held by an Employee either becomes freely transferable or is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; (3) amounts realized from the sale, exchange or other disposition of stock acquired under a qualified stock option; (4) other amounts which receive special tax benefits, such as premiums for group term life insurance (but only to the extent that the premiums are not includible in the gross income of the Employee); or (5) reimbursements or other expense allowances, fringe benefits (cash and noncash), moving expenses, deferred compensation, and welfare benefits. However, Compensation includes Elective Contributions made by the Company on the Employee’s behalf. A Compensation payment includes Compensation paid by the Company to an Employee through another person under the common paymaster provisions of Code §§3121(s) and 3306(p).

3.11 “Disability” means the Participant, because of a physical or mental disability, will be unable to perform the duties of his or her customary position of employment (or is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity) for an indefinite period which the Plan Administrator considers will be of long continued duration. A Participant also is disabled if he or she incurs the permanent loss or loss of use of a member or function of the body, or is permanently disfigured, and incurs a Separation from Service. The Plan considers a Participant disabled on the date the Plan Administrator determines the Participant satisfies the definition of disability. The Plan

 

4


Administrator may require a Participant to submit to a physical examination in order to confirm the disability. The Plan Administrator will apply the provisions of this Section 3.11 in a nondiscriminatory, consistent and uniform manner.

3.12 “Disqualified Person” has the same meaning ascribed to that term under Code § 4975(e)(2).

3.13 “Effective Date” of this Plan, as restated during the 2006 Plan Year, is generally January 1, 2006, except for the retroactive effective dates required by the Uruguay Round Agreements Act, the Uniformed Services Employment and Re-employment Rights Act of 1994, the Small Business Job Protection Act of 1996, the Taxpayer Relief Act of 1997 and the Internal Revenue Service Restructuring and Reform Act of 1998 or any final Treasury regulations published and effective since the most recent effective date of this Plan, and except as otherwise stated in this Plan. Further, to the extent the Plan was operated according to an effective date earlier than is required by law, then such date shall be the Effective Date.

3.14 “Employee” means any individual employed by the Company. The term “Employee” shall include any such individual so employed who is on a leave of absence granted by the Company. Employee shall not include individuals who are nonresident aliens (unless such individuals are permitted to participate per a resolution of the Board of Directors of the corporation by which they are employed) who received no earned income from the Company which constitutes income from sources within the United States.

3.15 “ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time.

3.16 “Exempt Loan” means a loan made to this Plan by a Disqualified Person, or a loan to this Plan which a Disqualified Person guarantees, provided the loan satisfies the requirements of Treas. Reg. § 54.4975-7(b).

3.17 “Fair Market Value” means, in the case of shares of Company Stock that are not readily tradable on an established securities market and which are otherwise subject to the appraisal requirement of Code § 401(a)(28)(C), the valuation determined by an independent appraiser meeting requirements similar to those prescribed by Treasury regulations under Code § 170(a)(1) selected by the Committee. In all other cases, the term shall mean the value determined in good faith by the Committee based upon reported sales or quotations. If no sale or sales of such on a recognized exchange were reported on the relevant date, or if, in the Committee’s opinion, the quotation or last report of sale, if any, does not reflect Fair Market Value, then the Committee shall in good faith determine such Fair Market Value on the basis of such evidence, data and all other relevant factors or information, including by appraisal, as shall be pertinent, reliable and equitable, and its judgment with respect thereto shall be conclusive upon all persons. If the stock is traded on the over-the-counter market, the Committee shall determine the Fair Market Value of the Company Stock based on the closing price for the Accounting Date or such other date of valuation under the Plan. In the

 

5


case of a transaction between the Plan and a Disqualified Person (as defined in Internal Revenue Code Regulations), Fair Market Value must be determined as of the date of the transaction. For all other purposes, Fair Market Value must be determined as of the most recent valuation date under the Plan.

3.18 “Forfeitures” means any portion of an Account of a Participant which is not vested upon termination of employment. Forfeitures shall be allocated as provided in Section 5.5 on the Accounting Date next following the date on which the Participant incurs a Break in Service.

3.19 “Highly Compensated Employee” means an Employee:

a. who, during the Plan Year or during the preceding Plan Year, is a 5 percent or more owner of the Company (applying the constructive ownership rules of Code § 318, and applying the principles of Code § 318 for an unincorporated entity); or

b. who, during the preceding Plan Year, had Compensation from the Company in excess of $80,000 (as adjusted by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue for the relevant year pursuant to Code § 415(d)).

For purposes of this Section 3.19, “Compensation” means Compensation as defined in Section 3.10, except Compensation specifically excludes Elective Contributions. The Plan Administrator must make the determination of who is a Highly Compensated Employee consistent with Code § 414(q) and the Treasury regulations issued under that Code section. For purposes of this Section 3.19, the term “preceding Plan Year” means the 12-consecutive month period immediately preceding the current Plan Year.

3.20 “Hour of Service” means:

a. each Hour of Service for which the Company, either directly or indirectly, pays an Employee, or for which the Employee is entitled to payment, for the performance of duties. The Plan Administrator credits Hours of Service under this paragraph a. to the Employee for the computation period in which the Employee performs the duties, irrespective of when paid;

b. each Hour of Service for back pay, irrespective of mitigation of damages, to which the Company has agreed or for which the Employee has received an award. The Plan Administrator credits Hours of Service under this paragraph (b) to the Employee for the computation period(s) to which the award or the agreement pertains rather than the computation period in which the award, agreement or payment is made, subject to the provisions of Regulation 29 CFR Sec. 2530.200b-2, which the Plan, by this reference, specifically incorporates in full within this paragraph b; and

 

6


c. each Hour of Service for which the Company, either directly or indirectly, pays an Employee, or for which the Employee is entitled to payment (irrespective of whether the employment relationship is terminated), for reasons other than for the performance of duties during a computation period, such as leave of absence, vacation, holiday, sick leave, illness, incapacity (including disability), lay off, jury duty or military duty. The Plan Administrator will credit no more than five hundred one (501) Hours of Service under this paragraph c. to an Employee on account of any single continuous period during which the Employee does not perform any duties (whether or not such period occurs during a single computation period. The Plan Administrator credits Hours of Service under this paragraph c. in accordance with the rules of paragraphs b. and c. of Labor Reg. § 2530.200b-2, which the Plan, by this reference, specifically incorporates in full within this paragraph c.

The Plan Administrator will not credit an Hour of Service under more than one (1) of the above paragraphs. A computation period for purposes of this Section 3.20 is the Plan Year, Year of Service period, Break in Service period or other period, as determined under the Plan provision for which the Plan Administrator is measuring an Employee’s Hours of Service. Further, the Company may round up Hours of Service at the end of a Plan Year or more frequently. If any questions shall arise as to determining an Hour of Service, the Plan Administrator shall make a determination by using any Department of Labor regulations that are then in effect. The Plan Administrator will resolve any ambiguity with respect to the crediting of an Hour of Service in favor of the Employee.

(1) Method of Crediting Hours of Service. The Company will credit an Employee with Hours of Service on the basis of the “actual” method. For purposes of this Plan, “actual” method means the determination of Hours of Service from records of hours worked and hours for which the Company makes payment or for which payment is due from the Company. Alternatively, Hours of Service for salaried Employees shall be computed on the basis of days of employment; and each salaried Employee shall be credited with 10 hours of service for each day for which the salaried Employee would be required to be credited with at least one Hour Of Service under the method used for computing Hours Of Service for hourly-paid Employees.

(2) Maternity/Paternity Leave; Family and Medical Leave Act. Solely for purposes of determining whether the Employee incurs a Break in Service under any provision of this Plan, the Plan Administrator will credit Hours of Service during an Employee’s unpaid absence period due to maternity or paternity leave. The Committee considers an Employee on maternity or paternity leave if the Employee’s absence is due to the Employee’s pregnancy, the birth of the Employee’s child, the placement with the Employee of an adopted child, or the care of the Employee’s child immediately following the child’s birth or placement. The Plan Administrator credits Hours of Service under this paragraph on the basis of the number of Hours of Service the Employee would receive if he or she were paid during the absence period or, if

 

7


the Plan Administrator cannot determine the number of Hours of Service the Employee would receive, on the basis of eight (8) hours per day during the absence period. The Plan Administrator will credit only the number of Hours of Service (up to 501 Hours of Service) necessary to prevent an Employee’s Break in Service. The Plan Administrator credits all Hours of Service described in this paragraph to the computation period in which the absence period begins or, if the Employee does not need these Hours of Service to prevent a Break in Service in the computation period in which is absence period begins, the Plan Administrator credits these Hours of Service to the immediately following computation period.

(3) Qualified Military Service. Hour of Service also includes any Service the Plan must credit in order to satisfy the crediting of Service requirements of Code § 414(u).

(4) Absence occasioned by military service or other authorized leaves of absence shall not be deemed an interruption of Service. An Employee who fails to return to the Service of the Company after completion of military service or other authorized leave of absence shall be deemed to have terminated his Service on the date such military service ended or other authorized leave of absence expired. All leaves of absence shall be granted in a non-discriminatory manner.

3.21 “Leased Employee” means an Employee of the Company subject to the provisions of this Section 3.19. A Leased Employee is an individual (who otherwise is not an Employee of the Company) who, pursuant to a leasing agreement between the Company and any other person, has performed services for the Company (or for the Company and any persons related to the Company within the meaning of Code § 144(a)(3)) on a substantially full time basis for at least one year and, effective for Plan Years beginning after 1996 whose services are performed under the primary direction and control of the Company within the meaning of Code § 414(n)(2). If a Leased Employee is treated as an Employee by reason of this Section 3.21, “Compensation” includes Compensation from the leasing organization which is attributable to services performed for the Company.

a. Safe Harbor Plan Exception. The Plan does not treat a Leased Employee as an Employee if the leasing organization covers the employee in a safe harbor plan and, prior to application of this safe harbor plan exception, 20 percent or less of the Company’s Employees (other than Highly Compensated Employees) are Leased Employees. A safe harbor plan is a money purchase pension plan providing immediate participation, full and immediate vesting, and a nonintegrated contribution formula equal to at least 10 percent of the employee’s compensation without regard to employment by the leasing organization on a specified date. The safe harbor plan must determine the 10 percent contribution on the basis of compensation as defined in Code § 415(c)(3) with the inclusion of elective contributions (if otherwise excludible). If a Participant is a Leased Employee covered by a plan maintained by the leasing organization, the Plan Administrator will determine the

 

8


allocation of Company contributions and Forfeitures on behalf of the Participant by taking into account the Leased Employee’s allocation, if any, under the leasing organization’s plan, but only to the extent that allocation is attributable to the Leased Employee’s services performed for the Company.

b. Other Requirements. The Plan Administrator must apply this Section 3.21 in a manner consistent with Code §§ 414(n) and 414(o) and the regulations issued under those Code sections.

3.22 “Leveraged Company Stock” means Company Stock acquired by the Trust with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan and which satisfy the definition of “qualifying employer securities” under Code § 4975(e)(8).

3.23 “Limitation Year” means, for purposes of ERISA, the Plan Year.

3.24 “Named Fiduciary” means the Plan Administrator for purposes of Section 402 of ERISA. Individuals on the Committee shall have the authority to control and manage the Plan operations and administration.

3.25 “Nonhighly Compensated Employee” means any Employee who is not a Highly Compensated Employee.

3.26 “Normal Retirement Age” means the sixty-fifth (65 th ) birthday of the Participant.

3.27 “Participant” means any Employee who meets the eligibility requirements of Article IV.

3.28 “Plan” means the retirement plan established and continued by the Company in the form of this Agreement, designated as the “MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust.” The Company has designed this Plan to invest primarily in Company Stock.

3.29 “Plan Administrator” means the Committee. In addition to other duties, the Plan Administrator shall have full responsibility for compliance with the reporting and disclosure rules under ERISA as respects this Plan. The Plan Administrator is hereby designated as the agent for service of legal process.

3.30 “Plan Benefit” means the amount standing in a Participant’s Account(s) as of any date derived from Company contributions, Forfeitures and gains or losses, if any, under this Plan.

3.31 “Plan Year” means the fiscal year of the Plan, a 12-consecutive month period ending every December 31.

 

9


3.32 “Protected Benefit” means any accrued benefit described in Treas. Reg. § 1.411(d)-4, including any optional form of benefit provided under the Plan which may not (except in accordance with such Regulations) be reduced, eliminated or made subject to the Company’s discretion.

3.33 “Related Employer/Related Group” is a controlled group of corporations (as defined in Code § 414(b)), trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) which are under common control (as defined in Code § 414(c)) or an affiliated service group (as defined in Code § 414(m) or in Code § 414(o)). If the Company is a member of a related group, the term “Company” includes the related group members for purposes of crediting Hours of Service, determining Years of Service and Breaks in Service under Articles IV and VI, applying the limitations on allocations in Part 2 of Article V, applying the top heavy rules and the minimum allocation requirements of Article XIII, the definitions of Employee, Highly Compensated Employee and Compensation, and for any other purpose required by the applicable Code section or by a Plan provision.

However, only a Company described in Section 3.8 may contribute to the Plan and only an Employee employed by a Company described in Section 3.8 is eligible to participate in this Plan. For Plan allocation purposes, “Compensation” does not include Compensation received from a Related Company not participating in this Plan.

3.34 “Separation from Service” means a separation from Service with the Company maintaining this Plan.

3.35 “Service” means any period of time the Employee is in the employ of the Company, including any period the Employee is on an unpaid leave of absence authorized by the Company under a uniform, nondiscriminatory policy applicable to all Employees. If the Company maintains the plan of a predecessor employer, the Plan treats service of the Employee with the predecessor employer as Service with the Company. If the Company does not maintain the plan of a predecessor employer, the Plan does not credit service with any predecessor employer, unless the Company identifies the predecessor employer in this Plan and specifies the purposes for which the Plan will credit service with that predecessor employer.

3.36 “Trust” means the separate Trust created under this Plan.

3.37 “Trust Fund” means all property every kind held or acquired by the Trustee under this Plan and Trust, other than incidental benefit insurance contracts, if any. This Plan creates a single Trust for all companies participating under this Plan. However, the Trustee will maintain separate records of account in order to properly reflect each Participant’s Annual Benefit derived from each participating company

3.38 “Trustee” means MidWestOne Bank (f/k/a Mahaska State Bank), of Oskaloosa, Iowa, chosen by the Company’s Board of Directors to act as Trustee hereunder, or any successor in interest to such Trustee, or any successor Trustee chosen by the Company’s Board of Directors which agrees to act hereunder in writing.

 

10


3.39 “Year of Service” Except as provided in Article V. shall means any Plan Year in which an Employee completed at least 1,000 Hours of Service with the Company.

3.40 “Vested” means a Participant or a Beneficiary has an unconditional claim, legally enforceable against the Plan, to the Participant’s Account Balance or Plan Benefit.

ARTICLE IV

EMPLOYEE PARTICIPANTS

4.1 ELIGIBILITY . Each Employee shall become a Participant in the Plan on the January first or July first coincident with or immediately following the later of the date on which the Employee attains age 18 or the date on which he or she completes one Year of Service with the Company (if he or she is still employed by the Company on that date). Each Employee who was a Participant in the Plan on the day before the Effective Date of this Restated Plan continues as a Participant in the Plan. Once an Employee becomes a Participant, he or she will remain a Participant until he or she incurs a One Year Break in Service caused by his or her termination of employment with the Company.

4.2 YEAR OF SERVICE - PARTICIPATION . For purposes of an Employee’s participation in the Plan under Section 4.1, the Plan takes into account all of the Employee’s Years of Service with the Company. “Year of Service” means an eligibility computation period during which the Employee completes not less then 1,000 Hours of Service. The initial eligibility computation period is the first 12-consecutive month period measured from the Employment Commencement Date. The Plan measures subsequent periods by reference to the Plan Year, beginning with the Plan Year which includes the first anniversary of the Employee’s Employment Commencement Date. “Employment Commencement Date” means the date on which the Employee first performance an Hour of Service for the Company.

4.3 PARTICIPATION UPON RE-EMPLOYMENT . A former Participant who incurs a Separation from Service prior to becoming vested in any portion of his or her Account, who is rehired by the Company and who has incurred five consecutive Breaks in Service shall again be required to meet the eligibility requirements of this Article IV. A former Participant who is rehired by the Company and who was partially vested or has not incurred five consecutive Breaks in Service shall become a Participant on the date of his or her re-employment.

 

11


ARTICLE V

COMPANY CONTRIBUTIONS

Part 1. Amount of Company Contributions

and Plan Allocations: Sections 5.1 through 5.6

5.1 COMPANY CONTRIBUTIONS .

a. Amount . For each Plan Year, the Company will contribute to the Trust an amount which the Company may from time to time deem advisable. Although the Company will contribute to this Plan irrespective of whether it has net profits, the Company intends the Plan to be an employee stock ownership plan for all purposes of the Code. The Company may not make a contribution to the Trust for any Plan Year to the extent the contribution would exceed the Participants’ Maximum Permissible Amounts. See Part 2 of this Article V.

b. Form of Contribution . Subject to the consent of the Trustee, the Company may make its contribution in property (including Company Stock), instead of cash, provided the contribution of property is not a prohibited transaction under the Code or ERISA. The Company may make its contribution of Company Stock at Fair Market Value determined at the time of contribution. Notwithstanding any provision in this Article V to the contrary, the Plan will provide contributions with respect to qualified military service in accordance with Code § 414(u).

c. Time of Payment of Contribution . The Company may pay its contribution for each Plan Year in one (1) or more installments without interest. The Company must, however, make its contribution to the Trustee within the time prescribed (including extensions) by the Code or applicable Treasury regulations. If the Company makes a contribution for a particular Plan Year after the close of that Plan Year, the Company will designate in writing to the Trustee the Plan Year for which the Company is making its contribution.

d. Return of Contribution . The Company contributes to the Plan on the condition its contribution is not due to a mistake of fact and the Internal Revenue Service will not disallow the deduction for its contribution. The Trustee, upon written request from the Company, must return to the Company the amount of the Company’s contribution made by the Company by mistake of fact or the amount of the Company’s contribution disallowed as a deduction under Code § 404. The Trustee will not return any portion of the Company’s contribution under the provisions of this paragraph more than one (1) year after:

(1) the Company made the contribution by mistake of fact; or

 

12


(2) the disallowance of the contribution as a deduction, and then, only to the extent of the disallowance.

The Trustee will not increase the amount of the Company contribution returnable under this Section 5.1 for any earnings attributable to the contribution, but the Trustee shall decrease the Company contribution returnable for any losses attributable to it. The Trustee may require the Company to furnish it whatever evidence the Trustee deems necessary to enable the Trustee to confirm the amount the Company has requested be returned is properly returnable under ERISA.

Except as set out in this paragraph, none of the principal or income of this Trust shall be paid to or revert to the Company or be used for any purpose whatsoever other than the exclusive benefit of the Participants or their Beneficiaries or for the payment of expenses of the administration of the Trust Fund allowable under the Code and ERISA.

5.2 PARTICIPANT CONTRIBUTIONS . The Plan does not require or permit Participant contributions.

5.3 PARTICIPANT ROLLOVER CONTRIBUTIONS . The Plan does not permit Participant rollover contributions.

5.4 CONTRIBUTION ALLOCATION . The Plan Administrator will allocate and credit each annual Company contribution (and Forfeitures, if any) to the Account of each Participant who satisfies the conditions of Section 5.6 in the same ratio that each Participant’s Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation of all Participants for the Plan Year.

5.5 FORFEITURE ALLOCATION . The amount of a Participant’s Account Balance forfeited under the Plan is a Forfeiture. Subject to any restoration allocation required under the Plan, the Plan Administrator will allocate the Forfeiture in accordance with Section 5.4, as a Company contribution for the Plan Year in which the Forfeiture occurs, as if the Forfeiture were an additional Company contribution for that Plan Year. The Plan Administrator will continue to hold the undistributed, non-Vested portion of a terminated Participant’s Account Balance in his or her Account solely for his or her benefit until a Forfeiture occurs at the time specified in Section 6.8, or, if applicable, until the time specified in Section 10.15. Except as provided under Section 6.3, a Participant will not share in the allocation of a Forfeiture of any portion of his or her Account Balance.

5.6 ALLOCATION CONDITIONS . The Plan Administrator will determine the allocation conditions which apply to Company contributions and Forfeitures on the basis of the Plan Year. Except for purposes of determining the top-heavy minimum contribution under Article XII, the Plan Administrator will take into account only the Compensation determined for the portion of the Plan Year in which the Employee actually is a Participant.

a. Hours of Service Requirement . Subject to the top-heavy minimum allocation requirement of Article XII, the Plan Administrator will not allocate any portion of a Company contribution for a Plan Year to any Participant’s Account if the Participant does not complete a minimum of 1,000 Hours of Service during the Plan Year.

 

13


b. Employment Requirement . A Participant who, during a particular Plan Year, completes the Hours of Service requirement under this Section 5.6 will not share in the allocation of Company contributions and Forfeitures, if any, for that Plan Year unless he or she is employed by the Company on the Accounting Date of that Plan Year.

c. Suspension of Allocation Requirements . The Plan suspends the allocation requirements under paragraphs a. and b. of this Section 5.6 for any Plan Year if the Plan fails to satisfy the Coverage Test. A Plan satisfies the “Coverage Test” if, on the last day of the Plan Year, the benefitting ratio of the Nonhighly Compensated Includible Employees is at least 70 percent of the benefitting ratio of the Highly Compensated Includible Employees.

The benefitting ratio of the Nonhighly Compensated Includible Employees is the number of Nonhighly Compensated Includible Employees benefitting under the Plan over the number of the Includible Employees who are Nonhighly Compensated Employees. “Includible” Employees are all Employees other than: (1) those Employees excluded from participating in the Plan for the entire Plan Year by reason of the Code’s collective bargaining unit exclusion or the Code’s nonresident alien exclusion or by reason of the age and service requirements of Article III; and (2) any Employee who incurs a Separation from Service during the Plan Year and fails to complete at least 501 Hours of Service for the Plan Year. A “Nonhighly Compensated Includible Employee” is an Employee who is not a Highly Compensated Includible Employee.

For purposes of the Coverage Test, an Employee is benefitting under the Plan on a particular date if, under Section 5.4 of the Plan, he or she is entitled to a Company contribution or a Forfeiture allocation for the Plan Year.

If this paragraph c. applies for a Plan Year, the Plan Administrator will suspend the allocation conditions for the Nonhighly Compensated Includible Employees who are Participants, beginning first with the Includible Employee(s) employed with the Company on the last day of the Plan Year, then the Includible Employee(s) who have the latest Separation from Service during the Plan Year, and continuing to suspend the allocation conditions for each Includible Employee who incurred an earlier Separation from Service, from the latest to the earliest Separation from Service date, until the Plan satisfies the Coverage Test for the Plan Year. If two or more includible Employees have a Separation from Service on the same day, the Plan Administrator will suspend the allocation conditions for all such Includible Employees, irrespective of whether the Plan can satisfy the Coverage Test by accruing benefits for fewer than all such Includible Employees. If the Plan suspends the allocation conditions for an Includible Employee, that Employee will share in the allocation of the Company contribution and Forfeitures, if any, without regard to whether employed by the Company on the last day of the Plan Year.

 

14


Part 2. Limitations on Allocations: Sections 5.7 through 5.10

5.7 LIMITATIONS ON ALLOCATIONS TO PARTICIPANTS’ ACCOUNTS . The amount of Annual Additions which the Plan Administrator may allocate under this Plan on a Participant’s behalf for a Limitation Year may not exceed the Maximum Permissible Amount. If the amount the Company otherwise would contribute to the Participant’s Account would cause the Annual Additions for the Limitation Year to exceed the Maximum Permissible Amount, the Company will reduce the amount of its contribution so the Annual Additions for the Limitation Year will equal the Maximum Permissible Amount. If an allocation of Company contributions, pursuant to Section 5.4, would result in an Excess Amount (other than an Excess Amount resulting from a reasonable error in estimating a Participant’s actual annual Compensation, because of the allocation of Forfeitures or because of a reasonable error in determining a Participant’s Elective Contributions, if any) to the Participant’s Account, the Plan Administrator will reallocate the Excess Amount to the remaining Participants who are eligible for an allocation of Company contributions for the Plan Year in which the Limitation Year ends. The Plan Administrator will make this reallocation on the basis of the allocation method under the Plan as if the Participant whose Account otherwise would receive the Excess Amount is not eligible for an allocation of Company contributions.

a. Estimation of Compensation . Prior to the determination of the Participant’s actual Compensation for a Limitation Year, the Plan Administrator may determine the Maximum Permissible Amount on the basis of the Participant’s estimated annual Compensation for such Limitation year. The Plan Administrator must make this determination on a reasonable and uniform basis for all Participants similarly situated. The Plan Administrator must reduce any Company contributions (including any allocation of Forfeitures) based on estimated annual Compensation by any Excess Amount carried over from prior years. As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the Limitation year, the Plan Administrator will determine the Maximum Permissible Amount for such Limitation Year on the basis of the Participant’s actual Compensation for such Limitation Year.

b. More Than One Plan . If the Plan Administrator allocated an Excess Amount to a Participant’s Account on an allocation date of this Plan which coincides with an allocation date of another defined contribution plan maintained by the Company, the Excess Amount attributed to this Plan will be the product of:

(1) The total Excess Amount allocated as of such date (including any amount which the Plan Administrator would have allocated but for the limitations of Code § 415) times;

 

15


(2) The ratio of a) the amount allocated to the Participant as of such date under this Plan divided by b) the total amount allocated as of such date under all qualified defined contribution plans (determined without regard to the limitations of Code § 415).

c. Disposition of Excess Amount . If, because of a determination of the Participant’s actual Compensation, or because of the allocation of Forfeitures or because of a Participant’s Elective Contributions, if any, there is an Excess Amount with respect to a Participant for a Limitation Year, the Plan Administrator will dispose of such Excess Amount as follows:

(1) The Plan Administrator first will return to the Participant any nondeductible Employee contributions and then any Elective Contributions under a 401(k) arrangement, if any, to the extent the return would reduce the Excess Amount.

(2) If, after the application of paragraph (1), an Excess Amount still exists, and the Plan covers the Participant at the end of the Limitation Year, then the Plan Administrator will use the Excess Amount(s) to reduce future Company contributions (including any allocation of Forfeitures) under the Plan for the next Limitation Year and for each succeeding Limitation Year, as is necessary, for the Participant.

(3) If, after the application of paragraph (1), an Excess Amount still exists, and the Plan does not cover the Participant at the end of the Limitation Year, then the Plan Administrator will hold the Excess Amount unallocated in a suspense account. The Plan Administrator will apply the suspense account to reduce Company Contributions (including allocation of Forfeitures) for all remaining Participants in the next Limitation Year, and in each succeeding Limitation Year if necessary. Neither the Company nor any Employee may contribute to the Plan for any Limitation Year in which the Plan is unable to allocate fully a suspense account maintained pursuant to this paragraph (3).

(4) The Plan Administrator under paragraphs (2) or (3) will not distribute any Excess Amount(s) to Participants or to former Participants.

d. Defined Benefit Plan Limitation . The Company does not maintain and never has maintained a defined benefit plan covering any Participant in this Plan. Accordingly, no special defined benefit plan limitation applies under this Plan.

 

16


5.8 DEFINITIONS - ARTICLE V . For purposes of Article V, the following terms shall mean:

a. “Annual Addition” means the sum of the following amounts allocated on behalf of a Participant for a Limitation year, of (1) all Company contributions and (2) all Forfeitures. Except to the extent provided in Treasury regulations, Annual Additions include excess contributions described in Code § 401(k), excess aggregate contributions described in Code § 401(m) and excess deferrals described in Code § 402(g), irrespective of whether the Plan distributes or forfeits such excess amounts. Annual Additions also include Excess Amounts reapplied to reduce Company contributions under Section 5.7. Annual Additions also include amounts allocated to an individual medical account (as defined in Code § 415(1)(2) included as part of a defined benefit plan maintained by the Company. Furthermore, Annual Additions include contributions paid or accrued after December 31, 1985, for taxable years ending after December 31, 1985, attributable to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee (as defined in Code § 419(A)(d)(3)) under a welfare benefit fund (Code § 419(e)) maintained by the Company, but only for purposes of the dollar limitation applicable to the Maximum Permissible Amount.

“Annual Additions” do not include any Company contributions applied by the Plan Administrator (not later than the due date, including extensions, for filing the Company’s Federal income tax return for that Plan Year) to pay interest on an Exempt Loan, and any Leveraged Company Stock the Plan Administrator allocates as Forfeitures; provided, however, the provisions of this sentence do not apply in a Plan Year for which the Plan Administrator allocates more than one-third of the Company contributions applied to pay principal and interest on an Exempt Loan to Restricted Participants. The Plan Administrator may reallocate the Company Contributions in accordance with Section 5.4 to the Accounts of Nonhighly Compensated Employee-Participants to the extent necessary in order to satisfy this special limitation.

b. “Compensation” means, for purposes of applying the limitations of Part 2 of this Article VI, Compensation as defined in Section 3.10, except, for Limitation Years beginning prior to January 1, 1998, Compensation does not include Elective Contributions.

c. “Maximum Permissible Amount” - For Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2002, the lesser of (1) $30,000 (or, if greater, the amount as adjusted under § 415(d), or (2) 25 percent of the Participant’s Compensation for the Limitation Year. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, except to the extent permitted under the Code, the lesser of (1) $40,000 (or, if greater, the amount as adjusted under § 415(d), or (2) 100 percent of the Participant’s Compensation for the Limitation Year. The Compensation limit referred to in this paragraph shall not apply to any contribution for medical benefits after Separation from Service (within the meaning of Code § 401(h) or Code § 419A(f)(2) which is otherwise treated as an annual addition. If there is a short Limitation Year because of a change in the Limitation Year, the Plan Administrator will multiply the $30,000 or the $40,000 (or adjusted) limitation, as the case may be, by the following fraction:

Number of Months in the short Limitation Year

12.

 

17


d. “Company” means the Company that adopts this Plan and any Related Employer. Solely for purposes of applying the limitations of Part 2 of this Article IV, the Plan Administrator will determine Related Employers by modifying Code §§ 414(b) and (c) in accordance with Code § 415(h).

e. “Excess Amount” means the excess of the Participant’s Annual Additions for the Limitation Year over the Maximum Permissible Amount.

f. “Limitation Year” means the Plan Year. If the Company amends the Limitation Year to a different 12 consecutive month period, the new Limitation Year must begin on a date within the Limitation Year for which the Company makes the amendment, creating a short Limitation Year.

g. “Defined contribution plan” means a retirement plan which provides for an individual account for each participant and for benefits based solely on the amount contributed to the participant’s account, and any income, expenses, gains and losses, and any Forfeitures of accounts of other participants which the plan may allocate to such participant’s account. The Plan Administrator must treat all defined contribution plans (whether or not terminated) maintained by the Company as a single plan. For purposes of the limitations of Part 2 of this Article V, the Plan Administrator will treat employee contributions made to a defined benefit plan maintained by the Company as a separate defined contribution plan. The Plan Administrator will also treat as a defined contribution plan an individual medical account (as defined in Code § 415(l)(2)) included as part of a defined benefit plan maintained by the Company and, for taxable years ending after December 31, 1985, a welfare benefit fund under Code § 419(e) maintained by the Company to the extent there are post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee (as defined in Code § 419A(d)(3)).

h. “Defined benefit plan” means a retirement plan which does not provide for individual accounts for Company contributions. The Plan Administrator must treat all defined benefit plans (whether or not terminated) maintained by the Company as a single plan.

ARTICLE VI

SEPARATION FROM SERVICE - PARTICIPANT VESTING

6.1 NORMAL RETIREMENT AGE . A Participant’s Normal Retirement Age is sixty-five (65) years of age. A Participant’s Account Balance derived from Company contributions is 100 percent Vested upon and after his or her attaining Normal Retirement Age, if employed by the Company on or after that date.

 

18


6.2 VESTING SCHEDULE .

a. Vesting in Account-Generally . For Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007, except as provided in Section 6.1, for each Year of Service (unless this Plan is top heavy in the Plan Year) a Participant’s Vested percentage of his or her Account Balance derived from Company contributions equals the percentage, based on each Year of Service, under the following vesting schedule:

 

Years of Service With the Company

   Percent of Vested Account Balance  

Less than    3

   None  

3

   20 %

4

   40 %

5

   60 %

6

   80 %

7 or more

   100 %

For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2006, except as provided in Section 6.1, for each Year of Service (unless this Plan is top heavy in the Plan Year) a Participant’s Vested percentage of his or her Account Balance derived from Company contributions equals the percentage, based on each Year of Service, under the following vesting schedule:

 

Years of Service With the Company

   Percent of Vested Account Balance  

Less than    2

   None  

2

   20 %

3

   40 %

4

   60 %

5

   80 %

6 or more

   100 %

 

19


b. Vesting in Account in Top Heavy Years . For any Plan Year for which the Plan is a top heavy Plan (as defined in Article XIII), the Plan Administrator shall calculate a Participant’s Vested percentage of his or her Account Balance under the following vesting schedule:

 

Years of Service With the Company

   Percent of Vested Account Balance  

Less than    2

   None  

2

   20 %

3

   40 %

4

   60 %

5

   80 %

6

   100 %

The Plan Administrator shall apply the top heavy schedule to Participants who earn at least one (1) Hour of Service after the top heavy schedule becomes effective. A shift between vesting schedules under this Section 6.2 is an amendment to the vesting schedule, and the Plan Administrator shall apply the rules of Section 6.9 accordingly. A shift to a new vesting schedule under this Section 6.2 is effective on the first day of the Plan Year for which the top heavy status of the Plan changes.

c. Special Vesting Schedule . If the Trustee makes a distribution (other than a cash-out distribution described in Section 6.3) to a partially-Vested Participant, and the Participant has not incurred a Forfeiture Break in Service at the relevant time, the Plan Administrator will establish a separate Account for the Participant’s Account Balance. At any relevant time following the distribution, the Plan Administrator will determine the Participant’s Vested Account Balance derived from Company contributions in accordance with the following formula: P(AB + ®) x D)) - ®) x D).

To apply this formula, “P” is the Participant’s current vesting percentage at the relevant time, “AB” is the Participant’s Company-derived Account Balance at the relevant time, “R” is the ratio of “AB” to the Participant’s Company-derived Account Balance immediately following the earlier distribution and “D” is the amount of the earlier distribution. If, under a restated Plan, the Plan has made distribution to a partially-Vested Participant prior to its restated Effective Date and is unable to apply the cash-out provisions of Section 6.3 to that prior distribution, this special vesting formula also applies to that Participant’s remaining Account Balance.

6.3 CASH-OUT DISTRIBUTIONS TO PARTIALLY-VESTED PARTICIPANTS/RESTORATION OF FORFEITED ACCOUNT BALANCE . If, pursuant to Article VII, a partially-Vested Participant receives a cash-out distribution before he or she incurs a Forfeiture Break in Service (as defined in Section 6.7), the cash-out distribution will result in an immediate Forfeiture of the non-Vested portion of the Participant’s Account Balance derived from Company contributions. A partially-Vested Participant is a Participant whose Vested percentage determined under Section 6.2 is less than 100 percent. A “cash-out” distribution is a distribution of the entire present value of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance upon Separation from Service.

 

20


a. Restoration and Conditions Upon Restoration . A partially-Vested Participant who is re-employed by the Company after receiving a cash-out distribution of the Vested percentage of his or her Account Balance may repay the Trustee the amount of the cash-out distribution attributable to Company contributions unless the Participant no longer has a right to restoration under the requirements of this Section 6.3. If a partially-Vested Participant makes the cash-out distribution repayment, the Plan Administrator, subject to the conditions of this paragraph (a), must restore his or her Account Balance attributable to Company contributions to the same dollar amount as the dollar amount of his or her Account Balance on the Accounting Date, or other evaluation date, immediately preceding the date of the cash-out distribution, unadjusted for any gains or losses occurring subsequent to that Accounting Date, or other valuation date. Restoration of the Participant’s Account Balance shall include restoration of all Code § 411(d)(6) protected benefits with respect to that restored Account Balance, in accordance with applicable Treasury regulations. The Plan Administrator shall not restore a re-employed Participant’s Account Balance under this Section 6.3 if:

(1) five (5) years have elapsed since the Participant’s first re-employment date following the cash-out distribution;

(2) the Participant is not in the Company’s Service on the date the Participant makes his or her request to repay his or her cash-out distribution; or

(3) the Participant incurred a Forfeiture Break in Service (as defined in Section 6.7). This condition also applies if the Participant makes repayment within the Plan Year in which he or she incurs the Forfeiture Break in Service and that Forfeiture Break in Service would result in a complete forfeiture of the amount the Plan Administrator otherwise would restore.

b. Time and Method of Restoration . If none of the conditions in Section 6.3a. preventing restoration of the Participant’s Account Balance applies, the Plan Administrator will restore the Participant’s Account Balance as of the Plan Year Accounting Date coincident with or immediately following the repayment. To restore the Participant’s Account Balance, the Plan Administrator, to the extent necessary, will allocate to the Participant’s Account:

(1) first, the amount, if any, of Forfeitures the Plan Administrator would otherwise allocate under Section 5.5;

(2) second, the amount, if any, of the Trust Fund net income or gain for the Plan Year; and

(3) third, the Company contribution for the Plan Year to the extent made under a discretionary formula.

 

21


To the extent the amount(s) described in clauses (1), (2) and (3) are insufficient to enable the Plan Administrator to make the required restoration, the Company must contribute, without regard to any requirement or condition of Article V, the additional amount as is necessary to enable the Plan Administrator to make the required restoration. If, for a particular Plan Year, the Plan Administrator must restore the Account Balance of more than one (1) re-employed Participant, then the Plan Administrator will make the restoration allocation(s) to each such Participant’s Account in the same proportion that a Participant’s restored amount for the Plan Year bears to the restored amount for the Plan Year of all re-employed Participants. The Plan Administrator shall not take into account the allocation(s) under this Section 6.4 in applying the limitation on allocations under Part 2 of Article IV.

c. 0 Percent Vested Participant . The deemed cash-out rule applies to a 0 percent Vested Participant. A 0 percent Vested Participant is a Participant whose Account Balance derived from Company contributions is entirely forfeitable at the time of his or her Separation from Service. If the Participant’s Account is not entitled to an allocation of Company contributions for the Plan Year in which he or she has a Separation from Service, the Plan Administrator will apply the deemed cash-out rule as if the 0 percent Vested Participant received a cash-out distribution on the date of Participant’s Separation from Service. If the Participant’s Account is entitled to an allocation of Company contributions or Forfeitures for the Plan Year in which he or she has a Separation from Service, the Plan Administrator will apply the deemed cash-out rule as if the 0 percent Vested Participant received a cash-out distribution on the first day of the first Plan Year beginning after his or her Separation from Service. For purposes of applying the restoration provisions of this Section 6.3, the Plan Administrator will treat the 0 percent Vested Participant as repaying his or her cash-out “distribution” on the first date of his or her re-employment with the Company.

6.4 ACCOUNTING FOR REPAID AMOUNT . As soon as is administratively practicable, the Plan Administrator will credit to the Participant’s Account the cash-out amount a Participant has repaid to the Plan. Pending the restoration of the Participant’s Account Balance, the Plan Administrator may direct the Trustee to maintain a temporary segregated investment Account in the name of the Participant if necessary to prevent a distortion of income, gain or loss allocations under Section 10.12. The Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to repay to the Participant as soon as is administratively practicable the full amount of the Participant’s repaid cash-out amount if the Plan Administrator determines any of the conditions of Section 6.3a. prevents restoration as of the applicable Accounting Date, notwithstanding the Participant’s repayment.

6.5 YEAR OF SERVICE - VESTING . For purposes of vesting under Section 6.2, Year of Service means any Plan Year during which the Employee completes not less than one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service with the Company.

6.6 BREAK IN SERVICE - VESTING . For purposes of this Article VI, a Participant incurs a Break in Service if during any Plan Year he or she does not complete more than five hundred (500) Hours of Service with the Company.

 

22


6.7 INCLUDED YEARS OF SERVICE - VESTING . Subject to Section 6.6, for purposes of determining “Years of Service” under Section 6.5, the Plan takes into account all Years of Service an Employee completes with the Company, except:

a. any Year of Service after the Participant first incurs a Forfeiture Break in Service or receives a cash-out distribution (unless the Plan Administrator restores the Participant’s Account under Section 6.3a.). The Participant incurs a “Forfeiture Break in Service” when he or she incurs five (5) consecutive Breaks in Service. This exception shall apply for the sole purpose of determining a Participant’s Vested percentage of his or her Account Balance derived from Company contributions which accrued for his or her benefit prior to the Forfeiture Break in Service;

b. if the Participant has incurred a Forfeiture Break in Service and had a 0 percent Vested interest at the time of his or her first Break in Service, then only Years of Service completed subsequent to the previous Break in Service shall be counted for purposes of determining the Vested percentage in his or her Account Balance at the time of his or her next Break in Service;

c. if the Participant has incurred fewer than five consecutive Breaks in Service or the Participant was partially Vested at the time of his or her first Break in Service, then Years of Service prior to such Break in Service shall be counted together with each Year of Service completed after such Break in Service for purposes of determining his or her Vested percentage in his or her Account Balance at the time of his or her next Break in Service; and

d. any Year of Service before the Plan Year in which the Participant attained the age of eighteen (18).

6.8 FORFEITURE OCCURS . A Participant’s Forfeiture, if any, of his or her Account Balance derived from Company contributions occurs under the Plan on the earlier of:

a. the last day of the Plan Year in which the Participant first incurs a Forfeiture Break in Service; or

b. the date the Participant receives a cash out distribution.

The Plan Administrator determines the percentage of Participant’s Account Balance forfeiture, if any, under this Section 6.8 solely by reference to the vesting schedule of Section 6.2. A Participant will not forfeit any portion of his or her Account Balance for any other reason or cause except as expressly provided by this Section 6.8 or as provided by Section 10.15.

Furthermore, if the Participant’s Account is entitled to an allocation of Company contributions or Forfeitures for the Plan Year in which he or she otherwise would incur a Forfeiture under this

 

23


Section 6.8 by reason of a cash-out distribution, the Plan Administrator will apply the cash-out forfeiture rule as if the partially-Vested Participant received a cash-out distribution on the first day of the immediately following Plan Year.

6.9 AMENDMENT TO VESTING SCHEDULE . Though the Company reserves the right to amend the vesting schedule at any time, the Plan Administrator will not apply the amended vesting schedule to reduce the Vested percentage (determined as of the later of the date the Company adopts the amendment, or the date the amendment becomes effective) of any Participant’s existing and future Account Balance derived from Company contributions to a percentage less than the Vested percentage computed under the Plan without regard to the amendment. An amended vesting schedule will apply to a Participant only if the Participant receives credit for at least one Hour of Service after the new schedule becomes effective.

If the Company makes a permissible amendment to the vesting schedule, each Participant having at least three Years of Service with the Company may elect to have the percentage of his or her Vested Account Balance computed under the Plan without regarding to the amendment. The Participant must file his or her election with the Plan Administrator within 60 days of the latest of: (a) the Company’s adoption of the amendment; (b) the effective date of the amendment; or (c) the Participant’s receipt of a copy of the amendment. The Plan Administrator, as soon as practicable, must forward a true copy of any amendment to the vesting schedule to each affected Participant, together with an explanation of the effect of the amendment, the appropriate form upon which the Participant may make an election to remain under the vesting schedule provided under the Plan prior to the amendment and notice of the time within which the Participant must make an election to remain under the prior vesting schedule. The election described in this Section 6.9 does not apply to a Participant if the amended vesting schedule provides for vesting at least as rapid at any time as the vesting schedule in effect prior to the amendment. The election described in this Section 6.9 does not apply to a Participant if the amended vesting schedule provides for vesting at least as rapid at any time as the vesting schedule in effect prior to the amendment. For purposes of this Section 6.9, an amendment to the vesting schedule include any Plan amendment which directly or indirectly affects the computation of the Vested percentage of an Employee’s rights to his or her Company derived Account Balance. Furthermore, the Plan Administrator must treat any shift in the vesting schedule, due to a change in the Plan’s top-heavy status, as an amendment to the vesting schedule for purposes of this Section 6.9.

6.10 PUT OPTIONS ON DISTRIBUTED COMPANY STOCK . If Company Stock received in a distribution from this Plan is not readily tradeable on an established market at the time of distribution, the Participant or Beneficiary shall have the right, to the extent required by Code § 409(h), to require the Company to repurchase the Company Stock at the value established as of the valuation date immediately preceding the distribution. To exercise this put option, the Participant or Beneficiary must notify the Committee in writing of his or her intent to exercise this option within sixty (60) days of the date of distribution or, if the option is not then exercised, within a 60-day period commencing one (1) year after the date of distribution and terminating sixty (60) days later. Within thirty (30) days after exercise of the put option, the Committee shall determine the validity of the

 

24


exercise and, if valid, the Committee shall direct that consideration for the shares shall be paid in annual installments over a period beginning not later than thirty (30) days after exercise and not exceeding five (5) years. For any installment payment, the Company’s obligation shall be reflected in a written promissory note and a reasonable interest rate paid on unpaid installments. If the distribution of Company Stock is part of an installment distribution, however, the full amount of consideration to be paid for distributed shares shall be paid not later than thirty (30) days after the exercise of the put option. The right of the Company to repurchase shares pursuant to the exercise of put options by Participants or Beneficiaries may be assigned by the Company to the Plan.

ARTICLE VII

TIME AND METHOD OF PAYMENT OF BENEFITS

7.1 PAYMENT OF ACCOUNT BALANCE . The Committee will direct the Trustee when to commence the distribution of a Participant’s Account in accordance with this Article VII if the Participant separates from Service for any reason. In each case a distribution date is specified, distribution will be made on the later of that date or the earliest date as administratively practicable following the specified date.

7.2 DISTRIBUTION UPON SEPARATION FROM SERVICE FOR ANY REASON OTHER THAN DEATH .

a. Participant’s Vested Account Balance Not Exceeding $1,000 . Upon the Participant’s Separation from Service for any reason other than death, the Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to distribute the Participant’s Vested Account Balance not exceeding $1,000 in a lump sum as soon as administratively practicable following the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant incurs a Separation from Service, but in no event later than the 60 th day following the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age, or if later, no later than the 60 th day following the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant’s Separation from Service occurs.

b. Participant’s Vested Account Balance Exceeds $1,000 . Upon the Participant’s Separation from Service for any reason other than death, the Plan Administrator, subject to the consent requirements of this Section 7.2 and Section 7.10 and the distribution provisions of Section 7.4, will direct the Trustee to distribute the Participant’s Vested Account Balance exceeding $1,000 as soon as administratively practicable following the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant incurs a Separation from Service in a form determined in accordance with Section 7.4. Any election under this Section 7.2b. is subject to the requirements of Sections 7.2, 7.4, 7.7, 7.9 and 7.10. The Participant’s election under this Section 7.2b. is valid if filed with the Committee at any time before the Trustee otherwise would commence payment of a Participant’s Account Balance in accordance with the requirements of this Article VII. In the absence of an election by the Participant for a distribution upon Separation from Service, the Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to distribute the Participant’s Vested Account Balance in a lump sum no later than the 60 th day following the close of the

 

25


Plan Year in which the later of the following two events occurs: (a) the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age or (b) the Participant’s Separation from Service.

c. Disability . If the Participant’s Separation from Service occurs because of his or her Disability, the Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to pay the Participant’s Vested Account Balance in the same manner as if the Participant had incurred a Separation from Service without Disability.

d. Benefit Notice . Not earlier than 90 days, but not later than 30 days, before the date the Participant’s Vested Account Balance is distributed, the Plan Administrator must provide a benefit notice to a Participant or Beneficiary who is eligible to make a benefit payment election. The benefit notice must explain the Participant’s or Beneficiary’s right to postpone distribution until the applicable date described in Section 7.2b.

If a Participant or Beneficiary makes a benefit payment election, the Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to distribute the Participant’s Vested Account Balance in accordance with that election. Any election is subject to the requirements of this Article VII. Upon the Participant’s or Beneficiary’s request, the Plan Administrator shall furnish the Participant or Beneficiary an appropriate form for the making of the election. The Participant or Beneficiary shall make an election by filing the election form with the Plan Administrator at any time before the Trustee otherwise would commence to pay a Participant’s Vested Account Balance in accordance with the requirements of this Article VII.

e. Consent Requirement . Subject to the provisions of Section 7.10, a Participant must consent, in writing, to any distribution required under this Section 7.2 or under Section 7.9 if the Participant’s Vested Account Balance, at the time of the distribution to the Participant, exceeds $5,000 and the Participant has not attained Normal Retirement Age. A Participant may elect to receive distribution at any administratively practicable time which is earlier than 30 days following the Participant’s receipt of the benefit notice, by waiving in writing the balance of the 30 days.

f. Determination of Vested Account Balance . For purposes of the consent requirements under this Article VII, the Plan Administrator determines a Participant’s Vested Account Balance as of the most recent valuation date immediately prior to the distribution date. The Plan Administrator, in determining the Participant’s Vested Account Balance at the relevant time, will disregard a Participant’s Vested Account Balance existing on any prior date, except as the Code otherwise may require.

g. Consent to Cash-Out/Forfeiture . If the Participant is partially Vested in his or her Account Balance, an election to distribute prior to the Participant incurring a Forfeiture Break in Service (as defined in Section 6.7), must be in the form of a cash-out distribution (as defined in Article VI).

 

26


h. Return to Employment . A Participant may not receive a distribution upon Separation from Service if, prior to the time the Trustee actually makes the distribution, the Participant returns to employment with the Company.

7.3 DISTRIBUTION UPON DEATH OF THE PARTICIPANT . The Committee, subject to the election of the Participant’s Beneficiary under Section 7.4, will direct the Trustee to distribute to the Participant’s Beneficiary the Participant’s Vested Account Balance remaining in the Trust at the time of the Participant’s death. The Participant’s Vested Account Balance shall be distributed in the manner elected by the Participant prior to his or her death or by the Beneficiary, as the case may be. Distribution must commence no later than sixty (60) days after the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant’s death occurs or, if later, the date on which the Committee receives notification or otherwise confirms the Participant’s death.

7.4 METHOD OF DISTRIBUTION OF VESTED ACCOUNT BALANCE .

a. Distributions of Company Stock . Upon the Participant’s Separation from Service for any reason, the Participant’s Vested Account Balance may, in the discretion of the Committee, be distributed in shares of Company Stock or cash, except for balances representing fractional shares of Company Stock which shall be paid in cash. Such distributions of Company Stock or cash shall be made in a lump sum.

b. Election to Receive Company Stock . Notwithstanding any provision of paragraph a. to the contrary, the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary may elect to receive shares of Company Stock (except fractional shares of Company Stock) in lieu of cash, provided that he or she makes a written election within 60 days following the Accounting Date used in determining the Participant’s Vested Account Balance. Company Stock distributed as a part of the Account Balance of a Participant shall be valued as of the Accounting Date used in determining the Participant’s Vested Account Balance for purposes of distribution.

c. The distribution of a Participant’s Vested Account Balance in cash shall be made in five or fewer annual installments as determined by the Committee in its discretion. The amount of each installment shall be equal to the value of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance on the immediately preceding valuation date divided by the number of installments remaining to be made. If a Participant’s death occurs prior to the commencement of such cash distributions, all cash installments shall be paid to the Participant’s Beneficiary within five years of death the Participant’s date of death.

7.5 DEFERRED DISTRIBUTIONS . If distribution of all or any part of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance is deferred under the provisions of Section 7.2, Company Stock insofar as possible and other Trust assets having a Fair Market Value equal to the undistributed portion of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance as of the Accounting Date used in determining the Participant’s Vested Account Balance will be segregated as of that date and held as a separate Account for the

 

27


benefit of the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary, as the case may be. Such segregated Account will be credited with income earned by the Account’s assets and charged with its share of Trust expenses directly attributable to such assets, if any. No Company contributions or Forfeitures will be credited to any such segregated Account.

7.6 REQUIRED BEGINNING DATE . If any distribution date, either by Plan provision or by Participant election or nonelection, is later than the Participant’s required beginning date, the Plan Administrator instead must direct the Trustee to make distribution on the Participant’s required beginning date. A Participant’s “required beginning date” is the first day of April of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70  1 / 2 , except that the required beginning date of a Participant who attains age 70  1 / 2 after December 31, 1999 and who is not a 5 percent owner of the Company with respect to the Plan Year shall be the first day of April of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70  1 / 2 or the calendar year in which the Participant incurs a Separation of Service. A mandatory distribution at the Participant’s required beginning date will be in lump sum.

7.7 MINIMUM DISTRIBUTION REQUIREMENTS . The Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to distribute a Participant’s Vested Account Balance by payment in a lump sum, except as otherwise elected by the Committee under Section 7.4b. Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to the contrary, all distributions to a Participant or a Participant’s Beneficiary shall be determined and made in accordance with Code § 401(a) (9) and the Treasury regulations under Code § 401(a)(9). The Plan Administrator may not direct the Trustee to distribute the Participant’s Vested Account Balance, nor may the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary elect to have the Trustee distribute his or her Vested Account Balance, under a method of payment which, as of the required beginning date, does not satisfy the minimum distribution requirements under Code § 401(a)(9) and the applicable Treasury regulations.

With respect to distributions under the Plan made for calendar years beginning on or after January 1, 2002, the Plan will apply the minimum distribution requirements of Code § 401(a)(9) in accordance with the final regulations under Code § 401(a)(9) that were issued on April 16, 2002, notwithstanding any provision to the contrary.

7.8 ANNUITY DISTRIBUTIONS TO PARTICIPANTS AND SURVIVING SPOUSES . The joint and survivor annuity requirements of the Code do not apply to this Plan. The Plan does not provide any annuity distributions to Participants. A transfer agreement described in Section 13.5 may not permit a plan which is subject to the provisions of Code § 417 to transfer assets to this Plan.

7.9 SPECIAL DISTRIBUTION AND PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS . Unless the Participant elects in writing to have the Trustee apply other distribution provisions of the Plan, or unless other distribution provisions of the Plan require earlier distribution of the Participant’s Account Balance, the Trustee must distribute the portion of the Participant’s Account Balance attributable to Company Stock (the “Eligible Portion”) no later than the time prescribed by this Section 7.9,

 

28


irrespective of any other provision of the Plan. The distribution provisions of this Section 7.9 are subject to the consent requirements of this Article VII.

a. If the Participant separates from Service by reason of the attainment of Normal Retirement Age, death or Disability, the Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to distribute the Eligible Portion not later than one year after the close of the Plan Year in which that event occurs.

b. If the Participant separates from Service for any reason other than by reason of the attainment of Normal Retirement Age, death or disability, the Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to distribute the Eligible Portion not later than one year after the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant incurs a Separation from Service. If the Participant resumes employment with the Company on or before the last day of the fifth Plan Year following the Plan Year of his or her Separation from Service, the distribution provisions of this paragraph b. do not apply.

For purposes of this Section 7.9, Company Stock does not include any Company Stock acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan until the close of the Plan Year in which the borrower repays the Exempt Loan in full.

Period of Payment . The Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to make distributions required under this Section 7.9 over a period not exceeding five years. If a Participant’s Eligible Portion exceeds $800,000, the maximum payment period is five years plus one additional year (but no more than five additional years) for each $160,000 (or fraction thereof) by which the Eligible Portion exceeds $800,000. The Plan Administrator will apply this Section 7.9 by adjusting the $800,000 and $160,000 limitations by the adjustment factor prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury under Code § 415(d) and other applicable provisions of the Code. In no event will the distribution period exceed the period permitted under Section 7.6 of the Plan.

7.10 DIRECT ROLLOVER OF ELIGIBLE ROLLOVER DISTRIBUTIONS .

a. Participant Election . Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a Participant’s election under this Section, a Participant may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, to have any portion of an eligible rollover distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the Participant in a direct rollover designation. For purposes of this Section 7.10, a Participant includes a Participant’s surviving spouse and the Participant’s spouse or former spouse who is an alternate payee.

b. Rollover and Withholding Notice . At least 30 days and not more than 90 days prior to the Trustee’s distribution of an eligible rollover distribution, the Plan Administrator must provide a written notice (including a summary notice as permitted under applicable Treasury regulations) explaining to the Participant the rollover option, the applicability of

 

29


mandatory 20 percent federal withholding to any amount not directly rollover over, and the recipient’s right to roll over within 60 days after the date of receipt of the distribution (“rollover notice.”) If applicable, the rollover notice also must explain the availability of income averaging and the exclusion if net unrealized appreciation. A recipient of an eligible rollover distribution (whether he or she elects a direct rollover or elects to receive the distribution) also may elect to receive distribution at any administratively practicable time which is earlier than 30 days following receipt of the rollover notice.

c. Default Rollover . In the event of a mandatory distribution greater than $1,000 in accordance with the provisions of this Section 7.2, Section 7.9 or any other provision of this Plan, if the Participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the Participant in a direct rollover or to receive the distribution directly in accordance with the applicable provision of this Plan, then the Plan Administrator will pay the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the Plan Administrator.

d. Definitions . The following definitions apply to this Section 7.10:

(1) Eligible Rollover Distribution . An eligible rollover distribution is any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the distributee, except that an eligible rollover distribution does not include:

(a) any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the distributee or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the distributee and the distributee’s designated beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten years or more;

(b) any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under § 401(a)(9) of the Code;

(c) the portion of any distribution that is not includible in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to Company Stock); and

(2) Eligible Retirement Plan . An eligible retirement plan is an individual retirement account described in § 408(a) of the Code, an individual retirement annuity described in § 408(b) of the Code, an annuity plan described in § 403(a) of the Code or a qualified trust described in § 401(a) of the Code that accepts the distributee’s eligible rollover distribution. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, an eligible retirement plan shall also mean an annuity contract described in Code § 403(b) and an eligible plan under Code § 457(b) which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political

 

30


subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this Plan. However, in the case of an eligible rollover distribution to the surviving spouse, an eligible retirement plan is an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity. This definition of eligible retirement plan shall also apply in the case of a distribution to a surviving spouse, or to a spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order as defined in Code § 415(p).

(3) Distributee . A distributee includes an Employee or former Employee and, in addition, the Employee’s or former Employee’s surviving spouse and the Employee’s or former Employee’s spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order as defined with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse.

(4) Direct Rollover . A direct rollover is a payment by the Plan to the eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee.

(5) Mandatory Distribution . A mandatory distribution is a distribution to a Participant that is made without the Participant’s consent and is made to the Participant before he or she attains the older of age 62 or Normal Retirement Age.

7.11 DISTRIBUTIONS UNDER DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDERS . Nothing contained in this Plan prevents the Trustee, in accordance with the direction of the Plan Administrator, from complying with the provisions of a qualified domestic relations order (or “QDRO”) as defined in Code § 414(p). This Plan specifically permits distribution to an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order at any time, irrespective of whether the Participant has attained his or her earliest retirement age (as defined under Code § 414(p)) under the Plan. A distribution to an alternate payee prior to the Participant’s attainment of earliest retirement age is available only if: (a) the QDRO specifies distribution at that time or permits an agreement between the Plan and the alternate payee to authorize an earlier distribution; and (b) if the present value of the alternate payee’s benefits under the Plan exceeds $1,000, and the QDRO requires that the alternate payee consent to any distribution occurring prior to the Participant’s attainment of the earliest retirement age. Nothing in this Section 7.11 permits a Participant a right to receive distribution at a time otherwise not permitted under the Plan nor does it permit the alternate payee to receive a form of payment not permitted under the Plan.

The Plan Administrator must establish reasonable procedures to determine the qualified status of a domestic relations order. Upon receiving a domestic relations order, the Plan Administrator promptly will notify the Participant and any alternate payee named in the order, in writing, of the receipt of the order and Plan’s procedures for determining the qualified status of the order. Within a reasonable period of time after receiving the domestic relations order, the Plan Administrator must determine the qualified status of the order and must notify the Participant and each alternate payee, in writing, of its determination. The Plan Administrator must provide notice under this paragraph by mailing to the individual’s address specified in the domestic relations order, or in a manner consistent with Department of Labor regulations.

 

31


If any portion of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance is payable during the period the Plan Administrator is making its determination of the qualified status of the domestic relations order, the Plan Administrator must make a separate accounting of the amounts payable. If the Plan Administrator determines the QDRO is a qualified domestic relations order within eighteen (18) months of the date amounts first are payable following receipt of the order, the Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to distribute the payable amounts in accordance with the QDRO. If the Plan Administrator does not make its determination of the qualified status of the order within the eighteen (18) month determination period, the Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee to distribute the payable amounts in the manner the Plan would distribute if the order did not exist and shall apply the order prospectively if the Plan Administrator later determines the order is a QDRO.

To the extent it is not inconsistent with the provisions of the qualified domestic relations order, the Plan Administrator may direct the Trustee to invest any partitioned amount in a segregated subaccount or separate account and to invest the account in Federally insured, interest-bearing savings accounts or time deposits (or a combination of both), or in other fixed income investments. A segregated subaccount remains a part of the Trust, but it alone shares in any income it earns, and it alone bears any expense or loss it incurs. The Trustee will make any payment or distribution required under this Section 7.11 by separate benefit check or other separate distribution to the alternate payee(s).

7.12 DISTRIBUTION BEFORE SEPARATION FROM SERVICE AFTER ATTAINING AGE 62 . For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2006, a Participant who has attained age sixty-two (62) and remains employed by the Company shall have the right to elect within ninety (90) days after the close of the Plan Year during which the Participant attains age 62 and of any subsequent Plan Year to direct the Trustee in writing to distribute 25 percent of the value of the Participant’s Account Balance determined as of the Accounting Date of the Plan Year, reduced by the aggregate amount of such distributions that have previously been made pursuant to such an election, subject to the provisions of Code § 401(a)(36).

ARTICLE VIII

COMPANY ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS

8.1 INFORMATION TO COMMITTEE . The Company must supply current information to the Plan Administrator as to the name, date of birth, date of employment, annual compensation, leaves of absence, Years of Service and date of Separation from Service of each Employee who is, or who will be eligible to become, a Participant under the Plan, together with any other information which the Committee considers necessary. The Company’s records as to the current information the Company furnishes to the Plan Administrator are conclusive as to all persons.

 

32


8.2 NO LIABILITY . The Company assumes no obligation or responsibility or any of its Employees, Participants or Beneficiaries for any act of, or failure to act, on the part of its Committee or Trustee.

8.3 INDEMNITY OF COMMITTEE . The Company indemnifies and saves harmless the Plan Administrator and the members of the Committee, and each of them, from and against any and all loss resulting from liability to which the Plan Administrator or the members of the Committee may be subjected by reason of any act or conduct (except willful misconduct or gross negligence) in their official capacities in the administration of this Trust or Plan or both, including all expenses reasonably incurred in their defense, in case the Company fails to provide such defense. The indemnification provisions of this Section 8.3 do not relieve the Plan Administrator or any Plan Administrator member from any liability it may have under the Act for breach of a fiduciary duty. Furthermore, the Plan Administrator, members of the Committee and the Company may execute a letter agreement further delineating the indemnification agreement of this Section 8.3, provided the letter agreement must be consistent with and must not violate ERISA. The indemnification provisions of this Section 8.3 extend to the Trustee solely to the extent provided by a letter agreement executed by the Trustee and the Company.

ARTICLE IX

PARTICIPANT ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS

9.1 BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION . Any Participant may from time to time designate, in writing, any person or persons, contingently or successively, to whom the Trustee shall pay his or her Vested Account Balance on event of the Participant’s death and the Participant may designate the time of payment. The Plan Administrator shall prescribe the form for the written designation of Beneficiary and, upon the Participant’s filing the form with the Plan Administrator, the form effectively revokes all designations filed prior to that date by the same Participant.

A married Participant’s Beneficiary designation is not valid unless the Participant’s spouse consents, in writing, to the Beneficiary designation. The spouse’s consent must acknowledge the effect of that consent and a notary public or the Plan Administrator (or its representative) must witness that consent. The espousal consent requirements of this paragraph do not apply if: (a) the Participant and his or her spouse are not married throughout the one year period ending on the date of the Participant’s death; (b) the Participant’s spouse is the Participant’s sole primary beneficiary; (c) the Plan Administrator is not able to locate the Participant’s spouse; (d) the Participant is legally separated or has been abandoned (within the meaning of applicable state law) and the Participant has a court order to that effect; or (e) other circumstances exist under which the Secretary of the Treasury will excuse the consent requirement. If the Participant’s spouse is legally incompetent to give consent, the spouse’s legal guardian (even if the guardian is the Participant) may give consent.

9.2 NO BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION . If a Participant fails to name a Beneficiary in accordance with Section 9.1, or if the Beneficiary named predeceases the Participant or dies before complete distribution of the Participant’s Account Balance as prescribed by the Participant’s

 

33


Beneficiary form, then the Trustee will pay the Participant’s Account Balance in accordance with Section 7.2 in the following order of priority to:

a. the Participant’s surviving spouse;

b. the Participant’s surviving children, including adopted children, in equal shares;

c. the Participant’s surviving parents, in equal shares; or

d. the legal representative of the estate of the last to die of the Participant and his or her Beneficiary.

The Plan Administrator will direct the Trustee as to the method and to whom the Trustee will make payment under this Section 9.2.

9.3 PERSONAL DATA TO COMMITTEE . Each Participant and each Beneficiary of a deceased Participant must furnish to the Plan Administrator such evidence, data or information as the Plan Administrator considers necessary or desirable for the purpose of administering the Plan. The provisions of this Plan are effective for the benefit of each Participant upon the condition precedent that each Participant will furnish promptly full, true and complete evidence, data and information when requested by the Plan Administrator, provided the Plan Administrator advises each Participant of the effect of his or her failure to comply with its request.

9.4 ADDRESS FOR NOTIFICATION . Each Participant and each Beneficiary of a deceased Participant shall file with the Plan Administrator from time to time, in writing, his or her post office address and any change of post office address. Any communication, statement or notice addressed to a Participant, or Beneficiary, at his or her last post office address filed with the Plan Administrator, or as shown on the records of the Company, binds the Participant, or Beneficiary, for all purposes of this Plan.

9.5 ASSIGNMENT OR ALIENATION . Subject to Code § 414(p) relating to qualified domestic relations orders, neither a Participant nor a Beneficiary may anticipate, assign or alienate (either at law or in equity) any benefit provided under the Plan, and the Trustee will not recognize any such anticipation, assignment or alienation. Furthermore, a benefit under the Plan is not subject to attachment, garnishment, levy, execution or other legal or equitable process.

9.6 NOTICE OF CHANGE IN TERMS . The Plan Administrator, within the time prescribed by ERISA and the applicable regulations, must furnish all Participants and Beneficiaries a summary description of any material amendment to the Plan or notice of discontinuance of the Plan and all other information required by ERISA to be furnished without charge.

 

34


9.7 LITIGATION AGAINST THE TRUST . A court of competent jurisdiction may authorize any appropriate equitable relief to redress violations of ERISA or to enforce any provisions of ERISA or the terms of the Plan. A fiduciary may receive reimbursement of expenses properly and actually incurred in the performance of its duties with the Plan.

9.8 INFORMATION AVAILABLE . Any Participant in the Plan or any Beneficiary may examine copies of the Plan description, latest annual report, any bargaining agreement, this Agreement or any other instrument under which the Plan was established or is operated. The Plan Administrator will maintain all of the items listed in this Section 9.8 in its office, or in such other place or places as it may designate from time to time in order to comply with the regulations issued under ERISA, for examination during reasonable business hours. Upon the written consent of a Participant or Beneficiary, the Plan Administrator will furnish him or her with a copy of any item listed in this Section 9.8. The Plan Administrator may make a reasonable charge to the requesting person for the copy so furnished.

9.9 APPEAL PROCEDURE FOR DENIAL OF BENEFITS . The Plan Administrator shall provide adequate notice in writing to any Participant or to any Beneficiary (“Claimant”) whose claim for benefits under the Plan the Plan Administrator has denied. The Plan Administrator’s notice to the Claimant must set forth:

a. the specific reason for the denial;

b. specific references to pertinent Plan provisions on which the Plan Administrator based its denial;

c. a description of any additional material and information needed for the Claimant to perfect his or her claim and an explanation of why the material or information is needed; and

d. that any appeal the Claimant wishes to make of the adverse determination must be in writing to the Plan Administrator within seventy-five (75) days after receipt of the Plan Administrator’s notice of denial of benefits. The Plan Administrator’s notice must further advise the Claimant that his or her failure to appeal the action to the Plan Administrator in writing within the seventy-five (75) day period will render the Plan Administrator’s determination final, binding and conclusive.

If the Claimant should appeal to the Plan Administrator, the Claimant, or his or her duly authorized representative, may submit, in writing, whatever issues and comments he or she feels are pertinent. The Claimant, or his or her duly authorized representative, may review pertinent Plan documents. The Plan Administrator will re-examine all facts related to the appeal and make a final determination as to whether the denial of benefits is justified under the circumstances. The Plan Administrator will advise the Claimant of its decision within sixty (60) days of the Claimant’s written request for review, unless special circumstances (such as a hearing) would make the rendering of a

 

35


decision within the sixty (60) day limit unfeasible, but in no event may the Plan Administrator render a decision respecting a denial for a claim for benefits later than one hundred twenty (120) days after its receipt of a request for review.

The Plan Administrator’s notice of denial of benefits must identify the name of each member of the Plan Administrator and the name and address of the Plan Administrator member to whom the Claimant may forward his or her appeal.

9.10 PARTICIPANT DIRECTION OF INVESTMENT . Except as provided in this Section 9.10, a Participant does not have the right to direct the Trustee with respect to the investment or reinvestment of the assets comprising the Participant’s Account. Each Qualified Participant may direct the Trustee as to the investment of 25 percent of the value of the Participant’s Account Balance attributable to Company Stock (the “Eligible Account Balance”) within 90 days after the Accounting Date of each Plan Year (to the extent a direction amount exceeds the amount to which a prior direction under this Section 9.10 applies) during the Participant’s Qualified Election Period. For the last Plan Year in the Participant’s Qualified Election Period, the Trustee will substitute “50 percent” for “25 percent” in the immediately preceding sentence. The Qualified Participant must make his or her direction to the Trustee in writing, the direction may be effective no later than 180 days after the close of the Plan Year to which the direction applies, and the direction must specify which, if any, of the investment options the Participant selects.

A Qualified Participant may choose one of the following investment options:

a. The distribution of the portion of his or her Eligible Account Balance covered by the election. The Trustee will make the distribution within 90 days after the last day of the period during which the Qualified Participant may make the election. The provisions of this Plan applicable to a distribution of Company Stock apply to this investment option.

b. The direct transfer of the portion of his or her Eligible Account Balance covered by the election to another qualified plan of the Company which accepts such transfers, but only if the transferee plan permits employee-directed investment and does not invest in Company Stock to a substantial degree. The Trustee will make the direct transfer no later than 90 days after the last day of the period during which the Qualified Participant may make the election.

For purposes of this Section 9.10, the following definitions apply:

(1) “Qualified Participant” means a Participant who has attained age 55 and who has completed at least 10 years of participation in the Plan, subject to the terms of Code § 401(a)(28)(B). A “year of participation” means a Plan Year in which the Participant was eligible for an allocation of Company contributions, irrespective of whether the Company actually contributed to the Plan for that Plan Year.

 

36


(2) “Qualified Election Period” means the six (6) Plan Year period beginning with the Plan Year in which the Participant first becomes a Qualified Participant, subject to the terms of Code § 401(a)(28)(B).

A Participant’s right under this Section 9.10 to direct the investment of his or her Account applies solely to Company Stock acquired by the Plan after December 31, 1986.

ARTICLE X

THE COMMITTEE

10.1 GENERAL . The general administration of the Plan and responsibility for carrying out the provisions thereof shall be placed in the Committee. The Board of Directors of the Company shall determine the number of members of the Committee and shall appoint the members of the Committee who will remain in office at the will of such Board of Directors. The Committee shall have all the powers necessary or proper to accomplish the administration of this Plan, including, without limitation, the powers set forth in this Agreement.

Any person hereinafter appointed a member of the Committee shall signify his or her acceptance to the Company. The Company will apprise the Trustee concerning changes in the membership of the Committee. Any member of the Committee may resign by notifying the Company of his or her resignation. In case of a vacancy in the membership of the Committee, the remaining members of the Committee may exercise any and all of the powers, authority, duties and discretion conferred upon the Committee pending the filling of the vacancy. Vacancies in the membership of the Committee shall be filled by resolution of the Board of Directors of the Company.

10.2 COMPENSATION AND EXPENSES . Members of the Committee shall serve without compensation. If liability insurance is purchased for any members of the Committee with the consent of the Company’s Board of Directors, it shall be paid by the Company. The Committee may appoint such other agents, who need not be members of the Committee, as the Committee deems necessary for the performance of its duties. The compensation of such agents shall be determined by the Committee with the consent of the Company’s Board of Directors. The compensation of such agents plus proper expenses of the Committee will be paid by the Company.

10.3 POWERS . The Committee has the following powers and duties:

a. To direct the Trustee in regard to investment of the Trust Fund as provided in Section 11.3;

b. To determine the rights of eligibility of an Employee to participate in the Plan, the value of a Participant’s Plan Benefit and the Vested percentage of each Participant’s Account Balance;

 

37


c. To adopt rules of procedure and regulations necessary for the proper and efficient administration of the Plan provided the rules are not inconsistent with the terms of this Agreement;

d. To construe and enforce the terms of the Plan and the rules and regulations it adopts, including interpretation of this Agreement and any document related to the administration of the Plan;

e. To deliver, as soon as reasonably convenient after the contributions of the Company have been determined for the year, to the Trustee a record disclosing the names of Participants, the exact amount of the Company’s contribution allocated to their respective Accounts and the applicable amount of Compensation for the Plan Year.

f. To notify the Trustee of a Participant’s or Beneficiary’s right to a distribution of Plan Benefits, including the Vested percentage of Plan Benefits to be paid and the distribution options available, and to direct the Trustee as respects the crediting and distribution of the Trust;

g. To review and render decisions respecting a claim for (or denial of a claim for) a benefit under the Plan;

h. To furnish the Company with information which the Company may require for tax or other purposes;

i. To engage the service of agents and counsel and such clerical, medical, accounting and actuarial services as the Committee may deem advisable to carry out the provisions of the Plan and to perform its duties;

j. To engage the services of an Investment Manager or managers (as defined in ERISA Section 3(38)), each of whom shall have full power and authority to manage, acquire or dispose (or direct the Trustee with respect to acquisition or disposition) of any Plan asset under its control;

k. to adjust and settle all claims, on behalf of all persons having or claiming any interest in the Trust or under the Plan, against the Trust; and

l. To make any other determinations the Committee believes are necessary and advisable for the administration of the Plan.

The Committee must exercise all of its powers, duties and discretion under the Plan in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner. Any determination made by the Committee is final and binding upon any affected person.

 

38


10.4 AVAILABILITY OF PLAN DOCUMENTS . The Committee shall make available to each Participant hereunder a copy of this Plan at the principal office of the Company during business hours. The Committee shall also issue explanatory material to the Participants describing the Plan. In the event of any conflict between the terms of the Plan as set forth in this Agreement and as set forth in such material, this Agreement shall control.

10.5 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY . Any member of the Committee shall be free from all liability, joint or several, for their acts and conduct, and for the acts and conduct of their agents, in the administration of the Plan, and the Company shall indemnify and save them and each of them harmless from any and all liability for their acts and conduct or the acts and conduct of their agents in their official capacity, except as prohibited by ERISA Section 410 or to the extent that such liability results from their own willful misconduct.

10.6 FUNDING POLICY . The Committee will review, not less often than annually, all pertinent Employee information and Plan data in order to establish the funding policy of the Plan and to determine the appropriate methods of carrying out the Plan’s objectives. The Committee must communicate periodically, as it deems appropriate, to the Trustee and to any Plan Investment Manager the Plan’s short-term and long-term financial needs so investment policy can be coordinated with Plan financial requirements.

10.7 MANNER OF ACTION . The Committee shall hold meetings for the purpose of acting upon all matters within the scope of its authority upon such notice, at such place or places, and such time or times as it may from time to time determine. A majority of the members of the Committee at the time in office shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business. A secretary may be appointed by the Committee (who may or may not be a member of such Committee) to keep records of all meetings and acts of the Committee and to have custody of all documents, the preservation of which shall be necessary or convenient in the efficient operation of the Plan. An assistant secretary may also be appointed by the Committee.

All resolutions adopted or other actions taken by the Committee and any direction to the Trustee relating to investments in the Trust Fund shall be by the affirmative action of a majority of the Committee members; but any direction to the Trustee not related to investments in the Trust Fund may be signed by any designated member of said Committee. No member of the Committee shall participate in any decision of the Committee solely affecting his or her own rights or benefits under the Plan.

The decision of a majority of the members appointed and qualified controls.

10.8 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE . The Committee may authorize any one (1) of its members, or its secretary, to sign on its behalf any notices, directions, applications, certificates, consents, approvals, waivers, letters or other documents. The Committee must evidence this authority by an instrument signed by all members and filed with the Trustee.

 

39


10.9 INTERESTED MEMBER . No member of the Committee may decide or determine any matter concerning the distribution, nature or method of settlement of his or her own rights or benefits under the Plan, except in exercising an election available to that member in his or her capacity as a Participant.

10.10 INDIVIDUAL ACCOUNTS . The Committee will maintain, or direct the Trustee to maintain, a separate Account, or multiple separate Accounts, in the name of each Participant to reflect the Participant’s Account Balance. The Committee will maintain for a Participant one Account designated as the “Company Stock Account” to reflect a Participant’s interest in Company Stock held by the Trust and another Account designated as the “General Investments Account” to reflect the Participant’s interest in the Trust Fund attributable to assets other than Company Stock. If a Participant re-enters the Plan subsequent to his or her having a Forfeiture Break in Service (as defined in Section 6.7), the Committee, or the Trustee, must maintain a separate Account for the Participant’s pre-Forfeiture Break in Service Account Balance and a separate Account for his or her post-Forfeiture Break in Service Account Balance unless the Participant’s entire Account Balance under the Plan is 100 percent Nonforfeitable.

The Committee will make its allocations, or request the Trustee to make its allocations, to the Accounts of the Participants in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.12. The Committee may direct the Trustee to maintain a temporary segregated investment Account in the name of a Participant to prevent a distortion of income, gain or loss allocations under Section 10.12. The Committee must maintain records of its activities.

10.11 VALUE OF PARTICIPANT’S ACCOUNT BALANCE . The value of each Participant’s Account Balance consists of that proportion of the net worth (at Fair Market Value) of the Trust Fund which the net credit balance in his or her Account bears to the total net credit balance in the Accounts of all Participants as of the applicable Accounting Date. For purposes of a distribution under the Plan, the value of a Participant’s Account Balance attributable to his or her General Investments Account is its value as of the Accounting Date (or the “valuation date” as defined in Section 10.12) immediately preceding the date of distribution.

10.12 ALLOCATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF NET INCOME AND GAIN OR LOSS TO PARTICIPANTS’ ACCOUNTS . A “valuation date” under this Plan is each Accounting Date. As of each valuation date, the Committee will adjust the General Investment Accounts to reflect net income, gain or loss since the last valuation date. The valuation period is the period beginning the day after the last valuation date and ending on the current valuation date.

a. Company Stock Account . As of the Accounting Date of each Plan Year, the Committee first will reduce Company Stock Accounts for any Forfeitures arising under Section 6.8 and then will credit the Company Stock Account maintained for each Participant with the Participant’s allocable share of Company Stock (including fractional shares) purchased and paid for by the Trust or contributed in kind to the Trust, with any Forfeitures of Company Stock and with any stock dividends on Company Stock allocated to his or her

 

40


Company Stock Account. The Committee will allocate Company Stock acquired with an Exempt Loan under Section 11.3b. in accordance with that Section, subject, however, to the provisions of paragraph c. of this Section 10.12. Except as otherwise specifically provided in Section 11.3b., the Committee will base allocations to the Participant’s Accounts on dollar values expressed as shares of Company Stock or on the basis of actual shares where there is a single class of Company Stock. In making a forfeiture reduction under this Section 10.11, the Committee, to the extent possible, first will forfeit from a Participant’s General Investments Account before making a forfeiture from his or her Company Stock Account.

b. General Investments Account . The allocation provisions of this paragraph apply to all Participant General Investment Accounts other than segregated investment Accounts. The Committee first will adjust the Participant General Investment Accounts, as those Accounts stood at the beginning of the current valuation period, by reducing the Accounts for any Forfeitures arising under the Plan for amounts charged during the valuation period to any Accounts in accordance with Section 10.14 (relating to distributions) and for the amount of any General Investment Account which the Trustee has fully distributed since the immediately preceding valuation date. The Committee then, subject to the restoration allocation requirements of Section 6.3 or of Section 10.15, will allocate the net income, gain or loss pro rata to the adjusted Participant General Investment Accounts. The allocable net income, gain or loss is the net income (or net loss), including the increase or decrease in the Fair Market Value of assets, since the last valuation date. In making its allocation under this Section 10.12b. the Committee will exclude Company Stock and interest paid by the Trust on an Exempt Loan.

c. Dividends on Company Stock . The Committee will allocate any cash dividends the Company pays with respect to Company Stock to the General Investments Accounts of Participants in the same ratio, determined on the dividend declaration date, that Company Stock allocated to a Participant’s Company Stock Account bears to the Company Stock allocated to all Company Stock Accounts. The Committee will not allocate to the General Investments Accounts any cash dividends the Company directs the Trustee to apply to the payment of an Exempt Loan. If the Company directs the Trustee to apply cash dividends on Company Stock to the payment of an Exempt Loan, the Committee first will allocate the released Company Stock to the Participants’ Company Stock Accounts in the same ratio, determined on the dividend declaration date, that Company Stock allocated to a Participant’s Company Stock Account bears to the Company Stock allocated to all Company Stock Accounts. This first allocation of released Company Stock must equal the greater of: (1) the shares of released Company Stock equal to the Fair Market Value of the cash dividends attributable to the allocated Company Stock; or (2) the number of shares of all released Company Stock attributable to the cash dividends on allocated Company Stock. If any released Company Stock remains unallocated after the first allocation, the Committee will allocate these remaining released Company Stock under Section 5.02 as if the Company has made a Company contribution equal to the amount of the cash dividend attributable to the unallocated Company Stock.

 

41


d. Segregated Investment Accounts . A segregated investment Account receives all income it earns and bears all expense or loss it incurs. As of the valuation date, the Committee must reduce a segregated Account for any Forfeiture arising under Section 6.8 after the Committee has made all other allocations, changes or adjustments to the Account for the Plan Year.

e. Additional Rules . An Excess Amount or suspense account described in Part 2 of Article V does not share in the allocation of net income, gain or loss described in this Section 10.12b. This Section 10.12b. applies solely to the allocation of net income, gain or loss of the Trust. The Committee will allocate the Company contributions and Forfeitures, if any, in accordance with Article V. For this purpose, the Plan Administrator will allocate any gain or net income with respect to a Company contribution made during the Plan Year, but before the Accounting Date to which the contribution relates, as part of the Company contribution for that Plan Year.

f. Allocation Restriction . To the extent a shareholder sells Company Stock to the Trust and elects (with the consent of the Company) nonrecognition of gain under Code § 1042, the Committee will not, directly or indirectly, allocate under the Plan (or under any qualified plan of the Company), during the nonallocation period any portion of the purchased Company Stock to:

(1) the selling shareholder;

(2) the selling shareholder’s spouse, brothers or sisters (whether by the whole or half blood), ancestors or lineal descendants; or

(3) any shareholder owning (as determined under Code § 318(a)) more than 25 percent in value or 25 percent of the outstanding shares of any class of stock of the corporation which issues the Company Stock or of a corporation which is a Related Employer.

For purposes of this Section 10.12f., the term “Shareholder” includes the shareholder’s executor and the term “purchased Company Stock” includes any dividends or other income attributable to the purchased Company Stock and any amounts allocated in lieu of the purchased Company Stock. The allocation restrictions of this Section 10.12f. apply to a lineal descendant of a selling shareholder only to the extent the allocation of the purchased Company Stock otherwise allocable during the nonallocation period to all such lineal descendants would exceed, in the aggregate, 5 percent of the total purchased Company Stock unless any lineal descendant is, directly or indirectly, a more than 25 percent shareholder. The “nonallocation” period begins on the date of the sale of Company Stock and ends on the later of: (a) ten years after the sale date or (b) the date the Plan makes the final allocation of leverage Company Stock resulting from the final payment of the exempt loan.

 

42


10.13 INDIVIDUAL STATEMENT . As soon as practicable after the Accounting Date of each Plan Year but within the time prescribed by ERISA and the regulations under ERISA, the Committee will deliver to each Participant (and to each Beneficiary) a statement reflecting the condition of his or her Account Balance in the Trust as of that date and such other information ERISA requires be furnished the Participant or Beneficiary. No Participant, except a member of the Committee, has the right to inspect the records reflecting the Account of any other Participant.

10.14 ACCOUNT CHARGED . The Committee will charge all distributions made to a Participant or to his or her Beneficiary from his or her Account against the Account of the Participant when made. The Committee also will charge a Participant’s Account for any reasonable administrative expenses incurred by the Plan directly related to that Account.

10.15 LOST PARTICIPANTS . If the Committee is unable to locate any Participant or Beneficiary whose Account becomes distributable under Article VII or under Section 13.4 (a “Lost Participant”), the Committee will apply the provisions of this Section 10.15.

a. Attempt to Locate . The Committee will use one or more of the following methods to attempt to locate a lost Participant: (1) provide a distribution notice to the lost Participant at his/her last known address by certified or registered mail; (2) use of the IRS letter forwarding program under Rev. Proc. 94-22; (3) use of a commercial locator service, the internet or other general search method; or (4) use of the Social Security Administration search program.

b. Failure to Locate . If a lost Participant remains unlocated for six months following the date of the Committee first attempts to locate the lost Participant using one or more of the methods described in Section 10.15a., the Committee may forfeit the lost Participant’s Account. If the Committee will forfeit the lost Participant’s Account, the Forfeiture occurs at the end of the above-described six month period and the Committee will allocate the Forfeiture in accordance with Section 5.5. If a lost Participant whose Account was forfeited thereafter at any time but before the Plan has been terminated makes a claim for his/her forfeited Account, the Committee will restore the forfeited Account to the same dollar amount as the amount forfeited, unadjusted for net income, gains or losses occurring subsequent to the Forfeiture. The Committee will make the restoration in the Plan Year in which the lost Participant makes the claim, first from the amount, if any, of Forfeitures the Committee otherwise would allocate for the Plan Year, then from the amount, if any, of Trust net income or gain for the Plan Year and last from the amount or additional amount the Company contributes to the Plan for the Plan Year. The Committee will distribute the restored Account to the lost Participant not later than 60 days after the close of the Plan Year in which the Committee restores the forfeited Account.

c. Nonexclusivity and Uniformity . The provisions of this Section 10.15 are intended to provide permissible but not exclusive means for the Committee to administer the Accounts of lost Participants. The Committee may utilize any other reasonable method to

 

43


locate lost Participants and to administer the Accounts of lost Participants, including the default rollover under Section 7.10c. and such other methods as the Internal Revenue Service or the U.S. Department of Labor (“DOL”) may in the future specify. The Committee will apply this Section 10.15 in a reasonable, uniform and nondiscriminatory manner, but may in determining a specific course of action as to a particular Account, reasonably take into account differing circumstances such as the amount of a lost Participant’s Account, the expense in attempting to locate a lost Participant, the Committee’s ability to establish and the expense of establishing a rollover IRA, and other factors. The Committee may charge to the Account of a lost Participant the reasonable expenses incurred under this Section 10.15 and which are associated with the lost Participant’s Account.

10.16 PLAN CORRECTION . The Committee in conjunction with the Company may undertake such correction of Plan errors as the Committee deems necessary, including correction to preserve tax qualification of the Plan under Code § 401(a) or to correct a fiduciary breach under ERISA. Without limiting the Committee’s authority under the prior sentence, the Committee, as it determines to be reasonable and appropriate, may undertake correction of Plan document, operational, demographic and employer eligibility failures under a method described in the Plan or under the Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System (“EPCRS”) or any successor program to EPCRS. The Committee, as it determines to be reasonable and appropriate, also may undertake or assist the appropriate fiduciary or plan official in undertaking correction of a fiduciary breach, including correction under the Voluntary Fiduciary Correction Program (“VFC”) or any successor program to VFC.

10.17 NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR OTHERS . Except as required under ERISA, the Committee has no responsibility or obligation under the Plan to Participants or Beneficiaries for any act (unless the Committee also serves in such capacities) required of the Company, the Trustee or of any other service provider to the Plan. The Committee is not responsible to collect any required plan contribution or to determine the correctness or deductibility or any Company contribution. The Committee in administering the Plan is entitled to, but is not required to rely upon, information which a Participant, Beneficiary, Trustee, the Company, a Plan service provider or a representatives thereof provides to the Committee.

ARTICLE XI

TRUSTEE POWERS AND DUTIES

11.1 ACCEPTANCE . The Trustee accepts the Trust created under this Agreement and agrees to perform the obligations imposed. The Trustee shall provide bond for the faithful performance of its duties under the Trust to the extent required by ERISA.

11.2 RECEIPT OF CONTRIBUTIONS . The Trustee is accountable to the Company for the funds contributed to it by the Company, but does not have any duty to see that the contributions received comply with the provisions of the Plan. The Trustee is not obliged to collect any contributions from the Company, nor is it obliged to see that funds deposited with it are deposited according to the provisions of the Plan.

 

44


11.3 TRUSTEE’S INVESTMENT .

a. Subject to the directions of the Committee, the Trustee has discretion and authority with regard to the investment of the Trust Fund, except with respect to a Plan asset under the control or direction of a properly appointed Investment Manager. The Trustee must coordinate its investment policy with Plan financial needs as communicated to it by the Committee. The Trustee is authorized and empowered, but not by way of limitation, with the following powers, rights and duties:

(1) unless directed otherwise by the Committee, to invest the Trust Fund primarily in Company Stock (“primarily” meaning the authority to hold and to acquire not more than 100 percent of the Trust Fund in Company Stock) and to invest any part or all of the Trust Fund in any common or preferred stocks, open-end or closed-end mutual funds, put and call options, traded on a national exchange, United States retirement plan bonds, corporate bonds, debentures, convertible debentures, commercial paper, U.S. Treasury Bills, U.S. Treasury Notes and other direct or indirect obligations of the United States Government or its agencies, improved or unimproved real estate situated in the United States, limited partnerships, insurance contracts of any type, mortgages, notes or other property of any kind, real or personal, and to buy or sell options on common stock on a nationally recognized exchange with or without holding the underlying common stock, and to make any other investments the Trustee deems appropriate, as a prudent person would do under like circumstances with due regard for the purposes of this Plan. Any investment made or retained by the Trustee in good faith is proper but must be of a kind (with the exception of Company Stock) constituting a diversification considered by law suitable for trust investments.

(2) to retain in cash so much of the Trust Fund as it may deem advisable to satisfy liquidity needs of the Plan and to deposit any cash held in the Trust Fund in a bank account at reasonable interest. If the Trustee is a bank or similar financial institution supervised by the United States or by a state, this paragraph (b) includes specific authority to invest in any type of deposit of the Trustee (or of a bank related to the Trustee within the meaning of Code § 414(b)) at a reasonable rate of interest or in a common trust fund (the provisions of which govern the investment of such assets and which the Plan incorporates by this reference) as described in Code § 584 which the Trustee (or its affiliate as defined in Code § 1504) maintains exclusively for the collective investment of money contributed by the bank in its capacity as Trustee and which conforms to the rules of the Comptroller of the Currency;

(3) to borrow funds from such sources, including, without limitation, the Trustee, on such terms and conditions and for such security as directed by the

 

45


Committee and to repay such indebtedness and the cost thereof out of dividend income, contributions and, if necessary, proceeds from the sale of assets of the Trust Fund;

(4) to manage, sell, contract to sell, grant options to purchase, convey, exchange, transfer, abandon, improve, repair, insure, lease for any term even though commencing in the future or extending beyond the term of the Trust, and otherwise deal with all property, real or personal, in such manner, for such considerations and on such terms and conditions as the Trustee decides;

(5) to credit and distribute the Trust as directed by the Committee. The Trustee is not obliged to inquire as to whether any payee or distributee is entitled to any payment or whether the distribution is proper or within the terms of the Plan, or as to the manner of making any payment or distribution. The Trustee is accountable only to the Committee for any payment or distribution made by it in good faith on the order or direction of the Committee;

(6) to issues notes or other obligations or otherwise borrow money, to assume indebtedness, extend mortgages and encumber by mortgage or pledge;

(7) to compromise, contest, contest, arbitrate or abandon claims and demands, in its discretion;

(8) to vote, subject to Section 11.16 and applicable provisions of the Code, all voting stock held by the Trust Fund;

(9) to lease for oil, gas and other mineral purposes and to create mineral severances by grant or reservation; to pool or unitize interests in oil, gas and other minerals; and to enter into operating agreements and to execute division and transfer orders;

(10) to hold any securities or other property in the name of the Trustee or its nominee, with depositories or agent depositories, or in another form as it may deem best, with or without disclosing the trust relationship;

(11) to perform any and all other acts in its judgment necessary or appropriate for the proper and advantageous management, investment and distribution of the Trust;

(12) to retain any funds or property subject to any dispute without liability for the payment of interest, and to decline to make payment or delivery of the funds or property until final adjudication is made by a court of competent jurisdiction;

 

46


(13) to file all tax returns required of the Trustee;

(14) to furnish to the Company and the Committee an annual statement of account showing the condition of the Trust Fund and all investment, receipts, disbursements and other transactions effected by the Trustee during the Plan Year covered by the statement and also stating the assets of the Trust held at the end of the Plan Year, which accounts shall be conclusive on all persons, including the Company and the Committee, except as to any act or transaction concerning which the Company and the Committee files with the Trustee written exceptions or objections within ninety (90) days after the receipt of the accounts, or for which ERISA authorizes a longer period within which to object; and

(15) to begin, maintain or defend any litigation necessary in connection with the administration of the Plan, except that the Trustee is not obliged or required to do so unless indemnified to its satisfaction.

b. Exempt Loan . This Section 11.3b. specifically authorizes the Trustee to enter into an Exempt Loan transaction. The following terms and conditions will apply to any Exempt Loan:

(1) The Trustee will use the proceeds of the loan within a reasonable time after receipt only for any or all of the following purposes: (a) to acquire Company Stock, (b) to repay such loan, or (c) to repay a prior Exempt Loan. Except as provided under Article XIII, no Company Stock Security acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan may be subject to a put, call or other option, or buy-sell or similar arrangement while held by and when distributed from this Plan, whether or not this Plan is then an employee stock ownership plan.

(2) The interest rate of the loan may not be more than a reasonable rate of interest.

(3) Any collateral the Trustee pledges to the creditor must consist only of the assets purchased by the borrowed funds and those assets the Trust used as collateral on the prior Exempt Loan repaid with the proceeds of the current Exempt Loan.

(4) The creditor may have no recourse against the Trust under the loan except with respect to such collateral given for the loan, contributions (other than contributions of Company Stock) that the Company makes to the Trust to meet its obligations under the loan, and earnings attributable to such collateral and the investment of such contributions. The payment made with respect to an Exempt Loan by the Plan during a Plan Year must not exceed an amount equal to the sum of such contributions and earnings received during or prior to the year less such payments in

 

47


prior years. The Committee and the Trustee must account separately for such contributions and earnings in the books of account of the Plan until the Trust repays the loan.

(5) In the event of default upon the loan, the value of Plan assets transferred in satisfaction of the loan must not exceed the amount of the default, and if the lender is a Disqualified Person, the loan must provide for transfer of Plan assets upon default only upon and to the extent of the failure of the Plan to meet the payment schedule of the loan.

(6) The Trustee must add and maintain all assets acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan in a suspense Account referred to in this Article XI as the “Exempt Loan Suspense Account.” Separate suspense accounts shall be maintained if more than one loan is present, and separate calculations shall be made for each loan. In withdrawing assets from the Suspense Account, the Trustee will apply the provisions of Treas. Reg. §§ 54.4975-7(b)(8) and (15) as if all securities in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account were encumbered.

(7) During the duration of the Exempt Loan, upon the payment of any portion of the loan, the Trustee will effect the release of assets in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account from encumbrances. For each Plan Year during the duration of the loan, the number of shares of Company Stock released must equal the number of encumbered shares of Company Stock held immediately before release for the current Plan Year multiplied by a fraction. The numerator of the fraction is the amount of principal paid for the Plan Year. The denominator of the fraction is the sum of the numerator plus the principal to be paid for all future Plan Years. The number of future Plan Years under the loan must be definitely ascertainable and must be determined without taking into account any possible extension or renewal periods. If the interest rate under the loan is variable, the interest to be paid in future Plan Years must be computed by using the interest rate applicable as of the end of the Plan Year. If collateral includes more than one class of Company Stock, the number of shares of Company Stock of each class to be released for a Plan Year must be determined by applying the same fraction to each such class. The Committee will allocate assets withdrawn from the Exempt Loan Suspense Account to the Accounts of Participants who otherwise share in the allocation of the Company’s contribution for the Plan Year for which the Trustee has paid the portion of the loan resulting in the release of the assets. The Committee consistently will make this allocation as of each Accounting Date on the basis of non-monetary units, taking into account the relative Compensation of all such Participants for such Plan Year.

The foregoing allocation method shall apply only if the loan provides for annual payments of principal and interest at a cumulative rate that is not less rapid at any time than level annual payments for such amounts for ten (10) years. Further,

 

48


shares released from encumbrance shall be determined solely with reference to principal payments, and interest included in any payments shall be disregarded only to the extent that the interest would be determined to be interest under standard loan amortization tables. If at any time, by reason of a renewal, extension or refinancing, the sum of the expired duration of the exempt loan, the renewal period, the extension period and the duration of a new exempt loan exceeds ten (10) years, or if, at any time, the other terms and conditions of this subparagraph (7) are not met, then from such time shares of Company Stock shall be released pursuant to subparagraph (8) below.

(8) If the allocation method set forth in subparagraph (7) is not applicable, then upon the payment of any portion of the loan, the Trustee will effect the release of assets in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account from encumbrances in accordance with this subparagraph (8). For each Plan Year during the duration of the loan, the number of shares of Company Stock released must equal the number of encumbered shares of Company Stock held immediately before release for the current Plan Year multiplied by a fraction. The numerator of the fraction is the amount of principal and interest paid for the Plan Year. The denominator of the fraction is the sum of the numerator plus the principal and interest to be paid for all future Plan Years. The number of future Plan Years under the loan must be definitely ascertainable and must be determined without taking into account any possible extension or renewal periods. If the interest rate under the loan is variable, the interest to be paid in future Plan Years must be computed by using the interest rate applicable as of the end of the Plan Year. If collateral includes more than one class of Company Stock, the number of shares of Company Stock of each class to be released for a Plan Year must be determined by applying the same fraction to each such class. The Committee will allocate assets withdrawn from the Exempt Loan Suspense Account to the Accounts of Participants who otherwise share in the allocation of the Company’s contribution for the Plan Year for which the Trustee has paid the portion of the loan resulting in the release of the assets. The Committee consistently will make this allocation as of each Accounting Date on the basis of non-monetary units, taking into account the relative Compensation of all such Participants for such Plan Year.

(9) Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, if the Plan acquires shares of Company Stock with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan, and the Lender for such Exempt Loan utilizes the interest exclusion available under Code § 133, then each Participant shall be entitled to direct the Trustee as to the manner in which shares of Company Stock allocated to the Participant’s Account which were acquired with the proceeds of such Exempt Loan are to be voted on all matters with respect to which such shares are entitled to vote.

(10) The loan must be for a specific term and may not be payable at the demand of any person except in the case of default.

 

49


(11) Notwithstanding the fact this Plan ceases to be an employee stock ownership plan, Company Stock acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan will continue after the Trustee repays the loan to be subject to the provisions of Treas. Reg §§ 54.4975-7(b)(4), (10), (11) and (12) relating to put, call or other options and to buy-sell or similar arrangements, except to the extent these regulations are inconsistent with Code § 409(h).

(12) Any Company Stock acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan, or otherwise, must be subject to a put option which is exercisable only by a Participant or his or her Beneficiary. Any such Company Stock acquired may be put to the Company. The Plan may assume the rights and obligations of the Company at the time that the put option is exercised. The put option shall be exercisable during the period beginning on the date that the Company Stock is distributed and ending fifteen (15) months following such date. Such period shall not include any period during which the distributee is unable to exercise the put option because the party bound by the put option is prohibited from honoring it by applicable federal or state law. The distributee of the Company Stock must notify the Company in writing the put option is being exercised. The price at which a put option is exercisable is the Fair Market Value of the Company Stock as determined under Section 3.17. That price may be paid by the Company (or the Plan) in five substantially equal annual installments, the first of which shall be paid within thirty (3) days after the put option is exercised. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the payment period may be extended to the earlier of ten years from the date the put option is exercised or the date on which the Plan repays the proceeds of the Exempt Loan used by the Plan to acquire the security subject to the put option. If the Plan repays an Exempt Loan used or if the Plan ceases to be an employee stock ownership plan, the protections and rights enumerated above shall continue to exist.

(13) Company Stock acquired with the proceeds of an Exempt Loan or otherwise shall be subject to a right of first refusal first by the Company and then by the Plan. The selling price of the Company Stock and any other terms of this right shall not be less favorable to the seller than the greater of:

(a) Fair Market Value as defined in Section 3.17; or

(b) the purchase price and other terms offered by a buyer (other than the Company or the Plan) making a good faith offer to purchase the Company Stock.

This right to first refusal shall expire fourteen (14) days after the stockholder gives written notice to both the Company and the Plan that an offer by a third party to purchase the security has been received.

 

50


11.4 RECORDS AND STATEMENTS . The records of the Trustee pertaining to the Plan must be open to the inspection of the Committee and the Company at all reasonable times and may be audited from time to time by any person or persons as the Company and Committee may specify in writing. The Trustee shall furnish the Committee with whatever information relating to the Trust Fund the Committee considers necessary.

11.5 FEES AND EXPENSES FROM FUND . The Trustee will receive reasonable annual compensation as may be agreed upon from time to time between the Company and the Trustee. The Trustee will pay all fees and expenses reasonably incurred by it in its administration of the Plan from the Trust Fund unless the Company pays the fees and expenses. The Committee shall not treat any fee or expense paid, directly or indirectly, by the Company as a Company contribution, provided the fee or expense relates to the ordinary and necessary administration of the Fund. No person who is receiving full pay from the Company shall receive compensation for services as Trustee from the Trust Fund.

11.6 PARTIES TO LITIGATION . Except as otherwise provided by ERISA, only the Company and the Plan Administrator and the Trustee are necessary parties to any court proceeding involving the Trustee or the Trust Fund. No Participant, or Beneficiary, is entitled to any notice of process unless required by ERISA. Any final judgment entered in any proceeding will be conclusive upon the Company and the Plan Administrator, the Trustee, Participants and Beneficiaries.

11.7 PROFESSIONAL AGENTS . The Trustee may employ and pay from the Trust Fund reasonable compensation to agents, attorneys, accountants and other persons to advise the Trustee as in its opinion may be necessary. The Trustee may delegate to any agent, attorney, accountant or other person selected by it any non-Trustee power or duty vested in it by the Plan, and the Trustee may act or refrain from acting on the advice or opinion of any agent, attorney, accountant or other person so selected.

11.8 DISTRIBUTION OF TRUST FUND . Subject to Section 7.4b. and Section 13.6, the Trustee shall make all distributions of benefits under the Plan in Company Stock valued at Fair Market Value as of the valuation date immediately preceding the date of distribution. The Trustee shall pay in cash any fractional share of Company Stock to which a Participant or his or her Beneficiary is entitled.

In the event the Trustee is to make a distribution in shares of Company Stock, the Trustee shall apply any balance in a Participant’s General Investments Account to provide shares of Company Stock for distribution at the Fair Market Value as of the Accounting Date immediately preceding the distribution.

11.9 DISTRIBUTION DIRECTIONS . If no one claims a payment or distribution made from the Trust, the Trustee shall promptly notify the Committee and then dispose of the payment in accordance with the subsequent direction of the Committee.

 

51


11.10 THIRD PARTY . No person dealing with the Trustee is obligated to see to the proper application of any money paid or property delivered to the Trustee, or to inquire whether the Trustee has acted pursuant to any of the terms of the Plan. Each person dealing with the Trustee may act upon any notice, request or representation in writing by the Trustee, or by the Trustee’s duly authorized agent, and is not liable to any person in so acting. The certificate of the Trustee that it is acting in accordance with the Plan will be conclusive in favor of any person relying on the certificate. If more than two persons act as Trustee, the decision of a majority of such persons controls with respect to any decision regarding the administration or investment of the Trust Fund.

11.11 RESIGNATION . The Trustee may resign at any time as Trustee of the Plan by giving thirty (30) days’ written notice in advance to the Company and to the Committee. If the Company fails to appoint a successor Trustee within 60 days of its receipt of the Trustee’s written notice of resignation, the Trustee will treat the Company as having appointed itself as Trustee and as having filed its acceptance of appointment with the former Trustee.

11.12 REMOVAL . The Company, by giving thirty (30) days’ written notice in advance to the Trustee, may remove any Trustee. In the event of the resignation or removal of a Trustee, the Company must appoint a successor Trustee if it intends to continue the Plan. If two or more persons hold the position of Trustee, in the event of the removal of one such person, during any period the selection of a replacement is pending, or during any period such person is unable to serve for any reason, the remaining person or persons will act as the Trustee.

11.13 INTERIM DUTIES AND SUCCESSOR TRUSTEE . Each successor Trustee succeeds to the title to the Trust vested in its predecessor by accepting in writing its appointment as successor Trustee and filing the acceptance with the former Trustee and the Committee without the signing or filing of any further statement. The resigning or removed Trustee, upon receipt of acceptance in writing of the Trust by the successor Trustee, must execute all documents and do all acts necessary to vest the title of record in any successor Trustee. Each successor Trustee has and enjoys all of the powers, both discretionary and ministerial, conferred under this Agreement upon its predecessor. A successor Trustee is not personally liable for any act or failure to act of any predecessor Trustee, except as required under ERISA. With the approval of the Company and the Committee, a successor Trustee, with respect to the Plan, may accept the account rendered and the property delivered to it by a predecessor Trustee without incurring any liability or responsibility for so doing.

11.14 VALUATION OF TRUST . The Trustee must value the Trust Fund as of each Accounting Date to determine the Fair Market Value of each Participant’s Account Balance in the Trust, and the Trustee also must value the Trust Fund on such other dates as directed by the Committee.

11.15 LIMITATION ON LIABILITY - IF INVESTMENT MANAGER APPOINTED . The Trustee is not liable for ERISA’s or omissions of any Investment Manager or Managers the Committee may appoint, nor is the Trustee under any obligation to invest or otherwise manage any asset of the Plan which is subject to the management of a properly appointed Investment Manager.

 

52


The Committee, the Trustee and any properly appointed Investment Manager may execute a letter agreement as a part of this Plan delineating the duties, responsibilities and liabilities of the Investment Manager with respect to any part of the Trust Fund under the control of the Investment Manager.

11.16 PARTICIPANT VOTING RIGHTS - Company Stock .

a. Tenders For Company Stock .

(1) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan to the contrary, if any, but subject to the provisions of subparagraphs (2), (3), (4), (5) and (6) of this paragraph a., in the event an offer shall be received by the Trustee (including but not limited to a tender offer or exchange offer within the meaning of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as from time to time amended and in effect) to acquire any shares of Company Stock held by the Trustee in the Trust, whether or not allocated to the Account of any Participant (hereinafter referred to as an “Offer”), the Trustee shall have no discretion or authority to sell, exchange or transfer any of such shares pursuant to such Offer except to the extent, and only to the extent, that the Trustee is timely directed to do so in writing (a) with respect to any Company Stock held by the Trustee subject to such Offer and allocated to the Account of any Participant, by each Participant to whose Account any of such shares are allocated, as a named fiduciary, within the meaning of Section 403(a)(1) of ERISA (referred to in this Section 11.16 as “named fiduciary”) and (b) with respect to any Company Stock held by the Trustee subject to such Offer and not allocated to the Account of any Participant, by each Participant who has Company Stock allocated to his or her Account, as named fiduciary, with respect to an amount of such unallocated Company Stock equal to the total amount of unallocated Company Stock, multiplied by a fraction the numerator of which is the amount of Company Stock allocated to the Participant’s Account under the Plan and the denominator of which is the total amount of Employers Securities allocated to the Accounts of all Participants under the Plan.

Upon timely receipt of such instructions, the Trustee shall, subject to the provisions of subparagraphs (3), (4) and (6) of this paragraph a., sell, exchange or transfer pursuant to such Offer, only such shares as to which such instructions were given. The Trustee shall use its best efforts to communicate or cause to be communicated to each Participant the consequences of any failure to provide timely instructions to the Trustee.

In the event, under the terms of an Offer or otherwise, any shares of Company Stock tendered for sale, exchange or transfer pursuant to such Offer may be withdrawn from such Offer, the Trustee shall follow such instructions respecting the withdrawal of such securities from such Offer in the same manner and the same proportion as shall be timely received by the Trustee from the Participants as named fiduciaries entitled under this paragraph to give instructions as to the sale, exchange or transfer of securities pursuant to such Offer.

 

53


(2) In the event that an Offer for fewer than all of the shares of Company Stock held by the Trustee in the Trust shall be received by the Trustee, each Participant who has been allocated any of such Company Stock subject to such Offer shall be entitled to direct the Trustee as to the acceptance or rejection of such Offer (as provided by subparagraph (1) of this paragraph a.) with respect to the largest portion of such Company Stock as may be possible given the total number or amount of shares of Company Stock the Plan may sell, exchange or transfer pursuant to the Offer based upon the instructions received by the Trustee from all other Participants who shall timely instruct the Trustee pursuant to this paragraph to sell, exchange or transfer such shares pursuant to such Offer, each on a pro rata basis in accordance with the number or amount of such shares allocated to their respective Company Stock Accounts.

(3) Notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph to the contrary, in the event that an Offer for fewer than 10 percent of all Company Stock held by the Trustee subject to such Offer held by the Trustee in the Trust shall be received by the Trustee, the Trustee shall determine, in its sole discretion, whether to sell, exchange or transfer any Company Stock pursuant to such Offer, taking into consideration items set forth in subparagraph (6) of this paragraph a.; provided, however, if there are multiple Offers within any twelve month period (each Offer being for fewer than 10 percent of the Company Stock held by the Trustee), the Trustee shall be required to solicit directions from Participants, as named fiduciaries, pursuant to the provisions of this Section 11.16 with respect to each outstanding Offer that, after taking into account all Company Stock sold, exchanged or transferred in accordance with any other Offer within the preceding 12 months and all outstanding Offers for Company Stock, would result in the sale, exchange or transfer within such 12-month period, in the aggregate with all other outstanding Offers, of more than 10 percent of the Company Stock held by the Trustee if all outstanding Offers were accepted by the Trustee.

(4) In the event an Offer shall be received by the Trustee and instructions shall be solicited from Participants in the Plan pursuant to subparagraph (1) of this paragraph a. regarding such Offer, and prior to termination of such Offer, another Offer is received by the Trustee for the Company Stock subject to the first Offer, the Trustee shall use its best efforts under the circumstances to solicit instructions from the Participants to the Trustee (a) with respect to Company Stock tendered for sale, exchange or transfer pursuant to the first Offer, whether to withdraw such tender, if possible, and, if withdrawn, whether to tender any Company Stock so withdrawn for sale, exchange or transfer pursuant to the second Offer and (b) with respect to Company Stock not tendered for sale, exchange or transfer pursuant to the first Offer,

 

54


whether to tender or not to tender such Company Stock for sale, exchange or transfer pursuant to the second Offer. The Trustee shall follow all such instructions received in a timely manner from Participants in the same manner and in the same proportion as provided in subparagraph (1). With respect to any further Offer for any Company Stock received by the Trustee and subject to any earlier Offer (including successive Offers from one or more existing offerors), the Trustee shall act in the same manner as described above.

(5) In the event an Offer for any Company Stock held by the Trustee in the Trust shall be received by the Trustee and the Participants shall be entitled to determine to accept, reject or withdraw an acceptance of such Offer pursuant to subparagraphs (1) through (4), (a) the Company and the Trustee shall not interfere in any manner with the decision of any Participant regarding the action of the Participant with respect to such Offer (hereinafter referred to as an “Investment Decision”), and the Trustee shall arrange for such Investment Decision to be made on a confidential basis; (b) the Trustee shall use its best efforts to communicate or cause to be communicated to all Participants the provisions of the Plan and Trust Agreement relating to the right of Participants to direct the Trustee with respect to Company Stock subject to such Offer, including unallocated Company Stock, and of the obligation of the Trustee to follow such directions; (c) the Trustee shall use its best efforts to distribute or cause to be distributed to Participants all communications directed generally to the owners of the Company Stock to whom such Offer is made or is available; and (d) the Trustee shall use its best efforts to distribute or cause to be distributed to Participants all communications that the Trustee may receive, if any, from the persons making the Offer or any other interested party (including the Company) relating to the Offer. The Company and the Committee shall provide the Trustee with such information and assistance as the Trustee may reasonably request in connection with any communications or distributions to Participants. In no event shall the communications to Participants by the offeror, the Company or other interested parties or public communications directed generally to the owners of the Company Stock which are the subject of an Offer be deemed to be interference in the making of an Investment Decision by any Participant; provided, however, that Act § 510 shall apply to any communication which threatens or intimates that actions which would violate Act § 510 will or might be taken with respect to any Participant who does not make an Investment Decision in accord with the wishes of the Company.

(6) In the event a court of competent jurisdiction shall issue to the Plan, the Company or the Trustee an opinion or order, which shall, in the opinion of counsel to the Company or the Trustee, invalidate under ERISA, in all circumstances or in any particular circumstances, any provision or provisions of this paragraph a. regarding the determination to be made as to whether or not Company Stock held by the Trustee shall be tendered pursuant to an Offer or cause any such provision or provisions to conflict with ERISA, then, upon notice thereof to the Company or the Trustee, as the

 

55


case may be, such invalid or conflicting provisions of this paragraph a. shall be given no further force or effect. In such circumstances the Trustee shall have no discretion to tender or not to tender Company Stock held in the Trust unless required under such order or opinion, but shall follow instructions received from Participants, to the extent such instructions have not been invalidated by such order or opinion. To the extent required to exercise any residual fiduciary responsibility with respect to such sale, exchange or transfer, the Trustee shall take into account in exercising its fiduciary judgment, unless it is clearly imprudent to do so, directions timely received from Participants, as such directions are most indicative of what action is in the best interests of Participants. Further, the Trustee, in addition to taking into consideration any relevant financial factors bearing on any such decision, shall take into consideration any relevant non-financial factors, including, but not limited to, the continuing job security of Participants as Employees of the Company or of any of its subsidiaries, conditions of employment, employment opportunities and other similar matters, and the prospect of the Participants and prospective Participants for future benefits under the Plan (including any subsequent release and allocation of Company Stock held in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account required under Section 11.3b.(6).

(7) Notwithstanding anything elsewhere in this Plan or Trust Agreement to the contrary, any proceeds received by the Trustee as a result of the sale, exchange or transfer of Company Stock pursuant to an Offer shall be reinvested in Company Stock by the Trustee, if such securities are available for purchase and if not, to the extent attributable to unallocated stock in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account, shall be used to pay down the Exempt Loan. The balance of the proceeds, if any, and the proceeds attributable to allocated Company Stock shall be invested in short-term, fixed income investments selected by the Trustee and having a maturity of not more than two years from the time such investment is made until the Trustee is otherwise directed by the Committee or until the Participants to whose accounts such investments are allocated shall be entitled to make investment elections with respect to such accounts in accordance with the Plan.

b. Voting Company Stock; Options and Other Rights .

(1) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan to the contrary, if any, the Trustee shall have no discretion or authority to vote Company Stock held in the Trust by the Trustee on any matter presented for a vote by the stockholders of the Company except in accordance with timely directions received by the Trustee from Participants who have Company Stock allocated to their Accounts under the Plan. Such directions shall be given by Participants acting in their capacity as named fiduciaries with respect to both allocated and unallocated Company Stock and, upon timely receipt of such instructions, the Trustee shall vote the Company Stock held in the Trust pursuant to the directions of Participants giving instructions to the Trustee as set forth below.

 

56


(a) Company Stock in Accounts . Each Participant who has Company Stock allocated to his or her Company Stock Account shall provide directions to the Trustee on any matter to be presented for a vote by the stockholders of the Company with respect to Company Stock allocated to the Account of the Participant under the Plan and the Trustee shall follow such directions.

With respect to Company Stock in any Account for which no instructions were timely received by the Trustee, the Trustee shall vote such Company Stock in accordance with the directions of the Participants who gave timely instructions to the Trustee, in the same manner and in the same proportion to the voting of Participants on such Company Stock with respect to which timely instructions were given.

(b) Company Stock in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account and other Unallocated Company Stock . Each Participant who has been allocated Company Stock to his or her Account shall, as named fiduciary, direct the Trustee with respect to the vote of Company Stock held by the Trustee in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account and all other unallocated Company Stock, and the Trustee shall follow the directions of those Participants who provide timely instructions to the Trustee. Each Participant who has been allocated Company Stock to his or her Account entitled to vote on any matter presented for a vote by the stockholders shall separately direct the Trustee with respect to the vote of a portion of the shares of Company Stock that are not allocated to the Account of any Participant or for which no instructions were timely received by the Trustee, whether or not allocated to the Account of any Participant. Such direction shall be with respect to such number of votes equal to the total number of votes attributable to Company Stock not allocated or with respect to which no responses were received multiplied by a fraction the numerator of which is the number of votes attributable to such Company Stock allocated to the Participant’s Company Stock Account and the denominator of which is the total number of votes attributable to such Company Stock allocated to the Account of all such Participants who have provided directions to the Trustee under this subparagraph.

(c) The Trustee shall use its best efforts to communicate or cause to be communicated to all Participants the provisions of this Plan and the Trust Agreement relating to the right of Participants to direct the Trustee with respect to the voting of Company Stock allocated to their Accounts under the Plan and of Company Stock not allocated to the Account of any Participant. The Trustee shall use its best efforts to distribute or cause to be distributed to Participants all communications directed generally to the owners of Company

 

57


Stock entitled to vote, and the Trustee shall use its best efforts to distribute or cause to be distributed to Participants all communications that the Trustee may receive, if any, from any person soliciting proxies or any other interested party (including the Company) relating to the matters being presented for a vote by the stockholders of the Company. The Company and the Committee shall provide the Trustee with such information and assistance as the Trustee may reasonably request in connection with any communications or distributions to Participants. In no event shall the communications to Participants with respect to matters being presented for a vote at a meeting of the stockholders of the Company by the Company or other interested parties or public communications directed generally to the stockholders of the Company be deemed to be interference in the making of a decision by any Participant as to the voting of Company Stock; provided, however, that Act § 510 shall apply to any communication which threatens or intimates that actions which would violate Act § 510 will or might be taken with respect to any Participant who does not issue directions to the Trustee in accord with the wishes of the Company.

(d) In the event a court of competent jurisdiction shall issue an opinion or order to the Plan, the Company or the Trustee which shall, in the opinion of counsel to the Company or the Trustee, invalidate under ERISA, in all circumstances or in any particular circumstances, any provision or provisions of this paragraph b. regarding the manner in which Company Stock held in the Trust shall be voted or cause any such provision or provisions to conflict with ERISA, then, upon notice thereof to the Company or the Trustee, as the case may be, such invalid or conflicting provision of this paragraph b. shall be given no further force or effect. In such circumstances the Trustee shall nevertheless have no discretion to vote Company Stock held in the Trust unless required under such order or opinion but shall follow instructions received from Participants, to the extent such instructions have not been invalidated. To the extent required to exercise any residual fiduciary responsibility with respect to voting, the Trustee shall take into account in exercising its fiduciary judgment, unless it is clearly imprudent to do so, directions timely received from Participants, as such directions are most indicative of what is in the best interests of Participants. Further, the Trustee, in addition to taking into consideration any relevant financial factors bearing on any such decision, shall take into consideration any relevant non-financial factors, including, but not limited to, the continuing job security of Participants as Employees of the Company or any of its subsidiaries, conditions of employment, employment opportunities and other similar matters, and the prospect of the Participants and prospective Participants for future benefits under the Plan (including any subsequent release and allocation of Company Stock held in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account).

 

58


(e) In the event that any option, right, warrant or similar property derived from or attributable to the ownership of Company Stock shall be granted, distributed or otherwise issued which is and shall become exercisable, each Participant shall be entitled, subject to the provisions set forth below, to direct the Trustee to sell, exercise, distribute (with the consent of the Committee) or retain any such option, right, warrant or similar property. For such purpose there shall be furnished to each Participant, on a timely and confidential basis, a form to be returned to the Trustee on which he or she may set forth his or her direction whether to sell, exercise, distribute or retain part or all of such option, right, warrant or similar property. Upon timely receipt of such form or other appropriate written direction, the Trustee shall follow such direction to sell, exercise, distribute or retain part or all of any such options, rights, warrants or similar property and, if such direction is to retain the same, the Trustee shall follow any later appropriate written directions to sell, exercise or distribute such options, rights, warrants or similar property upon receipt thereof. If a Participant shall direct the Trustee to exercise part or all of such options, rights, warrants or similar property, the Trustee shall accumulate the amount equal to the consideration necessary to exercise, from among the following sources: (1) by obtaining appropriate written direction and authorization from the Participant respecting one or more of a) if and to the extent necessary, the transfer and use, as he or she may designate, of the uninvested cash, if any, allocated to him or her in his or her General Investments Account; and b) if and to the extent necessary, the sale of part of his or her options, rights, warrants or similar property, and use of the proceeds thereof to exercise the remaining options, rights, warrants or similar property which he or she has directed to be exercised or (2) if and to the extent necessary, and to the extent the Trustee is willing and able, by borrowing an amount equal to the consideration necessary to exercise, provided that any such contribution or borrowing is permitted by applicable law and further provided that such contribution or borrowing will not adversely affect the continued qualified status of the Plan or continued exempt status of the Trust under the Code. In the event of any such borrowing, the Trustee shall make provisions for repayment thereof. The securities acquired by the Trustee upon such exercise shall be held in a special account or accounts established in the Trust at that time. If a Participant shall direct the Trustee to distribute to him or her any such options, rights, warrants or similar property, the Trustee, with the consent of the Committee, shall distribute such options, rights, warrants or similar property provided, as certified by the Committee, (1) the Participant is age 65 or more or has five or more years of Service and (2) such distribution will not adversely affect the continued qualified status of the Plan or continued exempt status of the Trust under the Code. If a Participant fails or refuses to file, with the Committee, an election not to withhold any Federal taxes upon

 

59


such distribution, the Trustee shall be deemed to be authorized, to the extent necessary, as instructed by the Committee, to sell part of such options, rights, warrants, or similar property and use the proceeds therefrom to pay all applicable Federal withholding taxes due in connection with such distribution. Upon any such distribution, the Trustee shall report the same to the Committee to permit compliance with the applicable reporting provisions of the Code. For all Plan purposes, all options, rights, warrants or similar property described in this subparagraph (2) of paragraph b. hereof, shall be treated as income added to the appropriate Accounts of Participants. If, within a reasonable period of time after the form soliciting direction from a Participant has been sent, no written direction shall have been received by the Trustee from him or her, the Trustee shall, in its sole discretion, sell, exercise or retain and keep unproductive of income such option, right, warrant or similar property for which no response has been received from such Participant and also for options, rights, warrants or similar property derived from, or attributable to, the ownership of Company Stock not yet allocated to any Participant’s Company Stock Account.

In addition the Trustee shall, in its sole discretion, sell, exercise or retain and keep unproductive of income such option, right, warrant or similar property attributable to unallocated Company Stock held in the Exempt Loan Suspense Account or other Account. In the event of a discretionary decision by the Trustee to exercise, the Trustee shall be deemed to be authorized to accumulate the amount equal to the consideration necessary to exercise from any of the sources specified herein and to hold such acquired securities in the Trust as specified herein. In connection with any discretionary decisions by the Trustee to sell, exercise or retain and keep unproductive of income any such option, right, warrant or similar property, the Trustee shall consider, in addition to any relevant financial factors, such as those set forth in paragraph b.(1)(d) hereof, all as evidenced by the proportion of the directions received from Participants to either sell, exercise or retain such options, rights, warrants or similar property, and shall also consider such other factors as the Trustee may deem relevant.

11.17 COMMITTEE DIRECTIONS . Any powers granted to the Trustee hereunder that are to be exercised according to the direction of the Committee shall be exercised by the Trustee only if, when and as directed by the Committee. The Trustee shall be under no liability for any loss or breach of trust of any kind which may result from any action due to compliance with a direction of the Committee or the failure of the Committee to give direction provided the Trustee has acted prudently.

The Trustee may assume that the Committee is discharging its duties under this agreement until and unless it is notified to the contrary in writing by any person known to the Trustee to be a Participant in the Plan or by the Company. In the event the Trustee receives such written notice, then

 

60


the Trustee shall communicate such written notice to the Committee and may if it so desires, after 30 days written notice to the Committee and to the Company, apply to a court of competent jurisdiction for guidance with respect to the disposition of the Trust Fund.

11.18 PROTECTION OF THE TRUSTEE . The Trustee shall be fully protected from any responsibility for action taken or omitted in accordance with the instructions, directions or approvals of the Committee, provided the Trustee has acted prudently.

ARTICLE XII

TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS

12.1 DETERMINATION OF TOP HEAVY STATUS . If this Plan is the only qualified plan maintained by the Company, the Plan is top heavy for a Plan Year if the top heavy ratio as of the Determination Date exceeds 60 percent. The top heavy ratio is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of the present value of Account Balances of all Key Employees as of the Determination Date and the denominator of which is a similar sum determined for all Employees. The Plan Administrator must include in the top heavy ratio, as a part of the present value of Account Balances, any contribution not made as of the Determination Date but includible under Code § 416 and the applicable Treasury regulations, and distributions made within the Determination Period. The Plan Administrator must calculate the top heavy ratio by disregarding the Account Balance (and distributions, if any, of the Account Balance) of any Non-Key Employee who was formerly a Key Employee, and by disregarding the Account Balance (including distributions, if any, of the Account Balance) of any individual who has not received credit for at least one Hour of Service with the Company during the Determination Period. The Plan Administrator must calculate the top heavy ratio, including the extent to which it must take into account distributions, rollovers and transfers, in accordance with Code § 416 and the regulations under that Code section.

If the Company maintains other qualified plans (including a simplified employee pension plan), or maintained another such plan which now is terminated, this Plan is top heavy only if it is part of the Required Aggregation Group, and the top heavy ratio for the Required Aggregation Group and for the Permissive Aggregation Group, if any, each exceeds 60 percent. The Plan Administrator will calculate the top heavy ratio in the same manner as required by the first paragraph of this Section 12.1, taking into account all plans within the Aggregation Group. To the extent the Plan Administrator must take into account distributions to a Participant, the Plan Administrator must include distributions from a terminated plan which would have been part of the Required Aggregation Group if it were in existence on the Determination Date. The Plan Administrator will calculate the present value of Account Balance under defined benefit plans or simplified employee pension plans included within the group in accordance with the terms of those plans, Code § 416 and the regulations under that Code section. If a Participant in a defined benefit plan is a Non-Key Employee, the Plan Administrator will determine his Account Balance under the accrual method, if any, which is applicable uniformly to all defined benefit plans maintained by the Company or, if there is no uniform method, in accordance with the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule accrual method described in Code § 411(b)(1)(C). To calculate the present value of benefits from a defined

 

61


benefit plan, the Plan Administrator will use ERISA assumptions (interest and mortality only) prescribed by the defined benefit plan(s) to value benefits for top heavy purposes. If any aggregated plan does not have a valuation date coinciding with the Determination Date, the Plan Administrator must value the Account Balances in the aggregated plan as of the most recent valuation date falling within the twelve-month period ending on the Determination Date, except as Code § 416 and applicable Treasury regulations require for the first and second plan year of a defined benefit plan. The Plan Administrator will calculate the top heavy ratio with reference to the Determination Dates that fall within the same calendar year.

12.2 DEFINITIONS . For purposes of applying the provisions of this Plan:

a. “Company” means the Company that adopts this Plan and any Related Employers.

b. “Compensation” means Compensation as determined under Section 5.8.b. (relating to the Highly Compensated Employee definition).

c. “Determination Date” for any Plan Year is the Accounting Date of the preceding Plan Year or, in the case of the first Plan Year of the Plan, the Accounting Date of that Plan Year. The “Determination Period” is the five (5) year period ending on the Determination Date.

For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, for purposes of determining the present values of accrued benefits and the amounts of Account Balances as of a Determination Date, the present values of accrued benefits and the amounts of Account Balances of an Employee as of the Determination Date shall be increased by the distributions made with respect to the Employee under the Plan and any plan aggregated with the Plan under Code § 416(g)(2) during the one-year period ending on the Determination Date. The preceding sentence shall also apply to distributions under a terminated plan which, had it not been terminated, would have been aggregated with the Plan under Code § 416(g)(2)(A)(i). In the case of a distribution made for a reason other than Separation from Service, death or Disability, this provision shall be applied by substituting “five-year period” for “one-year period.” The accrued benefits and Accounts of any individual who has not performed Services for the Company during the one-year period ending on the Determination Date shall not be taken into account. Matching contributions, if any, shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of Code § 416(c)(2) and the Plan. The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to matching contributions under the Plan or, if the Plan provides that the minimum contribution requirement shall be met in another plan, such other plan. Matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the average contribution percentage test and other requirements of Code § 401(m).

 

62


d. “Key Employee” means, as of any Determination Date, any Employee or former Employee (or Beneficiary of such Employee) who, for any Plan Year in the Determination Period: (1) has Compensation in excess of 50 percent of the dollar amount prescribed in Code § 415(b)(1)(A) (relating to defined benefit plans) and is an officer of the Company, (2) has Compensation in excess of the dollar amount prescribed in Code § 415(c)(1)(A) (relating to defined contribution plans) and is one of the Employees owning the ten largest interests in the Company, (3) is a more than 5 percent owner of the Company; or (4) is a more than 1 percent owner of the Company and has Compensation of more than $150,000. The constructive ownership rules of Code § 318 (or the principles of that section, in the case of an unincorporated Company,) will apply to determine ownership in the Company. The number of officers taken into account under clause (1) will not exceed the greater of 3 or 10 percent of the total number (after application of the Code § 414(q)(8) exclusions) of Employees, but no more than 50 officers.

For any Plan Year beginning after December 31, 2001, Key Employee means any Employee or former Employee (including any deceased Employee) who at any time during the Plan Year that includes the Determination Date was an officer of the Company having annual Compensation greater than $130,000 (as adjusted under Code § 416(i)(l) for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2002), a 5 percent owner of the Company or a 1 percent owner of the Company having annual Compensation of more than $150,000. For this purpose annual Compensation means Compensation within the meaning of Code § 415(c)(3). The Plan Administrator will make the determination of who is a Key Employee in accordance with Code § 416(i)(1) and the regulations under that Code section.

e. “Non-Key Employee” is an employee who does not meet the definition of Key Employee.

f. “Permissive Aggregation Group” is the Required Aggregation Group plus any other qualified plan maintained by the Company, but only if such group would satisfy in the aggregate the requirements of Code § 401(a)(4) and Code § 410. The Plan Administrator will determine the Permissive Aggregation Group.

g. “Required Aggregation Group” means: (1) each qualified plan of the Company in which at least one Key Employee participates at any time during the Determination Period; and (2) any other qualified plan of the Company which enables a plan described in clause (1) to meet the requirements of Code § 401(a)(4) or Code § 410.

12.3 TOP HEAVY MINIMUM ALLOCATION . The top-heavy minimum allocation requirement applies to the Plan only in a Plan Year for which the Plan is top heavy. If the Plan is top heavy in any Plan Year:

a. Each Non-Key Employee (as defined in Section 12.1.e.) who is a Participant and is employed by the Company on the last day of the Plan Year will receive a top heavy minimum allocation for that Plan Year.

 

63


b. The top heavy minimum allocation is the lesser of 3 percent of the Non-Key Employee’s Compensation for the Plan Year or the highest contribution rate for the Plan Year made on behalf of any Key Employee (as defined in Section 12.1.d.). However, if a defined benefit plan maintained by the Company which benefits a Key Employee depends on this Plan to satisfy the anti-discrimination rules of Code § 401(a)(4) or the coverage rules of Code § 410 (or another plan benefitting the Key Employee so depends on such defined benefit plan), the top heavy minimum allocation is 3 percent of the Non-Key Employee’s Compensation regardless of the contribution rate for the Key Employees

12.4 DETERMINING TOP-HEAVY CONTRIBUTION RATES . In determining under Section 12.2b. the highest contribution rate for any Key Employee, the Plan Administrator takes into account all Company contributions (including deferral contributions and including matching contributions, if any, but not including Company contributions to Social Security) and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant’s Account for the Plan Year, divided by his or her Compensation for the entire Plan Year. For purposes of satisfying the Company’s top-heavy minimum allocation requirement, the Plan Administrator disregards the elective deferrals and matching contributions, if any, allocated to a Non-Key Employee’s Account in determining the Non-Key Employee’s contribution rate. However, the Plan Administrator operationally may include in the contribution rate of a Non-Key Employee any matching contributions not necessary to satisfy the nondiscrimination requirements of Code § 401(k) or of Code § 401(m).

To determine a Participant’s contribution rate, the Plan Administrator must treat all qualified top-heavy defined contribution plans maintained by the Company (or by any Related Employer) as a single plan. If, for a Plan Year, there are no allocations of Company contributions or of Forfeitures for any Key Employee, the Plan does not require any top-heavy minimum allocation for the Plan Year, unless a top-heavy minimum allocation applies because of the maintenance by the Company of more than one plan.

12.5 SATISFACTION OF TOP-HEAVY MINIMUM . The Plan will satisfy the top-heavy minimum allocation requirement in accordance with the following requirements:

a. If the Company makes any necessary additional contribution to this Plan, the Plan Administrator first will allocate the Company contributions (the Forfeitures, if any) for the Plan Year in accordance with the provisions of Section 5.4. The Company then will contribute an additional amount for the Account of any Participant entitled under Section 12.3 to a top-heavy minimum allocation and whose contribution rate for the Plan Year, under this Plan and any other plan aggregated under this Section 12.4, is less than the top-heavy minimum allocation. The additional amount is the amount necessary to increase the Participant’s contribution rate to the top-heavy minimum allocation. The Plan Administrator will allocate the additional contribution to the Account of the Participant on whose behalf the Company makes the contribution.

 

64


b. If the Company makes the top-heavy minimum allocation under another plan, this Plan does not provide the top-heavy minimum allocation, and the Plan Administrator will allocate the annual Company contributions (and Forfeitures) under the Plan solely in accordance with the allocation method under Section 5.4.

ARTICLE 13

EXCLUSIVE BENEFIT, AMENDMENT, TERMINATION

13.1 EXCLUSIVE BENEFIT . Except as provided under Article V, the Company has no beneficial interest in any asset of the Trust Fund, and no part of any asset in the Trust Fund may ever revert to or be repaid to a Company, either directly or indirectly; nor prior to the satisfaction of all liabilities with respect to the Participants and their Beneficiaries under the Plan, may any part of the corpus or income of the Trust Fund, or any asset of the Trust, be (at any time) used for, or diverted to, purposes other than the exclusive benefit of the Participants or their Beneficiaries. However, if the Commissioner of Internal Revenue, upon the Company’s request for initial approval of this Plan, determines that the Trust created under the Plan is not a qualified trust exempt from Federal income tax, then (and only then) the Trustee, upon written notice from the Company, will return the Company’s contributions (and increment attributable to the contributions) to the Company. The Trustee must make the return of the Company contribution under this Section 13.1 within one (1) year of a final disposition of the Company’s request for initial approval of the Plan. The Plan and Trust shall terminate upon the Trustee’s return of the Company’s contributions.

13.2 AMENDMENT BY COMPANY . The Company has the right at any time and from time to time:

a. to amend this Agreement in any manner it deems necessary or advisable in order to qualify (or maintain qualification of) this Plan and the Trust created under it under the appropriate provisions of the Code § 401(a); and

b. to amend this Agreement in any other manner.

No amendment may authorize or permit any of the Trust Fund (other than the part which is required to pay taxes and administrative expenses) to be used or diverted to purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of the Participants or their Beneficiaries. No amendment may cause or permit any portion of the Trust Fund to revert to or become a property of the Company. The Company also may not make any amendment which affects the rights, duties or responsibilities of the Trustee, the Plan Administrator or the Committee without the written consent of the Trustee, the Plan Administrator or any affected member of the Committee.

 

65


An amendment (including the adoption of this Plan as a restatement of an existing plan) may not decrease a Participant’s Account Balance, except to the extent permitted under Code § 412(c)(8), and may not reduce or eliminate Protected Benefits determined immediately prior to the adoption date (or, if later, the effective date) of the amendment. An amendment reduces or eliminates Protected Benefits if the amendment has the effect of either (1) eliminating or reducing an early retirement benefit or a retirement-type subsidy (as defined in Treasury regulations), or (2) except as provided by Treasury regulations, eliminating an optional form of benefit. The Plan Administrator must disregard an amendment to the extent application of the amendment would fail to satisfy this paragraph. If the Plan Administrator must disregard an amendment because the amendment would violate clause (1) or clause (2), the Plan Administrator must maintain a schedule of the early retirement option or other optional forms of benefit the Plan must continue for the affected Participants.

The Company shall make all amendments in writing. Each amendment shall state the date to which it is either retroactively or prospectively effective.

13.3 DISCONTINUANCE . The Company has the right, at any time, to suspend or discontinue its contributions under the Plan, and to terminate, at any time, this Plan and the Trust created under this Agreement. The Plan will terminate upon the first to occur of the following:

a. the date terminated by action of the Company;

b. the date the Company shall be judicially declared bankrupt or insolvent, unless the proceeding authorized continued maintenance of the Plan; or

c. the dissolution, merger, consolidation or reorganization of the Company or the sale by the Company of all or substantially all of its assets, unless the successor or purchaser makes provision to continue the Plan, in which event the successor or purchaser shall substitute itself as the Company under this Plan. Any termination of the Plan resulting from this paragraph (c) is not effective until compliance with any applicable notice requirements under ERISA.

13.4 FULL VESTING ON TERMINATION . Upon either full or partial termination of the Plan, or, if applicable, upon the date of complete discontinuance of Company contributions to the Plan, an affected Participant’s right to his or her Account Balance is One Hundred Percent (100 percent) Vested, irrespective of the Vested percentage which otherwise would apply under Article VI.

13.5 MERGER/DIRECT TRANSFER . The Trustee may not consent to, or be a party to, any merger or consolidation with another plan, or to a transfer of assets or liabilities to another plan, unless immediately after the merger, consolidation or transfer, the surviving Plan provides each Participant an Account Balance equal to or greater than the Account Balance each Participant would have received had the Plan terminated immediately before the merger or consolidation or transfer. The Trustee possesses the specific authority to enter into merger agreements or direct transfer of assets agreements with the trustees of other retirement plans described in Code § 401(a), including an elective transfer, and to accept the direct transfer of plan assets, or to transfer plan assets, as a party to any such agreement.

 

66


The Trustee may accept a direct transfer of Plan assets on behalf of an Employee prior to the date the Employee satisfies the Plan’s eligibility conditions. If the Trustee accepts such a direct transfer of plan assets, the Plan Administrator and Trustee must treat the Employee as a Participant for all purposes of the Plan except the Employee is not a Participant for purposes of sharing in Company contributions or Forfeitures under Article V until he or she actually becomes a Participant in the Plan.

If the Plan receives a direct transfer (by merger or otherwise) of elective contributions (or amounts treated as elective contributions) under a Plan with a Code §§ 401(k) arrangement, the distribution restrictions of Code §§ 401(k)(2) and (10) continue to apply to those transferred elective contributions.

13.6 TERMINATION . The Company has established this Plan with the bona fide intention and expectation that it be permanent. However, it realizes that adverse business conditions or other circumstances beyond its control may make it impossible to continue its contributions as provided herein. Upon termination of the Plan, the distribution provisions of Article VII remain operative, with the following exceptions:

a. if the present value of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance does not exceed $1,000, the Committee will direct the Trustee to distribute the Participant’s Vested Account Balance to him or her in lump sum as soon as administratively practicable after the Plan terminates; and

b. if the present value of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance exceeds $1,000, the Participant or the Beneficiary, in addition to the distribution events permitted under Article VII, may elect to have the Trustee commence distribution of his or her Vested Account Balance as soon as administratively practicable after the Plan terminates.

To liquidate the Trust, the Committee may purchase a deferred annuity contract for each Participant which protects the Participant’s distribution rights under the Plan, if the Participant’s Vested Account Balance exceeds $1,000 and the Participant does not elect an immediate distribution pursuant to paragraph b.

In lieu of the preceding provisions of this Section 14.6 and the distribution provisions of Article VII, the Committee will direct the Trustee to distribute each Participant’s Vested Account Balance, in lump sum, as soon as administratively practicable after the termination of the Plan, irrespective of the present value of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance and without requirement of the Participant’s consent to that distribution. This paragraph does not apply if: (a) the Plan provides an annuity option; or (2) as of the period between the Plan termination date and the final distribution of assets the Company maintains any other defined contribution plan (other than an ESOP).

 

67


If the Committee is unable to locate any Participant or Beneficiary whose Account becomes distributable upon Plan termination, the Committee will apply Section 10.12.b.

The Trust shall continue until the Trustee in accordance with the direction of the Committee has distributed all of the benefits under the Plan. On each Valuation Date, the Committee will credit any part of a Participant’s Account Balance retained in the Trust with its proportionate share of the Trust’s income, expenses, gains and losses, both realized and unrealized. Upon termination of the Plan, the amount, if any, in a suspense account under Article V will revert to the Company, subject to the conditions of the Treasury regulations permitting such a reversion. A resolution or amendment to freeze all future benefit accrual but otherwise to continue maintenance of this Plan is not a termination for purposes of this Section 14.6.

ARTICLE XIV

MISCELLANEOUS

14.1 EVIDENCE . Anyone required to give evidence under the terms of the Plan may do so by certificate, affidavit, document or other information which the person to act in reliance may consider pertinent, reliable and genuine, and to have been signed, made or presented by the proper party or parties. Both the Plan Administrator and the Trustee are fully protected in acting and relying upon any evidence described under the immediately preceding sentence.

14.2 NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPANY ACTION . Neither the Trustee nor the Plan Administrator has any obligation nor responsibility with respect to any action required by the Plan to be taken by the Company, any Participant or eligible Employee, nor for the failure of any of the above persons to act or make any payment or contribution, or to otherwise provide any benefit contemplated under this Plan. Furthermore, the Plan does not require the Trustee or the Plan Administrator to collect any contribution required under the Plan, or determine the correctness of the amount of any Company contribution. Neither the Trustee nor the Plan Administrator need inquire into or be responsible for any action or failure to act on the part of the others. Any action required of the Company must be by its Board of Directors or its designate.

14.3 FIDUCIARIES NOT INSURERS . The Trustee, the Committee and the Company in no way guarantee the Trust Fund from loss or depreciation. The Company does not guarantee the payment of any money which may be or becomes due to any person from the Trust Fund. The liability of the Committee and the Trustee to make any payment from the Trust Fund at any time and all times is limited to the then available assets of the Trust.

14.4 WAIVER OF NOTICE . Any person entitled to notice under the Plan may waive the notice.

 

68


14.5 SUCCESSORS . The Plan is binding upon all persons entitled to benefits under the Plan, their respective heirs and legal representatives, upon the Company, its successors and assigns, and upon the Trustee, the Committee and their successors.

14.6 STATE LAW . The Plan shall be deemed to have been made in Iowa, and all questions arising with respect to the provisions of this Plan and any and all performance thereunder, or breach thereof, shall be interpreted, governed and construed pursuant to the laws of Iowa, except to the extent Federal statute supersedes Iowa law; and the Trustee and Participants under the Plan consent that Iowa shall be the forum where any cause of action arising under the Plan shall be instituted.

14.7 EMPLOYMENT NOT GUARANTEED . Nothing contained in this Plan, or with respect to the establishment of the Trust, or any modification or amendment to the Plan or Trust, or in the creation of any Account, or the payment of any benefit, gives any Employee, Participant or any Beneficiary any right to continue employment, any legal or equitable right against the Company, or Employee of the Company, or against the Trustee, or its agents or employees, or against the Committee, except as expressly provided by the Plan, the Trust, ERISA or by a separate agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused these presents to be executed as of the date and year first above written.

 

MIDWESTONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.
By:   /s/ Charles Howard
  Charles Howard, Chief Executive Officer
MIDWESTONE BANK, TRUSTEE
By:   /s/ Sherry Mattson
  Sherry Mattson, Vice President

 

STATE OF IOWA    )
   )SS:
COUNTY OF MAHASKA    )

On this          day of November, 2006, before me, a Notary Public in and for the State of Iowa, personally appeared                      and                      , to me personally known, who, being by me duly sworn, did say that they are the President and Secretary, respectively, of MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc., an Iowa corporation; that the corporation is without corporate

 

69


seal; that said instrument was signed on behalf of said corporation by authority of its Board of Directors; and                      and                      , as such officers, acknowledged the execution of said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of said corporation by it and by them voluntarily executed.

Given under my hand and seal of office, this          day of November, 2006.

 

     
Notary Public in and for the State of Iowa

 

STATE OF IOWA    )
   )SS:
COUNTY OF MAHASKA    )

On this          day of November, 2006, before me, a Notary Public in and for the State of Iowa, personally appeared                      , to me personally known, who, being by me duly sworn, did say that he/she is a                      of MidWestOne Bank, N.A.; that said instrument was signed on behalf of said Bank by authority of its Board of Directors; and                      , as such officer, acknowledged the execution of said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of said corporation by it and by                      voluntarily executed.

Given under my hand and seal of office, this          day of November, 2006.

     
Notary Public in and for the State of Iowa

 

70

Exhibit 10.5.1

MIDWEST ONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.

FIFTH AMENDMENT TO SECOND AMENDED AND RESTATED

CREDIT AGREEMENT AND FIRST AMENDMENT TO TERM NOTE

This Fifth Amendment to Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement and First Amendment to Term Note (herein, the “Amendment” ) is entered into as of November 27, 2006, between MidWest One Financial Group, Inc., an Iowa corporation (the “Borrower” ), and Harris N.A. (the “Bank” ).

PRELIMINARY STATEMENTS

A. The Borrower and the Bank are parties to that certain Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of November 30, 2003, as amended (the “Credit Agreement”). All capitalized terms used herein without definition shall have the same meanings herein as such terms have in the Credit Agreement.

B. The Borrower has requested that the Bank extend the amortization and final maturity of the Term Loan, and the Bank is willing to do so under the terms and conditions set forth in this Amendment.

NOW, THEREFORE, for good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:

SECTION 1.    AMENDMENTS.

Subject to the satisfaction of the conditions precedent set forth in Section 2 below, the Credit Agreement shall be and hereby is amended as follows:

1.1. Section 1.2 of the Credit Agreement (Term Loan) shall be and hereby is amended and restated in its entirety to read as follows:

Section 1.2. Term Loan. Subject to the terms and conditions hereof, the Bank agrees to make a term loan (the “Term Loan”) to the Borrower concurrently herewith in the principal amount of $6,000,000. The Term Loan shall be made against and evidenced by a promissory note of the Borrower in the form (with appropriate insertions) attached hereto as Exhibit B (the “Term Note”). The Borrower shall make semi-annual principal installment payments on the Term Loan on the last day of May and November of each year, commencing May 31, 2004, with the amount of each such principal installment to equal the amount set forth in Column B below shown opposite of the relevant due date as set forth in Column A below:

 

-1-


COLUMN A

   COLUMN B

PAYMENT DATE

   MANDATORY SCHEDULED PRINCIPAL
PAYMENT ON TERM LOAN

05/31/04

   $ 500,000

11/30/04

   $ 500,000

05/31/05

   $ 500,000

11/30/05

   $ 500,000

05/31/06

   $ 500,000

11/30/06

   $ 500,000

05/31/07

   $ 500,000

11/30/07

   $ 500,000

05/31/08

   $ 500,000

11/30/08

   $ 500,000

05/31/09

   $ 500,000

11/30/09

   $ 500,000

, it being agreed that the final payment of both principal and interest not sooner paid on the Term Loan shall be due and payable on November 30, 2009, the final maturity thereof.

1.2. The first paragraph of Exhibit B to the Credit Agreement and of the Term Note shall each be amended and restated to read as set forth below:

FOR VALUE RECEIVED, the undersigned, M1DWES TONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC., an Iowa corporation (the “Borrower”), promises to pay to the order of HARRIS N.A. (the “Bank”) at its office at 111 West Monroe Street, Chicago, Illinois, the principal sum of Six Million and no/100 Dollars ($6,000,000.00) in consecutive semi-annual principal installments in amounts and on dates set forth in Section 1.2 of the Credit Agreement hereinafter referred to, with a final installment in the amount of all principal not sooner paid due on November 30, 2009, the final maturity hereof.

1.3. In order to reflect the amendment to the Term Note made pursuant to subsection 1.2 above, the Bank shall type on the Term Note the following legend:

This Note has been amended as provided for in that certain Fifth Amendment to Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement and First Amendment to Term Note dated as of November 27, 2006.

 

-2-


; provided, however, that the failure of the Bank to type such a legend shall not affect or impair the effectiveness of the amendment to the Term Note made pursuant to subsection 1.2 above. By signing in the space provided for that purpose below, the Borrower hereby confirms its promise to pay the principal of and interest on the Term Note as amended by this Amendment.

SECTION 2.    CONDITIONS PRECEDENT.

The effectiveness of this Amendment is subject to the satisfaction of all of the following conditions precedent:

2.1. The Borrower and the Bank shall have executed and delivered this Amendment.

2.2. Legal matters incident to the execution and delivery of this Amendment shall be satisfactory to the Bank and its counsel.

SECTION 3.    REPRESENTATIONS.

In order to induce the Bank to execute and deliver this Amendment, the Borrower hereby represents to the Bank that as of the date hereof, after giving effect to amendments set forth above, the representations and warranties set forth in Section 5 of the Credit Agreement are and shall be and remain true and correct (except that the representations contained in Section 5.5 shall be deemed to refer to the most recent financial statements of the Borrower delivered to the Bank) and the Borrower is in compliance with the terms and conditions of the Credit Agreement and no Default or Event of Default exists under the Credit Agreement or shall result after giving effect to this Amendment.

SECTION 4.    MISCELLANEOUS.

4.1. The Borrower heretofore executed and delivered to the Bank various Collateral Documents. The Borrower hereby acknowledges and agrees that the Liens created and provided for by the Collateral Documents continue to secure, among other things, the Obligations arising under the Credit Agreement as amended hereby; and the Collateral Documents and the rights and remedies of the Bank thereunder, the obligations of the Borrower thereunder, and the Liens created and provided for thereunder remain in full force and effect and shall not be affected, impaired or discharged hereby. Nothing herein contained shall in any manner affect or impair the priority of the liens and security interests created and provided for by the Collateral Documents as to the indebtedness which would be secured thereby prior to giving effect to this Amendment.

4.2. Except as specifically amended herein, the Credit Agreement shall continue in full force and effect in accordance with its original terms. Reference to this specific Amendment need not be made in the Credit Agreement, the Notes, or any other instrument or document executed in connection therewith, or in any certificate, letter or communication issued or made

 

-3-


pursuant to or with respect to the Credit Agreement, any reference in any of such items to the Credit Agreement being sufficient to refer to the Credit Agreement as amended hereby.

4.3. The Borrower agrees to pay on demand all costs and expenses of or incurred by the Bank in connection with the negotiation, preparation, execution and delivery of this Amendment, including the fees and expenses of counsel for the Bank.

4.4. This Amendment may be executed in any number of counterparts, and by the different parties on different counterpart signature pages, all of which taken together shall constitute one and the same agreement. Any of the parties hereto may execute this Amendment by signing any such counterpart and each of such counterparts shall for all purposes be deemed to be an original. Delivery of executed counterparts of this Amendment by telecopy shall be effective as an original. This Amendment shall be governed by the internal laws of the State of Illinois.

[SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW]

 

-4-


This Fifth Amendment to Second Amended and Restated Credit Agreement is entered Into as of the date and year first above written.

 

MidWestOne FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.
By   /s/ David A. Meinert
  Name   David A. Meinert
  Title   Executive V. P. & CFO

Accepted and agreed to:

 

Harris N.A.
By   /s/ Robert G. Bomben
  Name   Robert G. Bomben
  Title   Vice President

 

-5-

Exhibit 13

LOGO

 

2006 ANNUAL REPORT


LOGO

 

Our Message to You… Our Valued Shareholders

Benjamin Disraeli once said, “The secret of success is constancy to purpose.” At MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc., our vision is to be the leading financial services provider in our communities. To attain this goal, we’ve defined our mission: Maximize shareholder value by a relentless focus on providing efficient service and support to our customers, employees and communities. Persistent determination toward fulfilling our mission and vision keep “success” in our realm.

One of our most significant accomplishments, the consolidation of our four banks, was attained in only nine months. While the consolidation was challenging, we are truly grateful to the efforts of each team member. Due to everyone’s dedication, the transition was complete January 1, 2006, and we have already started reaping the benefits. Many processes are no longer duplicated, creating more time to focus on the needs of our customers.

Not only did the consolidation create efficiencies, it has positioned us for current and future expansion. both in existing markets and into new ones. We have moved from our temporary location to our permanent banking office in historic downtown Davenport, Iowa. Locating downtown met the needs of both our bank and the community. This market, with immense potential, has already provided us with over $43 million in loans. With naming rights on the building just blocks from the Mississippi River, MidWestOne Bank will light up the Davenport skyline for years to come.

Additionally, in the fall of 2007, we’ll be opening a new location in Cedar Falls, Iowa. Our current offices in nearby Waterloo and Hudson already have customers from Cedar Falls who are anxiously awaiting the convenience of the new location. The combination of branches in Cedar Falls, Hudson and Waterloo will strategically position MidWestOne to effectively serve customers throughout the Cedar Valley area. leading to future growth.

In order for our company to be the leading financial services provider in our communities, we are committed to offering more than just banking services. Our investment and insurance firms, MidWestOne Investment Services, Inc. and Cook & Son Agency, Inc., work daily to integrate their services with those offered by the bank.

Steady growth in our existing markets led to strong portfolio growth in 2006. Total assets grew 10%, to end the year at $745 million. Net income increased $353,000, up 6% from 2005. The company earned $1.74 per share in 2006, compared to $1.63 in 2005. Additionally, MidWestOne share price grew 12.2%, with dividends up three cents per share over last year.

Our success in 2006 can be attributed to “constancy to purpose” – a relentless focus on our vision and mission. We invite you to peruse the next few pages for illustrations of our success and a glimpse through the eyes of the people that make it happen. our employees, community members and most importantly, our customers.

Charles S. Howard

Chairman, President & CEO, right

David A. Meinert

Executive Vice President & CFO, left


LOGO

 

In 2006, Cook & Son Agency exceeded revenue and earnings goals by expanding its customer base.

MidWestOne Bank opened 16,087 new accounts in 2006.

Company-wide, MidWestOne employs 236 people.

Revenue generated from sales was up 89% for MidWestOne Investment Services in 2006.


LOGO

 

2006 Financial Highlights

Year Ended December 31

                                

(in thousands, except per share amounts)

  

 

2006

 

 

2005

 

 

2004

 

 

2003

 

 

2002

 

SUMMARY OF INCOME DATA

                                

Interest income excluding loan pool participations

  

$

37,312

 

 

29,858

 

 

27,977

 

 

28,593

 

 

27,482

 

Interest and discount on loan pool participations

  

 

9,142

 

 

10,222

 

 

9,395

 

 

8,985

 

 

10,058

 

Total interest income

  

 

46,454

 

 

40,080

 

 

37,372

 

 

37,578

 

 

37,540

 

Total interest expense

  

 

21,209

 

 

15,426

 

 

13,370

 

 

14,767

 

 

17,027

 

Net interest income

  

 

25,245

 

 

24,654

 

 

24,002

 

 

22,811

 

 

20,513

 

Provision for loan losses

  

 

180

 

 

468

 

 

858

 

 

589

 

 

1,070

 

Noninterest income

  

 

5,928

 

 

4,428

 

 

4,276

 

 

4,358

 

 

3,787

 

Noninterest expense

  

 

21,459

 

 

19,415

 

 

18,513

 

 

17,387

 

 

14,426

 

Income before income tax

  

 

9,534

 

 

9,199

 

 

8,907

 

 

9,193

 

 

8,804

 

Income tax expense

  

 

3,093

 

 

3,111

 

 

3,078

 

 

3,267

 

 

3,015

 

Net income

  

$

6,441

 

 

6,088

 

 

5,829

 

 

5,926

 

 

5,789

 

PER SHARE DATA

                                

Net income - basic

  

$

1.74

 

 

1.63

 

 

1.54

 

 

1.54

 

 

1.49

 

Net income - diluted

  

 

1.71

 

 

1.59

 

 

1.50

 

 

1.50

 

 

1.46

 

Cash dividends declared

  

 

0.71

 

 

0.68

 

 

0.68

 

 

0.64

 

 

0.64

 

Book value

  

 

16.83

 

 

15.77

 

 

15.18

 

 

14.84

 

 

14.17

 

Net tangible book value

  

 

12.92

 

 

11.81

 

 

11.32

 

 

11.08

 

 

11.53

 

SELECTED FINANCIAL RATIOS

                                

Net income to average assets

  

 

0.92

%

 

0.93

%

 

0.92

%

 

0.98

%

 

1.07

%

Net income to average equity

  

 

10.65

%

 

10.49

%

 

10.23

%

 

10.52

%

 

10.91

%

Dividend payout ratio

  

 

40.80

%

 

41.72

%

 

44.16

%

 

41.56

%

 

42.95

%

Total shareholders’ equity to total assets

  

 

8.39

%

 

8.63

%

 

8.75

%

 

9.01

%

 

10.37

%

Tangible shareholders’ equity to tangible assets

  

 

6.57

%

 

6.59

%

 

6.67

%

 

6.88

%

 

8.60

%

Tier 1 capital ratio

  

 

10.01

%

 

10.38

%

 

10.88

%

 

11.20

%

 

14.67

%

Net interest margin

  

 

3.99

%

 

4.11

%

 

4.14

%

 

4.10

%

 

4.10

%

Gross revenue of loan pools to total gross revenue

  

 

17.45

%

 

22.97

%

 

22.17

%

 

21.42

%

 

24.34

%

Allowance for loan losses to total loans

  

 

1.13

%

 

1.16

%

 

1.19

%

 

1.29

%

 

1.30

%

Non-performing loans to total loans

  

 

1.15

%

 

0.77

%

 

0.73

%

 

0.83

%

 

0.86

%

Net loans charged off (recovered) to average loans

  

 

(0.11

%)

 

0.05

%

 

0.25

%

 

0.08

%

 

0.15

%

December 31 (in thousands)

  

 

2006

 

 

2005

 

 

2004

 

 

2003

 

 

2002

 

SELECTED BALANCE SHEET DATA

                                

Total assets

  

$

744,911

 

 

676,332

 

 

650,564

 

 

623,306

 

 

537,026

 

Total loans net of unearned discount

  

 

503,832

 

 

433,437

 

 

398,854

 

 

377,017

 

 

306,024

 

Total loan pool participations

  

 

98,885

 

 

103,570

 

 

105,502

 

 

89,059

 

 

82,341

 

Allowance for loan losses

  

 

5,693

 

 

5,011

 

 

4,745

 

 

4,857

 

 

3,967

 

Total deposits

  

 

560,615

 

 

505,245

 

 

475,102

 

 

453,125

 

 

395,546

 

Total shareholders’ equity

  

 

62,533

 

 

58,386

 

 

56,930

 

 

56,144

 

 

55,698

 


LOGO

 

OUR MISSION To maximize shareholder value by a relentless focus on…

…providing efficient service and support to our employees.

Providing efficient service and support to our customers and communities stems from the dedication and efforts of our employees. It is a mission that cannot be fulfilled by only one person, but the team as a whole.

“Every customer deserves access to comprehensive wealth management, and that vision from MidWestOne leadership sets the agenda for our growing investment services division. Eventually, we’d like to see a financial adviser on-site at every location. We offer advice for every stage of our customers’ financial planning: asset accumulation, income distribution and strategic planning for future wealth transfers. After ten years in large corporate settings, I welcome the caring family atmosphere of MidWestOne and I appreciate our accessible leaders.”

- Mike Roozeboom, President, MidWestOne Investment Services, Pella

“As we open new offices, we’re committed to hiring upbeat, positive self-starters who work well with one another—individuals whose overall outlook creates a ripple effect throughout the rest of the staff and customer base. I was hired with extensive management experience so I notice the talents of the people who work for an organization, as well as the quality of the training provided. MidWestOne sends every new employee to a comprehensive orientation focused on how we cater to our customers. It is so impressive. and Charlie Howard is there to meet everyone. Having an opportunity to get to know the CEO is a real team-builder and is so refreshing!”

- Wendy Terronez, Branch Manager/Consumer Loan Officer, Davenport

“Right out of college, I started as a teller at another bank and worked my way up. Coming home to Waterloo in April 2005 to work for MidWestOne was a great move. Banking is so much more than calculations, charts or crunching numbers. Here, it’s about people. As a community bank, we are empowered to make decisions based on our knowledge of our customers’ needs, their businesses and the overall business climate. Best of all, I like how all of us, staff as well as customers, feel like family.”

- Luke Lesyshen, Commercial Loan Officer, Waterloo

Mike

Wendy

Luke


LOGO

 

At MidWestOne,our timeless values - demonstrating we care, listening to needs, being proactive and taking that extra step—provide endless possibilities, not only to our customers, but also to our communities and shareholders.

As we’ve ventured into metropolitan areas, it’s become evident that the community-feel offered by MidWestOne is truly valued. Starting from nothing, the Davenport office has grown to $43 million in assets in a little over a year. Brian Cornwell, market president in Davenport, said, “Our growth has been tremendous. There are banks that have been in town for over 50 years whose book of business is only three to four times the size of what we’ve done so far.”

David Meinert, MidWestOne’s executive vice president and CFO, mentioned, “Markets like Davenport and Waterloo/Cedar Falls have tremendous growth potential. It is incredible to enter new communities with absolutely no presence and be able to make such an impact.” MidWestOne seems to be well received because of personalized service and community spirit put forth. “We take pride that our employees serve on civic boards, coordinate fundraisers and volunteer to help kids in the community. Our presence in all of our markets is much more than simply financial.”

…providing efficient service and support

“By building a new location, we’re showing we are committed to the community. committed to expanding, growing and investing here.” - Jim Chizek, Market President in the Cedar Valley


LOGO

 

Waterloo and Cedar Falls are similar to Davenport in the fact that together they have a large population, yet there is still the desire for community banking. “Anyone can make a loan, but not all banks have relationships with their customers,” said Jim Chizek, market president in the Cedar Valley. “Banking is a win/win partnership that means we succeed if they succeed. My customers are my friends. We are partners.”

to our communities.

“It matters to us that MidWestOne has made the commitment to our region by joining our momentum for revitalization. Welcome to Davenport!”

- Dan Huber, former President, DavenportOne


LOGO

 

Theodore Roosevelt once said, “Far and away the best prize that life offers is the chance to work hard at work worth doing.” At MidWestOne, we not only believe our services make a difference, our customers affirm it.

“Jim, my banker at MidWestOne, knows me, my business and our community. Not only has he given me sound advice, he’s actually saved me money and even stopped me when I was about to make a costly decision that wasn’t best for business. Best of all, when I walk into MidWestOne, everyone knows my name, welcomes me and is genuinely eager to help me achieve my goals.”

- Robert Klein, Co-Owner of B.K. Tile, MidWestOne Bank customer, Cedar Falls

“From the determination of my line of credit, to the lot purchase and groundbreaking, to project completion was an extraordinary relationship. I give many thanks to the professional staff at MidWestOne. They went above and beyond to see to it the financials were done correctly and promptly. I felt like my project was their only one. Not having to worry about banking details allowed me to stay focused on being a doctor and put my remaining time and energy into overlooking the construction itself. Having a bank like MidWestOne made building a new facility much easier than I ever imagined.”

- Dr. Anthony D. Bailey, MidWestOne Bank customer, Cedar Falls

…providing efficient service and support

“ It’s a very people thing! I bank with MidWestOne because I know, trust and appreciate their entire team. expert advice has facilitated years of our growth and success.”

- Robert Klein, MidWestOne Bank customer, Cedar Falls

Jim


LOGO

 

“In the middle of the night, we watched our home burn to the ground. Standing barefoot in the grass, thankful to be alive, we called the fire department, followed by Howard, our insurance rep from Cook & Son. We’re grateful for all the years our children did fire drills. and grateful for Howard. He showed how much he cared by checking on us and arranging everything. He even found us an apartment while we rebuilt. Howard helped to make a difficult time much easier.”

-Annie Hedrick, Cook & Son Agency customer, Pella

“My customers are the reason I go to work every morning,” stated Howard Slagter, president and CEO of Cook & Son Agency, Inc. “They are more than just customers. I consider each one a friend.” To all of us at MidWestOne, helping our customers exceed their financial goals, as well as prepare for rough times, is definitely work worth doing.

to our customers.

“Howard has made sure we’re okay. from the night of the fire, through rebuilding. even now. His service and support mean a lot.”

- Annie Hedrick, Cook & Son Agency customer, Pella

Howard


LOGO

 

OUR VISION

To be the leading financial services provider…

…in our communities.

Today, financial services encompass so much more than simply offering checking and savings accounts. Members of MidWestOne Financial Group work together to provide comprehensive financial and fiscal management, through banking, investments and insurance.

Sue and John Doty, who are enjoying retirement in their charming condo in downtown Pella, Iowa, can attest to the importance of sound financial planning. “John plays golf almost every day and I enjoy just not working,” commented Sue. Not only has the couple utilized the advisers at MidWestOne Investment Services, they have had a long-time banking relationship at MidWestOne Bank. Their financial adviser helped Sue and John manage their 401(k)s and profit sharing plans in such a way that when John retired at 62, Sue could retire too, even though she was only 55. “We’ve always appreciated working with a company we know and trust. Employees are friendly, knowledgeable and go the extra step to make sure we are meeting our financial goals, whether it is banking or investments.”

No matter the community, you will find many different people with many different financial needs. Whether it is a young child, a college student, a couple that just got married or someone looking to retire, our mission is to help them every step along the way.

“ We love retirement. Thanks to our financial planning adviser, we were able to retire early!”

- Sue Doty, MidWestOne Investment Services customer, Pella


LOGO

 

CONSOLIDATED Balance SHEETS

December 31 (in thousands)

  

 

2006

 

 

2005

 

ASSETS

              

Cash and due from banks

  

$

20,279

 

 

13,103

 

Interest-bearing deposits in banks

  

 

447

 

 

417

 

Cash and cash equivalents

  

 

20,726

 

 

13,520

 

Investment securities:

              

Available for sale

  

 

70,743

 

 

74,506

 

Held to maturity (fair value of $12,168 in 2006 and $12,925 in 2005)

  

 

12,220

 

 

12,986

 

Loans

  

 

503,832

 

 

433,437

 

Allowance for loan losses

  

 

(5,693

)

 

(5,011

)

Net loans

  

 

498,139

 

 

428,426

 

Loan pool participations

  

 

98,885

 

 

103,570

 

Premises and equipment, net

  

 

12,327

 

 

10,815

 

Accrued interest receivable

  

 

6,587

 

 

5,334

 

Goodwill

  

 

13,405

 

 

13,405

 

Other intangible assets

  

 

1,128

 

 

1,417

 

Other assets

  

 

10,751

 

 

12,353

 

Total assets

  

$

744,911

 

 

676,332

 

LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS ‘E QUITY

              

Deposits:

              

Demand

  

$

64,291

 

 

50,309

 

Interest-bearing checking accounts

  

 

65,482

 

 

65,435

 

Savings

  

 

101,443

 

 

115,218

 

Certificates of deposit

  

 

329,399

 

 

274,283

 

Total deposits

  

 

560,615

 

 

505,245

 

Federal funds purchased

  

 

465

 

 

7,575

 

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

  

 

99,100

 

 

83,100

 

Notes payable

  

 

4,050

 

 

6,100

 

Long-term debt

  

 

10,310

 

 

10,310

 

Accrued interest payable

  

 

2,804

 

 

1,672

 

Other liabilities

  

 

5,034

 

 

3,944

 

Total liabilities

  

 

682,378

 

 

617,946

 

SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

              

Common stock, $5 par value; authorized 20,000,000 shares;issued 4,912,849 as of December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005

  

 

24,564

 

 

24,564

 

Capital surplus

  

 

13,076

 

 

12,886

 

Treasury stock at cost; 1,197,418 and 1,211,462 shares as of December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively

  

 

(17,099

)

 

(16,951

)

Retained earnings

  

 

42,447

 

 

38,630

 

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

  

 

(455

)

 

(743

)

Total shareholders’ equity

  

 

62,533

 

 

58,386

 

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

  

$

744,911

 

 

676,332

 


LOGO

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF Income

Year Ended December 31

                 

(in thousands, except per share amounts)

  

 

2006

 

 

2005

  

2004

INTEREST INCOME

                 

Interest and fees on loans

  

$

33,897

 

 

26,518

  

23,885

Interest income and discount on loan pool participations

  

 

9,142

 

 

10,222

  

9,395

Interest on bank deposits

  

 

32

 

 

9

  

4

Interest on federal funds sold

  

 

84

 

 

13

  

50

Interest on investment securities:

                 

Available for sale

  

 

2,809

 

 

2,829

  

3,589

Held to maturity

  

 

490

 

 

489

  

449

Total interest income

  

 

46,454

 

 

40,080

  

37,372

INTEREST EXPENSE

                 

Interest on deposits:

                 

Interest-bearing checking accounts

  

 

347

 

 

321

  

239

Savings

  

 

2,818

 

 

1,677

  

1,328

Certificates of deposit

  

 

11,880

 

 

7,891

  

6,770

Interest on federal funds purchased

  

 

418

 

 

272

  

82

Interest on Federal Home Loan Bank advances

  

 

4,446

 

 

3,933

  

3,975

Interest on notes payable

  

 

373

 

 

583

  

428

Interest on long-term debt

  

 

927

 

 

749

  

548

Total interest expense

  

 

21,209

 

 

15,426

  

13,370

Net interest income

  

 

25,245

 

 

24,654

  

24,002

Provision for loan losses

  

 

180

 

 

468

  

858

Net interest income after provision for loan losses

  

 

25,065

 

 

24,186

  

23,144

NONINTEREST INCOME

                 

Service charges and fees

  

 

2,831

 

 

2,309

  

2,292

Brokerage commissions

  

 

995

 

 

564

  

326

Insurance commissions

  

 

705

 

 

218

  

85

Data processing income

  

 

219

 

 

203

  

209

Mortgage origination fees

  

 

580

 

 

443

  

455

Other operating income

  

 

810

 

 

663

  

683

Gains (losses) on sale of available for sale securities

  

 

(212

)

 

28

  

226

Total noninterest income

  

 

5,928

 

 

4,428

  

4,276

NONINTEREST EXPENSE

                 

Salaries and employee benefits expense

  

 

12,546

 

 

10,830

  

10,539

Net occupancy expense

  

 

3,491

 

 

3,468

  

3,222

Professional fees

  

 

656

 

 

975

  

854

Other intangible asset amortization

  

 

289

 

 

305

  

308

Other operating expense

  

 

4,477

 

 

3,837

  

3,590

Total noninterest expense

  

 

21,459

 

 

19,415

  

18,513

Income before income tax expense

  

 

9,534

 

 

9,199

  

8,907

Income tax expense

  

 

3,093

 

 

3,111

  

3,078

Net income

  

$

6,441

 

 

6,088

  

5,829

Net income per share - basic

  

$

1.74

 

 

1.63

  

1.54

Net income per share - diluted

  

$

1.71

 

 

1.59

  

1.50


LOGO

 

CONSOLIDATED Statements OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)

(in thousands, except per share amounts)

  

 
 

Common
Stock

  

Capital
Surplus

 
 

 

Treasury
Stock

 
 

 

Retained
Earnings

 
 

 

Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)

 
 
 
 

 

Total

 

Balance at December 31, 2003

  

$

24,564

  

12,976

 

 

(14,589

)

 

31,832

 

 

1,361

 

 

56,144

 

Comprehensive income:

                                     

Net income

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

5,829

 

 

 

 

5,829

 

Unrealized losses arising during the year on securities available for sale

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

(1,256

)

 

(1,256

)

Less realized gains on securities available for sale, net of tax

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

(140

)

 

(140

)

Total comprehensive income

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

5,829

 

 

(1,396

)

 

4,433

 

Dividends paid ($.68 per share)

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

(2,576

)

 

 

 

(2,576

)

Treasury stock reissued for the purchase of intangible assets (6,601 shares)

  

 

  

27

 

 

88

 

 

 

 

 

 

115

 

Stock options exercised (77,456 shares)

  

 

  

(129

)

 

1,005

 

 

 

 

 

 

876

 

Treasury stock purchased (115,379 shares)

  

 

  

 

 

(2,144

)

 

 

 

 

 

(2,144

)

ESOP shares allocated

  

 

  

82

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

82

 

Balance at December 31, 2004

  

 

24,564

  

12,956

 

 

(15,640

)

 

35,085

 

 

(35

)

 

56,930

 

Comprehensive income:

                                     

Net income

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6,088

 

 

 

 

6,088

 

Unrealized losses arising during the year on securities available for sale

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

(687

)

 

(687

)

Less realized gains on securities available for sale, net of tax

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

(21

)

 

(21

)

Total comprehensive income

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6,088

 

 

(708

)

 

5,380

 

Dividends paid ($.68 per share)

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

(2,543

)

 

 

 

(2,543

)

Treasury stock reissued for the purchase of nonbank subsidiary (4,393 shares)

  

 

  

21

 

 

61

 

 

 

 

 

 

82

 

Stock options exercised (73,405 shares)

  

 

  

(160

)

 

1,002

 

 

 

 

 

 

842

 

Treasury stock purchased (127,797 shares)

  

 

  

 

 

(2,374

)

 

 

 

 

 

(2,374

)

ESOP shares allocated

  

 

  

69

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

69

 

Balance at December 31, 2005

  

 

24,564

  

12,886

 

 

(16,951

)

 

38,630

 

 

(743

)

 

58,386

 

Comprehensive income:

                                     

Net income

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6,441

 

 

 

 

6,441

 

Unrealized gains arising during the year on securities available for sale

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

155

 

 

155

 

Less realized losses on securities available for sale, net of tax

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

133

 

 

133

 

Total comprehensive income

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6,441

 

 

288

 

 

6,729

 

Dividends paid ($.71 per share)

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

(2,624

)

 

 

 

(2,624

)

Stock-based compensation

  

 

  

81

 

 

178

 

 

 

 

 

 

259

 

Stock options exercised (68,469 shares)

  

 

  

(16

)

 

972

 

 

 

 

 

 

956

 

Treasury stock purchased (67,050 shares)

  

 

  

 

 

(1,298

)

 

 

 

 

 

(1,298

)

ESOP shares allocated

  

 

  

125

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

125

 

Balance at December 31, 2006

  

$

24,564

  

13,076

 

 

(17,099

)

 

42,447

 

 

(455

)

 

62,533

 


LOGO

 

INFORMATION Company

MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. Common Stock trades on the NASDAQ Global Market and the quotations are furnished by the NASDAQ system. There were 412 shareholders of record on December 31, 2006 and an estimated 1,200 additional beneficial holders whose stock was held in street name by brokerage houses.

NASDAQ Symbol OSKY

Corporate Headquarters

222 First Avenue East P.O. Box 1104 Oskaloosa, IA 52577 (641) 673-8448 www.midwestonefinancial.com

Annual Shareholders’ Meeting

April 26, 2007, 10:30 a.m. The Peppertree 2274 Highway 63 Oskaloosa, IA 52577

Wall Street Journal and Other Newspapers

MdWstOneFnl or MdWsOnFn

Transfer Agent/Dividend Disbursing Agent

Illinois Stock Transfer Company

209 West Jackson Boulevard, Suite 903 Chicago, IL 60606 (312) 427-2953 (800) 757-5755

Independent Auditor

KPMG LLP 2500 Ruan Center Des Moines, IA 50309

The following table sets forth the quarterly high and low closing price per share for the Company’s stock during 2006 and 2005.

‘06 Quarter Ended

  

 

High

  

 

Low

March 31

  

$

19.80

  

$

17.50

June 30

  

 

19.70

  

 

18.75

September 30

  

 

19.86

  

 

18.80

December 31

  

 

20.55

  

 

18.85

‘05 Quarter Ended

  

 

High

  

 

Low

March 31

  

$

20.26

  

$

17.48

June 30

  

 

18.90

  

 

17.50

September 30

  

 

19.24

  

 

18.38

December 31

  

 

18.74

  

 

17.25

As of December 31, 2006, the Company had 3,715,431 shares of Common Stock outstanding. On December 31, 2005, there were 3,701,387 shares outstanding. The Company has declared per share cash dividends with respect to its Common Stock as follows:

Quarter

  

 

1st

  

 

2nd

  

 

3rd

  

 

4th

2006

  

$

.17

  

$

.18

  

$

.18

  

$

.18

2005

  

$

.17

  

$

.17

  

$

.17

  

$

.17

FORM 10-K

Copies of the MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. Annual Report to the Securities and Exchange Commission on Form 10-K will be mailed without charge to shareholders upon written request to Karen K. Binns, Secretary/Treasurer, at the corporate headquarters. It is also available on the Securities and Exchange Commission’s Internet website at: www.sec.gov/cgi-bin/srch-edgar.


LOGO

 

20% of employees have worked for MidWestOne for more than 10 years.

All of our branches contribute to charitable causes in their communities.


LOGO

 

OUR Corporate OFFICERS

Charles S. Howard, Chairman, President & CEO David A. Meinert, Executive Vice President & CFO Jeffrey L. Rhoads, Vice President/Finance Karen K. Binns, Secretary/Treasurer

Bryce C. Abbas, Auditor

Jeffrey D. Richards, Loan Review Officer

OUR Board OF DIRECTORS

Richard R. Donohue, TD&T Financial Group, P.C. • Dr. Donal D. Hill, Medical Arts Clinic, P.C.

Charles S. Howard,Chairman, President & CEO • Barbara J. Kniff-McCulla, KLK Construction Corp.

David A. Meinert, Executive Vice President & CFO • John P. Pothoven, President & CEO, MidWestOne Bank James G. Wake, Smith-Wake Ag Services • Michael R. Welter, M & M Enterprises Robert D. Wersen, Interpower Corporation • Edward C. Whitham, Financial Management Accounting, Inc. R. Scott Zaiser, Zaiser’s Landscaping, Inc.

OUR Locations

MidWestOne Bank www.midwestonebank.com

Oskaloosa • Belle Plaine • Burlington Davenport • Fairfield • Fort Madison Hudson • North English • Ottumwa • Pella Sigourney • Wapello • Waterloo

MidWestOne Investment Services, Inc.

Pella • Burlington • Fairfield • Oskaloosa Ottumwa • Sigourney

Cook & Son Agency, Inc. - Pella

Waterloo Hudson

Belle Plaine

North English

Davenport

Pella

Wapello

Oskaloosa

Sigourney

Ottumwa

Fairfield Burlington

Fort Madison

Exhibit 21

Subsidiaries of MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc.

December 31, 2006

 

Subsidiary Name

 

Name Under
Which Doing
Business

 

State or Other
Jurisdiction
in which
Incorporated

MidWestOne Bank

  ________________________   Iowa

MIC Financial, Inc.

  ________________________   Iowa

MidWestOne Investment Services, Inc.

  ________________________   Iowa

Cook & Son Agency, Inc.

  ________________________   Iowa

Exhibit 23

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors

MidWest One Financial Group, Inc.:

We consent to incorporation by reference in the registration statement (No. 333-59510) on Form S-8 of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and subsidiaries, of our report dated March 23, 2007, with respect to the consolidated balance sheets of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2006 and 2005, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in shareholders’ equity and comprehensive income, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2006, which report appears in the December 31, 2006 annual report on Form 10-K of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. and subsidiaries.

As discussed in Notes 1 and 15 to the consolidated financial statements, effective January 1, 2006, MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. changed its method of accounting for stock-based compensation.

/s/ KPMG LLP

Des Moines, Iowa

March 23, 2007

Exhibit 31.1

Certification of Chief Executive Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a - 14(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

I, Charles S. Howard, President and Chief Executive Officer, certify that:

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc.;

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) for the registrant and have:

(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

(b) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

(c) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent function):

(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: March 23, 2007     /s/ Charles S. Howard
    Charles S. Howard
    President and Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 31.2

Certification of the Chief Financial Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a - 14(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

I, David A. Meinert, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, certify that:

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc.;

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) for the registrant and have:

(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

(b) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

(c) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent function):

(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: March 23, 2007     /s/ David A. Meinert
    David A. Meinert
    Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 32.1

Certification of Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a - 14(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and 18 U.S.C., Section 1350, as adopted Pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

I hereby certify that the accompanying Annual Report of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc. on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2006 fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and that information contained in such Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of MidWest One Financial Group, Inc.

 

   
Date: March 23, 2007     /s/ Charles S. Howard
    Charles S. Howard
    President and Chief Executive Officer
   
      /s/ David A. Meinert
    David A. Meinert
    Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer